Teacher’s Manual for K-12 Education Harold D. Baker, Ph.D. ALEKS Corporation ii ALEKS Teacher’s Manual for K-12 Education, Version 3.8. Copyright © 2008 ALEKS Corporation. Revised December 10, 2008. Prepared by Harold D. Baker, Ph.D. ® ALEKS is a registered trademark of ALEKS Corporation. Contents Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What is ALEKS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 The ALEKS Teacher’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Quick Start 3 2.1 Obtaining a Class Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.2 Registering Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3 Setup Guide for Teachers 5 3.1 Teacher Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.4 Teacher Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.5 Lab Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.6 Student Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.7 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.8 Teacher Authorization of Student Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.9 Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3.10 First Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.11 Report Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.12 Beginning the Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 iii iv CONTENTS 4 Assessment Mode 15 4.1 Assessments in ALEKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.2 Rules for Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.3 Scheduling of Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.4 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 4.5 Answer Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 4.6 Manipulators for Mathematical Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 4.7 Mathematical Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 4.8 Types of Mathematical Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 4.9 Advanced Mathematical Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 4.10 The Answer Editor for the Number Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 4.11 The Answer Editor for Graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4.12 The Answer Editor for Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4.13 Assessment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4.13.1 Standard Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4.13.2 Interpreting the Pie Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4.13.3 State Standards Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 4.14 Ready to Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 4.15 Progress Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 5 Learning Mode 33 5.1 The ALEKS Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 5.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5.2.1 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5.2.2 English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5.2.3 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5.2.4 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 5.2.5 Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 5.2.6 Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 5.2.7 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 5.2.8 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 CONTENTS v 5.2.9 Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.2.10 Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.2.11 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.2.12 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.2.13 MyPie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.3 The Learning Mode Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 5.3.1 Item Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 5.3.2 Explanation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.3.3 Practice Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.3.4 Wrong Answer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 5.3.5 Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 5.4 Feedback in Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 5.5 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 5.6 Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 5.7 Ask a Friend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 6 Teacher Module: Basic Interface 45 6.1 How do I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 6.2 Class Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6.3 6.2.1 Create a new course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6.2.2 View all your courses and course codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 6.2.3 Customize a course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 6.2.4 Password issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 6.2.5 Account preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 6.2.6 Student Account preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 6.2.7 Move a student from one class to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6.2.8 Unenroll a student from a class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6.2.9 Delete a class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 School Admin (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.3.1 Create a new teacher account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.3.2 Password issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 vi CONTENTS 6.4 6.3.3 Teacher account preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 6.3.4 Move a class from one teacher to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 6.3.5 Delete an Teacher Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 6.4.1 Class Progress options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 6.4.2 Download Excel spreadsheet 6.4.3 Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 6.4.4 Statistical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 6.4.5 State standards report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 6.4.6 Individual learning progress since latest assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 6.4.7 Individual detailed progress history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6.4.8 Individual overall progress in assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 6.4.9 Scheduled assessment report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6.4.10 Average report (pie chart) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 6.4.11 Display options for Average Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 6.4.12 Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 6.4.13 Ready to learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 6.4.14 What students can do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 6.4.15 Quiz results for all the students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 6.4.16 State standards report for a single student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 6.4.17 Progress report for a single student in this class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6.4.18 Report for a single student in this class (pie chart) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 6.4.19 Complete list of topics mastered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 6.4.20 Quiz results for a particular student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 6.5 Taking Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 6.5.1 Schedule a new assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 6.5.2 Detailed scheduling options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 6.5.3 Grading with Scheduled Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 6.5.4 Cancel an assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 6.5.5 Change the name, date, grading scale of an assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 6.5.6 Create a quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 CONTENTS vii 6.5.7 Tips for making quizzes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 6.5.8 Grading with quizzes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 6.5.9 Availability of quizzes to students. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 6.5.10 Edit a quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 6.5.11 Delete a quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 6.5.12 Authorize a student account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 6.6 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 6.6.1 Show me a tutorial for the “Advanced” Teacher Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 6.6.2 Enter the “Advanced” Teacher Module now. 7 Advanced Teacher Module: Results & Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 75 7.1 The ALEKS Advanced Teacher Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 7.2 Teacher Tutorial (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 7.3 Access to the Advanced Teacher Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 7.4 Online Help in the Advanced Teacher Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 7.5 View Student Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 7.6 View Student Assessment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 7.7 7.6.1 Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 7.6.2 State Standards Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 7.6.3 Learning Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 7.6.4 List of Topics Mastered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 View Class Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 7.7.1 Report Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7.7.2 Progress in Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7.7.3 Total progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 7.7.4 Most recent progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 7.7.5 Progress over last 6 months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 7.7.6 Progress over last 3 months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 7.7.7 Progress over last month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 7.7.8 Most recent assessment only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 7.7.9 Full progress over last 6 months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 viii CONTENTS 7.7.10 Full progress over last 3 months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.7.11 Full progress over last month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.7.12 Scheduled Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.7.13 Statistical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.7.14 Assign Learning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.7.15 Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.7.16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.7.17 Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.8 7.9 View Class Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7.8.1 State Standards Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7.8.2 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 7.8.3 Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 7.8.4 Ready to learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 7.8.5 What students can do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 7.8.6 Focusing Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 7.8.7 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Schedule Student Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 7.10 Schedule Class Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 7.10.1 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 7.10.2 Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 7.10.3 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.10.4 Restricted Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.10.5 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 7.11 Create, Edit, View Quizzes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.11.1 Create New Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 7.11.2 Grading with Quizzes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.11.3 Availability of Quizzes to Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.11.4 Edit Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.11.5 Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 7.11.6 Makeup Quizzes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 7.12 Send Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 CONTENTS ix 7.13 Check Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.14 Check Server Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.15 Create Teacher Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7.16 Edit Teacher Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 7.17 Create Class Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 7.18 Edit Class Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 7.19 Textbook Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 7.20 Enroll and Unenroll Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 7.21 Edit Student Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 7.22 Authorize Student Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 7.23 Intermediate Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 7.24 Content Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 7.25 Assign Learning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8 Advanced Teacher Module: Standards & Programs 113 8.1 Items, Programs, and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 8.2 Navigation and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 8.3 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 8.4 Program Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 8.4.1 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 8.4.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 8.4.3 Using the Program Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 9 QuickTables 119 9.1 Setting Up QuickTables for your Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 9.2 How Your Students Use QuickTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 9.3 Reporting your Students’ Progress in QuickTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 9.4 Additional Features in QuickTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 10 Teaching with ALEKS 127 10.1 The ALEKS Educational Paradigm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 10.2 The Teacher and ALEKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 x CONTENTS 10.3 Planning the ALEKS Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 10.4 Preparing Your Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 10.5 Focused Instruction with ALEKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 10.6 Models of Classroom Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 10.7 Monitoring Student Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 10.8 Monitoring the Progress of a Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 10.9 Monitoring Individual Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 10.10Moving a Student to a New Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 10.11Ordering Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 10.12Independent Study and Distance Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 10.13The ALEKS Knowledge Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 10.14Modification of Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 10.15Learning Rates in ALEKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 11 Knowledge Spaces and the Theory Behind ALEKS 141 11.1 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 11.2 Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 11.2.1 Domain, Items, and Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 11.2.2 Knowledge States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 11.2.3 Knowledge Structures and Knowledge Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 11.2.4 Inner and Outer Fringes of a Knowledge State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 11.2.5 Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 11.3 Selected Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 12 Frequently Asked Questions 153 12.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 12.2 Technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 12.3 Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 12.4 Assessments & Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 12.5 Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 12.6 Educational Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 CONTENTS xi 13 Support 163 A ALEKS Student User’s Guide 165 A.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 A.2 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 A.3 Registration and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 A.4 Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 A.5 Assessments and Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 A.5.1 Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 A.5.2 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 A.5.3 Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 A.5.4 Progress in the Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 A.5.5 Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 A.6 Logging on to Your Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 A.7 Installation on Additional Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 A.8 Guidelines for Effective Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 A.9 QuickTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 A.10 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 A.11 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 B Programs in ALEKS 183 B.1 Mathematics - LV3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 B.2 Mathematics - LV4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 B.3 Mathematics - LV5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 B.4 Mathematics - LV6 / Essential Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 B.5 Middle School Math 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 B.6 Middle School Math 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 B.7 Middle School Math 3 / Foundations of High School Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 B.8 Middle School Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 B.9 Pre-Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 B.10 Algebra 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 xii CONTENTS B.11 High School Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 B.12 Algebra 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 B.13 Trigonometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 B.14 PreCalculus without Trigonometry / College Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 B.15 PreCalculus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 B.16 AP Statistics (Quantitative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 List of Figures 3.1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2 The ALEKS Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.3 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3.4 Registration (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.5 Registration (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3.6 Registration (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 4.1 The Answer Editor for Mathematical Expressions (Assessment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 4.2 Mathematical Expressions Produced by the Answer Editor 4.3 Using Special Keys in the Answer Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 4.4 The Answer Editor for the Number Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 4.5 The Answer Editor for Graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4.6 The Answer Editor for Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4.7 Assessment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 5.1 The Options Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5.2 The Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.3 Item Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 5.4 Explanation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.5 Practice Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 5.6 Wrong Answer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 5.7 Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 5.8 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 5.9 Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 xiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 xiv LIST OF FIGURES 6.1 Teacher Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 6.2 How do I Questions 6.3 Class Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6.4 School Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.5 Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 6.6 State standards report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 6.7 Individual learning progress since latest assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 6.8 Individual detailed progress history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6.9 Individual overall progress in assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 6.10 Scheduled Assessment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6.11 Average report (pie chart) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 6.12 Quiz results for all the students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 6.13 State standards report for a single student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 6.14 Progress report for a single student in this class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6.15 Report for a single student in this class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 6.16 Taking Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 6.17 Schedule a new assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 6.18 Grading with Scheduled Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 6.19 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 7.1 Tutorial for the Advanced Teacher Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 7.2 The Results and Progress Directory (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . 77 7.3 Student Progress (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 7.4 Student Report (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 7.5 Class Progress (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 7.6 Class Report (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7.7 Student Assessment (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 7.8 Class Assessment (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.9 Grading with Scheduled Assessment (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 7.10 Creating a Quiz (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 7.11 Send Message (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 LIST OF FIGURES xv 7.12 Server Statistics (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 7.13 Teacher Account (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 7.14 Class Account (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 7.15 Textbook Integration (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 7.16 Student Account (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 7.17 Intermediate Objectives List (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 7.18 Intermediate Objectives (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 7.19 Content Editor (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 7.20 Assign Learning Rates (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 8.1 The Standards & Programs Directory (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . 114 8.2 The Program Editor (Advanced Teacher Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 9.1 QuickTables Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 9.2 QuickTables Learning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 9.3 QuickTables Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 9.4 QuickTables Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 9.5 QuickTables Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 11.1 Domain of Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 11.2 Knowledge State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 11.3 Learning Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 11.4 Outer Fringe of a Knowledge State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 11.5 Inner Fringe of a Knowledge State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 12.1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 A.1 The ALEKS Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 A.2 Class Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 A.3 The Answer Editor (Tutorial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 A.4 Assessment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 A.5 ALEKS QuickTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 A.6 QuickTables Learning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 xvi LIST OF FIGURES Preface Congratulations on your interest in ALEKS! This is an online educational system like none you have encountered before, a system that uses computer technology to promote math learning that is pedagogically sound and cutting edge. The features of ALEKS make it a self-contained tool, opening new horizons for educators and learners alike in any educational context. The ALEKS Class Management System enables teachers and administrators to oversee and monitor their students’ progress, communicate with them, track usage levels, and focus instruction. By its unprecedented use of Artificial Intelligence, ALEKS determines quickly and precisely what your students know and what they need to learn, guiding them down individualized learning paths to mastery. Assessment and practice problems are algorithmically generated, so the students cannot predict them. The programs used in ALEKS are customizable, letting you conveniently add or subtract topics. Since ALEKS is accessed over the World Wide Web using standard browsers, no complicated technical preparation is needed—and your students can work at any time, from home or from the classroom! It’s a personal tutor for each of your students, at a fraction of what such services normally cost. The benefits of using ALEKS are striking. Students work in a dynamic, interactive learning environment on precisely those materials that they are individually ready to learn, building momentum toward mastery. It is the personalized, “just-in-time” learning system. ALEKS may be used in a variety of classroom situations—whether in a traditional classroom or in a self-directed or distance-learning environment. This Teacher’s Manual is intended to provide complete information on the functioning of ALEKS. A description of its contents can be found in Chapter 1. xvii xviii PREFACE Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 What is ALEKS? ALEKS is an online system for the assessment and individualized teaching of mathematics. It is accessed over the World Wide Web on any suitable computer and is designed to allow the monitoring and management of entire classes and schools. The core of the system is an efficient, adaptive assessment engine that determines quickly and precisely what an individual student knows. Based on that assessment data, the system is able to offer material that the student is best able to learn at a given time. The ALEKS Learning Mode includes explanations and algorithmically generated practice problems, ongoing assessment of student knowledge, an online math dictionary, and facilities for review and collaborative help. It can be used on an independent basis or as a supplement to classroom instruction. The ALEKS system is the product of years of cutting-edge research into the mathematical modeling of human knowledge (See Chapter 11). The creators of ALEKS are cognitive scientists, software engineers, and university professors. In designing ALEKS, their goal was to achieve the utmost simplicity of use without compromising the depth, rigor, or richness of mathematics instruction at its inspirational best. ALEKS is a tool to empower both teachers and learners of math: it opens doors and windows into the assessment and representation of knowledge, and it breaks down barriers to success by recognizing the vast diversity of paths that lead to mastery. The ALEKS system can make a radical difference in how math learning is experienced. 1.2 The ALEKS Teacher’s Manual The purpose of the ALEKS Teacher’s Manual is to give teachers using ALEKS information on the operation of the system that is as complete as possible. The system is not complex. ALEKS can be and often is used with no documentation whatsoever. 1 2 CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION At the same time, we wish to offer teachers a clear idea of everything ALEKS does, how it works, and where to find answers to their students’ questions. ALEKS is designed to be used without help from the Teacher’s Guide. Feel free to use the system now. If questions arise, or if you want to learn more about ALEKS, this Teacher’s Guide is intended as a convenient and comprehensive reference. NOTE. For a brief, comprehensive overview of ALEKS, please turn directly to the “Frequently Asked Questions” in Chapter 12. The first chapters are those most likely to be turned to by teachers using ALEKS for the first time. Chapter 2, “Quick Start,” contains a concise checklist for beginning to use ALEKS. Chapter 3, “Setup Guide for Teachers,” provides all of the information necessary for preparing to use ALEKS with one or more classes. This ranges from technical requirements and installation through the students’ first ALEKS session (which typically involves registration, tutorial, initial assessment, and entry into the Learning Mode). (Much of the information is the same as that in Appendix A.) Chapters 4 through 8 contain descriptions of the principal parts of the ALEKS system: Assessment Mode, Learning Mode, and Teacher Module. The Teacher Module is discussed in three chapters. Chapter 6 presents the Teacher Module generally and is followed by treatments of the more specialized capacities of the Advanced Teacher Module. Chapter 7 covers Results & Progress, the facility for monitoring student use of ALEKS and managing accounts. Chapter 8 covers Standards & Class Program, the facility for reviewing and modifying the curricular information used by ALEKS for a particular school or class. Chapters 11 through 13 provide additional information that may be necessary or of interest to teachers using ALEKS. Chapter 11, “Knowledge Spaces and the Theory Behind ALEKS,” explains the history of Knowledge Space theory and its fundamental concepts, along with the evolution of ALEKS itself. Also included is a Bibliography for those seeking to understand the theory behind ALEKS in greater depth. Chapter 12 provides answers to frequently asked questions about ALEKS. Chapter 13 gives the information necessary for obtaining technical and other support. Appendix A contains the complete text of the ALEKS Student User Guide. Appendix B contains content summaries for ALEKS course products. Chapter 2 Quick Start The purpose of this chapter is to provide a summary of the steps involved in starting a class with ALEKS. 2.1 Obtaining a Class Code In order to use ALEKS with your class, you will need to have at least one Class Code. You give this code to the students in your class; they will use this Class Code to register. The Class Code is all your students need to register with ALEKS. When they register, they will receive a Login Name and Password; after this they will no longer need the Class Code. Students should not use the Class Code to register a second time, as doing so will create a new account in their name, unconnected with the first. You can have as many classes and sections as you need or want in ALEKS. For each class or section, there is one unique Class Code. Students who register using this code will be enrolled in the corresponding class. Students who accidentally enroll in the wrong class can easily be moved to the right one at any time, without any unwanted effect on their work or records (moving a student to a class using a new domain in ALEKS may trigger a new assessment). To obtain the Class Code for any class, log on to your teacher account, click on “Class Admin,” and then on “View all your classes and class codes” (See Sec. 6.2.2). Or, in the Advanced Teacher Module, simply select the name of the class and click “Edit.” The Code will appear in the upper right-hand part of the screen (See Sec. 7.18). You will normally be provided with a teacher Login Name and Password by ALEKS Corporation; a colleague at your school with Administrator privileges in ALEKS can also create an teacher account for you. Once you are logged on to ALEKS as a teacher, you can create one or more classes through “Create a new class” (under “Class Admin”). 3 4 2.2 CHAPTER 2. QUICK START Registering Students Students should use the following steps to register. 1. Go to the ALEKS website. http://www.aleks.com 2. Click on the link for “SIGN UP NOW” to the upper left (This is the only time they will click on that button.) 3. On the page that follows, enter the Class Code in the spaces to the left of the window. Do not use the button on the right-hand side. 4. Enter other information as prompted (students in high school are asked for their full names, those below high school only for their first name and last initial). 5. Record their Login Name and Password, provided by the system. (Students can change their Password now or later if they wish.) 6. Wait for the teacher to authorize their registration. They can log off at this point and log back in later, using the Login Name and Password provided. As soon as the teacher authorizes their registration it will be complete. 7. Begin using ALEKS by taking the Student Tutorial and an initial Assessment. Students will subsequently use their Login Name and Password to enter their accounts. NOTE. For a complete description of how teachers authorize the registration of their students, see Sec. 3.8. Chapter 3 Setup Guide for Teachers 3.1 Teacher Preparation As an instructor using ALEKS with your classes, it is important that you clearly understand the system’s functioning and its underlying ideas. Take the time to study all materials provided to you, including this Teacher’s Guide, and try out the system thoroughly. The school administrator for ALEKS can contact ALEKS Corporation for consultation at any time, preferably well in advance of the first session (See Chapter 13.). 3.2 System Requirements The following table presents the system requirements for ALEKS in summary form. Operating System Processor RAM Memory Browser PC Windows Any 64+ MB Explorer 6.0+, Firefox 1.5+ Screen Resolution 800x600 (1024x768 for Chemistry) Modem Speed 56+ kbps Macintosh MacOS 10.3+ Any 64+ MB Safari, Firefox 1.5+ 800x600 (1024x768 for Chemistry) 56+ kbps Figure 3.1: System Requirements Your browser should be configured with Java enabled. Both Netscape and Internet Explorer usually ship with Java. You can also install Sun Microsystems’ Java® VM, version 1.4.1+, which can be obtained from Sun. Note that any of the kinds of direct connection (cable, ISDN, DSL) that are typical 5 6 CHAPTER 3. SETUP GUIDE FOR TEACHERS Figure 3.2: The ALEKS Website in computer labs are adequate for use with ALEKS. If your computer lab has security safeguards in place, you will need the cooperation of your LAN administrator, system administrator, or lab technician to install the ALEKS plugin. 3.3 Installation Installation of the ALEKS plugin takes place from the ALEKS website (Fig. 3.2): http://www.aleks.com NOTE. You must use this URL to access ALEKS. Although there are other ALEKS websites that you may find using an Internet search engine, only this one contains your registration data as a licensed ALEKS teacher. It is advisable to mark this website in your browser with a “Bookmark” or “Favorite” or by creating a shortcut of some kind. Close all applications other than your web browser before beginning installation. Installation of the ALEKS plugin is automatic. If you attempt to use the system directly by clicking on “Be our Guest” or on “Register with ALEKS,” the system will 3.4. TEACHER MODULE 7 automatically check to see whether your computer has the most recent plugin currently installed. If it does not, the system will download the plugin and ask for your permission to install. (This is not a high-risk operation for your computer. The ALEKS plugin is a small library of Java classes which are used by your browser when you are logged on to ALEKS. They are inactive at other times and do not do anything except provide functionality for ALEKS. They can easily be removed from the computer with no other effect except that ALEKS ceases to be available on that computer. ALEKS Corporation Customer Support will be happy to answer any questions about the plugin.) When you grant permission, it will install. Following installation you must close and reopen your browser application. Installation is automatic for registered users as well. If you need to download and install the plugin and this does not occur automatically, click on “Download the ALEKS plugin.” There is also a “streaming” plugin which can be used in situations where it is not possible to download to the local computer. Go to the following website: http://www.aleks.com/plugin Log on as usual. It will take one or more minutes for the plugin to load into memory. Once this is done, you will be able to use ALEKS in the usual way. 3.4 Teacher Module The teacher enters the ALEKS Teacher Module by logging on to ALEKS with their Teacher Login Name and Password. The Teacher Module is an extremely important component of the ALEKS system, permitting teachers to monitor and manage their ALEKS classes. The Teacher Module is designed for the utmost ease of use; it guides users through the steps needed to accomplish tasks in such a way that no separate training is needed and mistakes or confusion are unlikely. See Chapter 6 for a complete description of the Teacher Module. After the teacher is familiar with the features of the Teacher Module, he or she may wish to try the Advanced Teacher Module, which is somewhat more complex than the standard interface but offers greater efficiency in some operations. Some teachers find the Advanced Teacher Module more convenient to use once they are used to it. There is a Tutorial in ALEKS explaining the use and features of the Advanced Teacher Module (See below). 3.5 Lab Check To ensure the best possible experience of ALEKS for your students, we recommend that you check the computer lab in which ALEKS will be used in advance of the first 8 CHAPTER 3. SETUP GUIDE FOR TEACHERS session. This means installing and testing the plugin on some or (preferably) all of the computers in the lab. If security measures are in effect, you will need the cooperation of the lab administrator to install the plugin. To install and test, simply log on to ALEKS through ”Be Our Guest” on each computer or use your teacher login to enter your account. Installation will occur automatically. Following installation, restart the browsers and attempt login again. This time you should access ALEKS. If the ALEKS plugin is not preinstalled and tested in this way, it will be installed when your students first access the system. This will take away a certain amount of time from their use of the system. Also, if there is some problem in the lab that makes installation difficult, it is far better to catch and resolve it before the students arrive. 3.6 Student Orientation It is strongly recommended that the first ALEKS session be conducted under supervision, perhaps with another teacher on hand to help your students get started. You may also choose to schedule supervised assessments at regular intervals and at the end of the course. It is not generally necessary to schedule a separate orientation meeting before the students actually begin using the system, although in some cases there may be reasons for doing so. It is also advisable to emphasize the few requirements for assessments in ALEKS: paper and pencil are needed, as well as simple calculators. Calculators without graphic or symbolic functions are permitted for Algebra only. (A basic calculator is part of ALEKS.) Remind your students that help is not allowed during the assessment because if the student being assessed does not do their own work, the assessment results may not be accurate, and this will hinder that student’s progress in the Learning Mode. If at all possible, the students’ first session with ALEKS should be long enough for them to complete their assessments and begin work in the Learning Mode. One hour may be considered a reasonable period of time. If the students cannot finish their assessments during this time, ALEKS will automatically keep their place, and they will resume next time where they had left off. No work will be lost. 3.7 Registration Students register with ALEKS by going to the ALEKS website and clicking on “SIGN UP NOW.” This will be expedited if the browsers used by the students have ”Bookmarks” or ”Favorites” pointing to the website (See Sec. 3.3). NOTE. In order to register, all students must have the Class Code for the class that you are teaching. The Class Code is sent to the teacher by ALEKS Corporation or obtained by the teacher when creating the class (See Sec. 6.2.1). You are responsible for giving this code to the students at the time of the first session. 3.8. TEACHER AUTHORIZATION OF STUDENT REGISTRATION To obtain the Class Code for any class, log on to your teacher account, click on “Class Admin,” and then on “View all your classes and class codes” (See Sec. 6.2.2). Or, in the Advanced Teacher Module, simply select the name of the class and click “Edit.” The Code will appear in the upper right-hand part of the screen (See Sec. 7.18). The student registration process is described in detail in the Student User Guide (See Appendix A). There are complete online instructions for every step of this simple procedure. Among other information, some students may be able to supply their email address (so they can be helped more promptly in case of difficulties) and their Student ID number (if you wish to have this in the system). Special care should be taken in entering the latter, as the system cannot detect mistyping. Both email and Student ID are optional information. Near the conclusion of Registration students receive a Login Name and Password. These should be noted carefully, as they will be essential for all further work with ALEKS. You may wish to advise the students to change their Passwords at the earliest opportunity. They should use a Password they will remember easily but that will be hard for others to guess. Login Name and Password can be typed with upper- or lower-case letters. Neither may contain spaces or punctuation. At the end of Registration, students are asked to wait for their teacher’s authorization. For a complete description of how teachers authorize the registration of their students, see Sec. 3.8. The students can log off at this point and log back in later, using the Login Name and Password provided. As soon as the teacher authorizes their registration it will be complete. 3.8 Teacher Authorization of Student Registration The following is a more detailed description of the student registration process, highlighting the actions by which you authorize students’ registration. A student wishing to register with ALEKS begins on the ALEKS home page by clicking on the link marked “SIGN UP NOW,” located to the upper left of the home page (Fig. 3.2). Next the student is asked to enter the Class Code which has been provided by the teacher (Fig. 3.3). Since each Class Code is assigned to a class defined by grade level, the Class Code entered by the student tells ALEKS the grade level at which the student is seeking to register. The spaces for this code are in the left-hand part of the window. The steps by which the student completes registration follow two paths, one for students below High School, and another for students in High School. Following entry of the Class Code, the student is given information on the class selected and on the process of beginning to use ALEKS. 9 10 CHAPTER 3. SETUP GUIDE FOR TEACHERS Figure 3.3: Registration Subsequently, if the student is in 8th grade or below, ALEKS asks for the student’s first name and last initial (Fig. 3.4). ALEKS does not ask for the student’s full last name so that there is no personally identifying information in the system for students in 8th grade or below. The student is then provided with a Login Name consisting of the student’s first name, last initial, and possibly a number. If the student is beyond the 8th grade, ALEKS asks for full first and last names, and then provides a Login Name consisting of the student’s first initial, last name, and possibly a number (Fig. 3.4). The student is also provided with a password, which can be changed at this time or later, as the student desires. Students above the 8th grade have the opportunity to enter an email address and a Student id number. No students are required to provide this information; students in the 8th grade and below are never asked for it or given any way to provide it. At this point the student is told that authorization is needed from the teacher before registration can be completed (Fig. 3.5). Until the teacher logs onto ALEKS and provides authorization, the student will not be able to get further than this page. Once authorization is provided, the student will be able to click “Next” and begin using ALEKS. If the teacher cannot authorize immediately, the student is able to log off at this point and log back on at a later time using the Login Name and Password provided; if the teacher has authorized registration by then, the student will be able to begin using 3.8. TEACHER AUTHORIZATION OF STUDENT REGISTRATION Figure 3.4: Registration (continued) Figure 3.5: Registration (continued) ALEKS. In order to authorize registration, log on to your teacher account using the Login Name and Password received at registration or from ALEKS Corporation. If there are students in the class awaiting registration, you will come to the Authorization page with instructions and a list of students needing authorization (Fig. 3.6). If you simply wish to authorize all students, there is a checkbox at the top of the list to do this; otherwise you can authorize each student individually by clicking the checkbox opposite his or her name (“Authorize”). There is also a checkbox for deleting the account of a student who has initiated registration (“Delete”). Checking this checkbox will remove the account. It is noted on the Authorization page that authorizing registration for students in Grade 8 or below constitutes your assurance that all necessary parental consents have been obtained for your students’ use of ALEKS. Some students may initiate registration more than once due to misunderstanding. This will be evident from the repetition of names in the list. (Occasionally there may be more than one student in the class with the same combination of first name and last 11 12 CHAPTER 3. SETUP GUIDE FOR TEACHERS Figure 3.6: Registration (continued) initial; presumably the teacher will take this into account.) When there is repetition, you should “Authorize” only one account for each student and “Delete” any others, to prevent unnecessary use of purchased subscriptions. When all necessary boxes have been clicked, click “Done”; a summary of authorizations and current licensing status will be shown, and you can continue to work in the Teacher Module. You can also defer authorization simply by clicking “Done” on the Authorization page, without either authorizing or deleting all or any of the students. You can return to the Authorization page later by clicking “Authorization” on the ALEKS menu bar. NOTE. When the Authorization page is shown for classes higher than the 8th grade, there is a note advising you that students under the age of 13 should not be authorized in this way. When students under the age of 13 wish to register in ALEKS for a class higher than the 8th grade, contact ALEKS Corporation for assistance. 3.9 Tutorial Following Registration, the students enter a brief tutorial on the use of ALEKS input tools, also called the Answer Editor Tutorial (See Sec. 4.5). There are separate Tutorials for different subjects, since the specific tools for them differ somewhat. The ALEKS Tutorial provides ample feedback to ensure that students complete it successfully. 3.10. FIRST ASSESSMENT NOTE. The Tutorial is not intended to teach mathematical knowledge, but rather to train students in using the system tools. If students need a “refresher” on use of the system tools, it is always possible to click on the “Help” button, which gives access to the sections of the Tutorial (See Sec. 5.2.12). 3.10 First Assessment Students proceed directly from the Tutorial to their first assessment (See Chapter 4). To reiterate, no help of any kind should be given to students being assessed, not even rephrasing a problem. Students need to have paper and pencil. Simple calculators without graphic or symbolic functions may be used for Algebra. A basic calculator is part of ALEKS. No calculators are used for Arithmetic. The ALEKS assessment is adaptive and variable in length. Some students will have very short assessments, whereas others will have assessments that are longer. Consistency of effort and concentration are the factors most likely to influence the length of an assessment. NOTE. All students will be assessed upon their first use of the system. This will provide you with a baseline picture of your class and of each individual student. 3.11 Report Tutorial At the conclusion of each assessment, the student is given a brief Tutorial on how to interpret the Assessment Report. This will be in the form of one or more color-coded pie charts, with accompanying textual information (See Sec. 4.13). It is important that the students know how to interpret these pie charts correctly. Some teachers have found it worth the effort to sit with each student individually as he or she concludes his or her assessment. They can then make sure the student understands the parts of the report and help him or her choose topics for entry into the Learning Mode. Keep clicking “Next” until you get to “MyPie,” where you can choose items for work in the Learning Mode. Explain to students that subsequent assessments will produce only the pie charts. The pie charts also appear in the Learning Mode each time a new concept is mastered and “added to the pie.” If the student wishes to choose a new topic, the pie can always be accessed by means of the “MyPie” button. 3.12 Beginning the Learning Mode Students enter the Learning Mode by clicking on one of the topics contained in their pie chart (topics they are completely “ready to learn”). If at all possible, the students 13 14 CHAPTER 3. SETUP GUIDE FOR TEACHERS should be given sufficient time in their first ALEKS session to use the Learning Mode and, ideally, to begin to “add concepts to their pie.” If they have this experience, their interest in using ALEKS is likely to be more favorable. You should also be present to answer questions regarding the Learning Mode and to assist your students in familiarizing themselves with its varied features. This is particularly important in cases in which their subsequent use of ALEKS will be unsupervised. Chapter 4 Assessment Mode The Assessment Mode is the heart of the ALEKS system. Its ability to quickly and accurately determine a student’s knowledge enables ALEKS continuously to make available the material the student can most readily employ, and thus efficiently guide individual learning paths. The Assessment and Learning Modes work together closely. In ALEKS, learning is powered and optimized by assessment. 4.1 Assessments in ALEKS The ALEKS assessment uses open-ended problems (no multiple-choice questions). It is an adaptive assessment; that is, problem types are selected based on all the previous answers the student has given. It is impossible to predict which types of problems will appear, or in what order. Moreover, the problems themselves are generated algorithmically, with randomly-selected values (as is also the case in the Learning Mode). Thus, one cannot “learn the assessment” or “teach to the assessment,” and cheating is almost impossible. In the unlikely event that two students sitting next to one another were given the same problem-type at the same time, the problem parameters and values would almost certainly be different, and so would the correct answer. Despite this, certain assessments must be supervised, such as the initial, interim, and final assessments in a class. Without supervision, students could use a textbook, receive systematic help, or have someone else take the assessment in their place. This point is critical where assessment results are used for purposes other than those internal to the system. (There is no reason for a student who has begun using ALEKS to cheat on a “progress” assessment, as this will simply cause the system to suggest problems that are too difficult, and thus hinder the student’s own work.) As noted, the student takes an initial assessment immediately following completion of the Tutorial (See Sec. 3.10). When an assessment begins, the student is clearly informed it has begun. Next a series of mathematical problems is posed to the student. The student provides the solution to each problem using the Answer Editor (or clicks 15 16 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE “I haven’t learned this yet”). In the Assessment Mode, the system does not inform the student whether the answer just given was correct or not. The assessment continues until the system has determined the student’s precise knowledge of the domain, at which time the assessment ends and a report is presented to the student. The number of questions asked cannot be known in advance, although consistency of effort and attention seem to contribute to shorter assessments. 4.2 Rules for Assessments Assessment in ALEKS is an important and serious event. It is essential that assessments be conducted according to certain guidelines and in the proper spirit. If there is an atmosphere permitting disturbances or distractions, students will not obtain the benefits the system is capable of providing. If assessment results are inaccurate, the system will give the student inappropriate problems and progress will initially be impaired. The system will recover and find the right level, but the student may still experience a degree of frustration. In order to avoid this, it is strongly recommended that the first assessment be taken under the teacher’s supervision (See Sec. 3.10). All students being assessed need paper and pencil. No calculators are permitted in assessments for Arithmetic, but simple calculators without symbolic or graphing functions should be available for students being assessed in Algebra. A basic calculator is part of ALEKS. Most important, no assistance may be given—not even to the extent of explaining or rephrasing a problem. Students should be encouraged to use the “I haven’t learned this yet” button when they do not know what to do. It is not possible to return to previous assessment questions; students should not click their browser’s “Back” or “Forward” buttons when using ALEKS. 4.3 Scheduling of Assessments Initial Assessment. The initial assessment takes place at the outset of students’ use of ALEKS, immediately after Registration and Tutorial (See Sec. 3.10). We strongly recommend that this initial assessment, which has the character of an orientation to the system for student users, take place in a supervised computer lab setting to ensure that students do not receive help or collaborate. In creating or editing a class account, the teacher can stipulate that the initial assessment be allowed only from school (See Sec. 7.17.). In some ALEKS course products, students may choose to continue their initial assessment for particular pie slices where no topics are yet available to them. In order to initiate these assessments, the students click a button marked “Assessment” which appears in the place of a list of available topics for the particular slice. Such assessments are called “Initial Assessment (continued),” and are generally shorter than other assessments. They focus on topics from the slice chosen, and their purpose is to “open” that 4.4. BUTTONS slice for work by the student. Automatic Assessments. Additional assessments are scheduled automatically by the system based on two factors: overall time spent in the Learning Mode (called “Login Time Assessment”) and progress made while there (called “Progress Assessment”). By default, a new assessment is triggered after 20 new items have been learned (but no sooner than 5 ALEKS hours after the last assessment) or after 10 hours have been spent in Learning Mode since the last assessment or after 60 days have passed since the last assessment. Some modification of these parameters is possible; please contact ALEKS Corporation Customer Support for assistance if you would like to do this. The Learning Mode itself updates students’ assessment results as it goes along, periodically displaying new pie charts and new choices of concepts they are completely “ready to learn.” The automatic assessments, however, provide a firmer basis for such guidance. Completion Assessments. ALEKS also assesses students automatically when they complete the syllabus for a course. If the assessment does not confirm the student’s mastery of the syllabus materials, they will return to the Learning Mode. More than one Completion Assessment is thus possible, but as a rule ALEKS will not reassess the student if only a small number of topics need to be relearned. Requested Assessments. Assessments can also be requested by the teacher for individual students or for entire classes. For example, the teacher, department, or school may wish to have “interim” assessments under supervision to guarantee sound results. ALEKS allows the teacher to schedule the assessment for a particular date and time (See Sec. 6.5.1). Students logging on to ALEKS within the time period specified for the assessment will automatically enter Assessment Mode. The teacher simply announces the assessment for a certain time and place. Just prior to this time the teacher prompts the class assessment in the Teacher Module (See Secs. 7.9– 7.10). The next time students log on they will automatically enter the assessment. Note that a requested assessment “resets the clock” for automatic assessments, so that students will not be assessed with undue frequency. Also, among the options for a requested assessment is one to prevent automatic assessments within a certain number of days prior to the requested assessment (See Sec. 6.5.1). NOTE. In some ALEKS products, there is an option to request the assessment on a particular slice or slices of the pie chart. When this is done, there will be a note regarding the estimated number of questions needed for the assessment. Often, assessing on more than one slice of the pie chart will result in an assessment that is longer than desired; therefore, this feature is usually most effective when only a single slice is selected. The teacher also has the option of letting ALEKS select an appropriate slice for each student, based on their individual progress. 17 18 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE Figure 4.1: The Answer Editor for Mathematical Expressions (Assessment) 4.4 Buttons The Assessment Mode (Fig. 4.1) has a reduced set of active menu buttons enabling the student being assessed to leave the system (“Exit”) or get help on use of the Answer Editor (“Help”). Other buttons appear, but they are disabled. All of the ALEKS menu buttons are enabled in the Learning Mode (See Sec. 5.2). Note that students using ALEKS should not click their browser’s “Back” and “Forward” buttons. Only the navigation tools that are part of the ALEKS interface should be used. The two aspects of the ALEKS interface relevant to work in the Assessment Mode are the Answer Editor and the Assessment Report. 4.5 Answer Editor Input to the ALEKS system is always in the form of proper mathematical expressions and constructions, never multiple choice. A critical reason for this is to prevent substantial inaccuracies which arise from students’ guessing and trying out the different choices. Another purpose of this approach is to train students in the same skills that are necessary for conventional, paper-and-pencil communication of solutions and results. At the same time, the sophistication of the ALEKS input tools provides certain advantages. The presentation of results is always neat and clear. Manual dexterity plays a reduced role in drawing an accurate graph or geometrical construction. Immediate feedback is provided on the formal completeness of solutions. The general term for the input tools used in ALEKS is the “Answer Editor.” This encompasses a variety of actual modes for user input: an Answer Editor for mathematical expressions, an Answer Editor for the number line, an Answer Editor for graphing in the 4.6. MANIPULATORS FOR MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS 19 Expression Square Root Fraction Answer Editor keypad button p [ ] [ ] Keyboard equivalent (none) / Mixed Number Repeating Decimal Absolute Value List of Expressions Exponent Multiplication Expression Percentage Greater-Than Less-Than Greater-Than-or-Equal-To Less-Than-or-Equal-To Equal-To Not-Equal-To AND OR [ ] [[ ]] [ ][ ] [ ] |[ ]| [ ], [ ], . . . [ ][ ] [ ]×[ ] % [ ]>[ ] [ ]<[ ] [ ]≥[ ] [ ]≤[ ] [ ]=[ ] [ ] 6= [ ] AN D OR (none) (none) (none) , ∧ (before exponent) ∗ % > < (none) (none) = (none) (none) (none) [ ] [ ] Figure 4.2: Mathematical Expressions Produced by the Answer Editor Cartesian plane (with x and y coordinate axes), and an Answer Editor for histograms (in Statistics). A student beginning to use ALEKS is thoroughly trained in all features of the Answer Editor that are relevant to the subject being studied during the Tutorial (See Sec. 3.9). In much of what follows, emphasis is on the “Answer Editor for mathematical expressions,” as this is the section which involves the greatest degree of interplay between mouse, keyboard, and on-screen buttons and icons. 4.6 Manipulators for Mathematical Expressions The Answer Editor for mathematical expressions consists of two parts: a rectangular field into which mathematical expressions are entered (the “entry field”) is to the left, and a “keypad” made of buttons with mathematical symbols is to the right (Fig. 4.1). These buttons have labels in the Tutorial, but not afterwards. Mathematical expressions are entered and edited using the buttons of the Answer Editor keypad, as well as the basic keyboard, the Left and Right arrow keys, the Tab, Enter, and Backspace keys, and the mouse. NOTE. Buttons are displayed to correspond with the kind of problem being solved. The selection is made in such a way as to avoid giving away the correct answer. Keyboard shortcuts (Fig. 4.2) work only when the corresponding button is displayed. 20 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE Key Right arrow Tab - Enter Left arrow Backspace Effect moves the cursor one place to the right (ahead) moves the cursor one place to the left (back) deletes input immediately preceding (to the left of) the cursor and moves the cursor one place to the left (back) OR deletes selected input Figure 4.3: Using Special Keys in the Answer Editor Basic Input When a new page is opened and contains a problem whose solution is a mathematical expression, the entry field initially contains at least one blue box. Each blue box represents a mathematical expression that forms part of the complete answer. To enter a mathematical expression one must first click on a blue box. When this is done, the cursor (or “caret”) appears inside the box. The cursor marks the point at which something is entered. Material can be entered using the basic keyboard or the buttons of the keypad. Individual digits can be entered only from the keyboard. Symbols can be entered using the buttons of the keypad and, sometimes, from the keyboard as well (Fig. 4.2). Basic Editing Tools The cursor, showing the point at which material is entered, can be moved using the Left and Right arrows and the Tab and Enter keys. It can also be positioned using the mouse. Input can be deleted using the Backspace key (Fig. 4.3). Selecting Input It is possible to select a continuous portion of input by dragging the pointer with the mouse button held down. A segment that has been selected by dragging in this way can be deleted by pressing Backspace, replaced by typing, or replaced by clicking the buttons of the Answer Editor keypad. It can also be inserted into a mathematical expression such as a fraction or a square root (the selected portion is placed in the numerator position or under the square root sign, respectively). Clear and Undo After material has been entered, the field can be returned to its empty state by clicking on “Clear.” Clicking on “Undo” cancels the most recent action. Clicking on “Undo” a second time restores the effect of the canceled action (including a “Clear” command). 4.7 Mathematical Expressions The purpose of the Answer Editor for mathematical expressions is to process user input in the form of correct mathematical expressions. One important way in which the 4.7. MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS Answer Editor guides the user in constructing such expressions is by means of the blue boxes. If a blue box remains on the screen, you know that the input typed so far is not valid. Entering expressions from the keyboard For expressions that do not require the use of the Answer Editor keypad, the user can place the cursor within a blue box and enter the mathematical expression from the keyboard. For many expressions, however, the Answer Editor keypad must be used. It may be used, as well, for some types of expressions that can also be entered from the regular keyboard (Fig. 4.2). Using the Answer Editor keypad to structure simple expressions To form a simple mathematical expression, the user places the cursor in an empty blue box and clicks on the appropriate button from the Answer Editor keypad. The initial blue box disappears and new blue boxes may appear (depending on the button), accompanied by all of the necessary signs. The user can now fill in the new boxes. Entering complex expressions Sometimes it is necessary to enter more complex mathematical expressions. What has been written about entering mathematical expressions into a single blue box holds equally true for entering expressions into any of the blue boxes produced by clicking a button of the Answer Editor keypad. One can place the cursor in one of these boxes and enter an expression from the keyboard, or, by clicking on a button of the Answer Editor keypad, replace it with the structure of a new mathematical expression. Expressions of any degree of complexity can be created in this way. NOTE. The Answer Editor does not supply parentheses. The user must know when these are necessary. In particular, when there is an expression consisting of more than one symbol that must be raised to a power, one may need to enclose it in parentheses, just as in writing; otherwise, only the final symbol (just before the exponent) will be raised to the specified power. Alternate ways of entering expressions The buttons of the Answer Editor keypad can be used in other ways as well. In particular, one can select some portion of the input in the entry field which constitutes a complete mathematical expression, and then click on a keypad button. This will create a new mathematical expression within which the expression selected is one component. The same basic rule applies: the minimum unit of manipulation is a complete mathematical expression. Other mathematical signs The following mathematical signs can be entered only from the keyboard: the plus sign (+); the minus sign (-), both for connecting the two parts of a subtraction expression and for designating a negative number; the period (.) used in decimals; 21 22 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE the comma (,) used to punctuate numbers of more than three places. Please note as well the following special cases: The asterisk for multiplication The “x” character on the keyboard cannot be used to enter a multiplication sign. Only the asterisk (*) serves this purpose. (The multiplication sign on the Answer Editor keypad, however, is the traditional x-shaped symbol.) Mixed numbers Although fractions can be entered from the keyboard using the front slash character (/), mixed numbers cannot be entered this way. More precisely, the Answer Editor does not automatically regard a whole number followed by a fraction as a mixed number. The mixed number button on the Answer Editor keypad must be used to enter mixed numbers. 4.8 Types of Mathematical Expressions The following set of tips is intended to illustrate the variety of ways in which mathematical expressions can be entered using the Answer Editor. It is in no way a thorough description of the Answer Editor, which includes many other kinds of mathematical expressions and constructions. Here, “Button” will always refer to a button on the Answer Editor keypad. By “select” we mean drag the mouse over the expression to be selected with the mouse button depressed, so that a red box appears surrounding it. Percentage 48% The next example illustrates the possibility, in some cases, of using either the Answer Editor keypad or the regular keyboard to enter signs: Enter the expression you wish to express as a percentage and click on the percent button; OR Enter the expression you wish to express as a percentage and then enter the (keyboard) percent sign. Fraction Fractions can be entered conveniently at least three ways: 7 10 Enter the numerator, enter a (keyboard) forward slash character, and enter the denominator; OR Enter the numerator, click on the fraction button, and enter the denominator; OR Click on the fraction button, enter the numerator, then click on the blue square in the position of the denominator and enter the denominator. 4.8. TYPES OF MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS 23 Mixed Number 5 78 Mixed numbers can be entered in more than one way, but they each require use of the mixed number button: Enter the whole number part, click on the mixed number button, enter the numerator, press Enter, and enter the denominator; OR Click on the mixed number button, click on the first blue box (for the whole part), enter the whole number part, press the right arrow, enter the numerator, move the cursor to the denominator position, and enter the denominator (i.e., fill in the boxes). Repeating Decimal 1.27 Enter all digits that precede the repeating pattern, including the decimal point (a period on the keyboard) and any decimal places preceding the pattern, click on the bar button, and enter the repeating pattern; OR Enter all digits, including the decimal point (a period on the keyboard) and all decimal positions following it, select the repeating pattern only, and click on the bar button. q 5 Fraction in square root followed by multiplier 8 ×3 For this example only one input method is given, but others could be suggested: Click on the square root sign button, click on the fraction button, enter the numerator, tab, enter the denominator, then tab, enter an asterisk (from the keyboard), and enter the multiplier. List 1, 2, 3 For the purposes of the following example, assume that there is a list consisting of three components to be entered: Enter the first expression, click on the list button (or press the keyboard comma), enter the second expression, click on the list button, enter the third expression, click on the list button, and enter the fourth expression; OR Click on the list button (or press the keyboard comma) twice, click on the first blue box, enter the first expression, move the cursor right, enter the second expression, move the cursor right, and enter the third expression. Answers with Units 10 cups There are also some cases where the Answer Editor does part of the formatting. For example, in problems where answers must be expressed in some kind of units, such as dollars or candies, the unit expression needed may appear in advance. Square Root √ 81 Click on the square root button and enter the expression into the square root sign; OR 24 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE Enter the expression you wish to appear under the square root sign, select it, and click on the square root button. In the simple example just given the second method reverses the sequence of steps of the first method. Such complementary methods are typical. Absolute Value | − 6| Click on the absolute value button and enter the expression whose absolute value you wish to express; OR Enter the expression whose absolute value you wish to express, select it, and click on the absolute value button. Exponent 32 Click on the Exponent button, enter the base, then move the cursor to the exponent box and enter the exponent; OR Enter the expression you wish to raise to a power, click on the exponent button, and enter the exponent. NOTE. If the number you wish to raise to a power is an expression consisting of more than one symbol, it may need to be enclosed in parentheses. The Answer Editor will not do this for you. If no parentheses are used, only the last symbol will be raised to a power. √ Square Root Preceded by Multiplier 2 6 With more complex expressions you can use the mouse to place the cursor in the needed position, as in the second method: Enter the multiplier, click on the square root button, and enter the expression you wish to be under the square root sign; OR Click on the square root button, click to the left of the square root sign, enter the multiplier, tab (or press the right arrow, or press Enter, or click on the blue box under the square root sign), and enter the expression you wish to be under the square root sign. 4.9 Advanced Mathematical Expressions The following types of mathematical expressions occur in more advanced subjects. To create a matrix, the user clicks on an icon corresponding to the dimensions desired (2 × 2, 2 × 3, etc.), then fills in the cells with appropriate values. For topics involving set notation, there will appear icons for each of the special symbols required, such as curly braces, “belongs to,” “such that,” the real numbers, the integers, and so forth. 4.10. THE ANSWER EDITOR FOR THE NUMBER LINE Figure 4.4: The Answer Editor for the Number Line 4.10 The Answer Editor for the Number Line The Answer Editor for the number line consists of a number line and tools for placing full and empty endpoints and segments (Fig. 4.4). To place a segment, mark a point on the number line with the pencil, then click on that point with either the full or the empty tool. To place a segment, use the Region tool to click on any point in the relevant part of the number line. If the user clicks between two endpoints, the segment will extend to each of them. When the user clicks between an endpoint and an extremity of the number line, the segment will appear with an arrow to indicate that it continues to infinity. Click with the eraser to remove any part of the construction. 25 26 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE Figure 4.5: The Answer Editor for Graphing 4.11 The Answer Editor for Graphing The Answer Editor for graphing consists of a Cartesian plane with x− and y− coordinate axes and a selection of other tools for graphing lines and regions of the plane (Fig. 4.5). To graph a line, use the pencil tool to plot two points. Then, align the straightedge (ruler) on the two points (it is a “grabby” tool and will jump to a point when it is near it). Then use the pencil tool to draw the line. Note that the effect of the straightedge continues past its ends, so there is no need to move it to make a line going from edge to edge of the depicted plane. The line should be started within the graph area, however. To fill in a region, use the region tool and click in the desired region of the plane. One must draw all lines defining the region before filling it in. In order for one or more of the lines defining a region to be dotted (as in the graph of a system containing one or more strict inequalities), click on the line with the dotted line tool. This may be done before or after the region is filled. 4.11. THE ANSWER EDITOR FOR GRAPHING To place a point where coordinates are not both integers: use the input field to enter numerical values (fractions and mixed numbers can be placed using the icons beneath the field), then click on the icon with horizontal broken line (for the y-coordinate) or vertical broken line (for the x-coordinate). A broken line will appear on the plane for each given coordinate. Use the pencil to mark the desired point at their intersection. Another method is the click on the ordered pair icon (with a comma separating two boxes in parentheses), enter a pair of coordinates (in terminating decimal, fractional, or mixed-number form), then click on the icon with a small Cartesian plane and a point marked by “X.” This will place the point directly on the plane without using the pencil. To draw a graph requiring an asymptote, use the asymptote tool (broken horizontal or vertical line) to place the asymptote as needed. A slanted asymptote may be placed by first drawing two points and then using the tool with a broken diagonal line. Plot the additional points needed for the graph, and then click on the graph button (curved line connecting “X”s). For each type of conic section, there is a special tool allowing the construction of its graph. Normally, the user clicks once with the tool to establish the center or vertex of the graph, and then one or more additional times to determine its final form. As with the number line, select the eraser tool and click on any part of a line, arc, or other component to remove it. 27 28 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE Figure 4.6: The Answer Editor for Histograms 4.12 The Answer Editor for Histograms The Answer Editor for histograms consists of a space for drawing histograms and icons (buttons) permitting the creation and adjustment of bars (Fig. 4.6). Initially, the histogram appears with a small number of bars (e.g., two). The height of the bars is adjusted by clicking on the top edge of each and holding the mouse button down while dragging to the desired height. To add bars, click on the icon with the plus sign; to subtract bars, click on the icon with the minus sign. Each bar has a space beneath it where an appropriate label can be typed in. Any bar may be set to any integer height by dragging. To set the height of a bar at a non-integer value, enter the value in the white area to the upper right of the histogram, then click on the icon with the broken horizontal line. This will place a broken line on the histogram at that height. Any bar may then be dragged to the height of any broken line that has been placed. 4.13. ASSESSMENT REPORT 29 Figure 4.7: Assessment Report 4.13 Assessment Report At the conclusion of an assessment, the Assessment Report is presented. The interpretation of this report is the same as for pie chart displays found in other places within ALEKS (such as in “MyPie”). 4.13.1 Standard Report Format The standard report format is used for all assessment reports. This format consists of one or more pie charts (Fig. 4.7). 4.13.2 Interpreting the Pie Charts Pie Charts express the results of a given assessment. They contain the following types of information: which mathematics topics are part of the program; the relative importance of the parts of the mathematics program; and 30 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE to what extent the student has attained the knowledge for each part of the mathematics program, according to the assessment. Each color-coded slice of the pie chart refers to a particular part of the program, such as “Whole Numbers” or “Proportions and Percents.” Each slice is marked with an abbreviation. The meanings of these abbreviations and of the chart’s color-coding are given in the legend immediately following the pie chart. If the abbreviation next to the slice is underlined, it means this topic contains concepts the student is most “ready to learn.” A pie chart will show only those topics that are part of the math curriculum for the class indicated. The portion of the chart taken up by any one topic reflects the importance of that topic relative to others in the given program. The progress a student has made toward satisfying the program for knowledge in a given topic is expressed by the degree to which the slice corresponding to that area is shaded (i.e., filled in with solid color). The measure of progress given by the pie charts is dependent on the standards for a particular class and is set by teachers and administrators (See Chapter 8). When a user places the pointer over one of the slices of the pie charts, the slice pops out of the pie. A list of the items for that topic the student is currently best ready to learn will appear. Not every slice necessarily contains such a list, even if the topic has not yet been fully mastered. If the slice contains concepts, its label is underlined. This is because a student may not be ready to learn a concept in a given topic (slice) before concepts in another topic (slice) have been mastered. Clicking on any one of these concepts takes the user into the Learning Mode, beginning with that concept. 4.13.3 State Standards Report In some states and for some courses, there will also be an entry in this display giving access to the state standards report for this student. For a complete description of this feature, see Sec. 6.4.16. 4.14 Ready to Learn The concepts given as most “ready to learn” do not represent a casual selection of concepts that the student has not yet mastered. By resuming study with one of these concepts, the student is following the most efficient path to mastery of the complete domain (See Chapter 11). 4.15. PROGRESS BARS 4.15 Progress Bars Another graphic expression of the student’s progress is given by the bar graphs at the bottom of the report (“History”). These represent the general extent of the student’s mastery: the blue portion of each bar represents material that was learned as of the given assessment, the green portion material mastered in the Learning Mode since that assessment, and the yellow portion material belonging to the curriculum for the given level that has yet to be learned. When the bar is entirely blue, the student has completed the curriculum for a level or levels. 31 32 CHAPTER 4. ASSESSMENT MODE Chapter 5 Learning Mode 5.1 The ALEKS Learning Mode The purpose of the Learning Mode is to assist students in mastering mathematical concepts. Students using ALEKS choose which concepts they wish to work on in the Learning Mode from the list of concepts the system has determined they are most prepared to learn. This happens either as the result of an assessment or through the continuous update of assessment results that is performed by the Learning Mode. Students in the Learning Mode work on those concepts they are best prepared to learn, so that the benefit of their work is maximized. In the Learning Mode students always work on one concept at a time. The Learning Mode provides them with a rich array of resources to help in mastering the concept. This includes explanations, practice problems, diagnostic feedback on problem solutions, and access to a student mathematical Dictionary. Moreover, the Learning Mode is designed to monitor the progress made by students toward mastery of a given concept and advise them on continuing or changing concepts. A student is required to solve an appropriate number of practice problems correctly before the system will conclude that the concept has been mastered. At this point the student is encouraged to choose a new concept from the (updated) pie chart, but the opportunity to continue to work on this concept is available if the student wishes. If the student makes mistakes, a greater number of correct solutions may be required. If the student has difficulty, the system may suggest closer attention to the explanations or offer the name of a classmate who has recently mastered this concept. A new selection may also be encouraged. The student continues to work in the Learning Mode until a new assessment is ordered, either by the teacher or automatically when a certain amount of time has been spent or a certain amount of progress has been made since the last assessment (See Sec. 4.3). 33 34 CHAPTER 5. LEARNING MODE Figure 5.1: The Options Page 5.2 5.2.1 Buttons Exit One can end a session with ALEKS in either of two ways: click on the “Exit” button at the upper left-hand corner of the browser window or simply close the window in one of the ways provided by the browser. Also, if no input is supplied to the system for 30 minutes the session is terminated automatically. No matter which way you exit, ALEKS will return you to the same place when you next log on. 5.2.2 English The Language menu can be used to switch back and forth between English and Spanish versions of ALEKS. The Spanish translation of ALEKS is complete for courses used in Grades 3 through 11. 5.2.3 Options The “Options” button opens a page containing the user’s current registration information (with a link for changing the Password), course and instructor (with a link for changing the course), a checkbox for joining “Ask a Friend” (See Sec. 5.7), and 5.2. BUTTONS the beginning and expiration dates of the account (Fig. 5.1). “Report” connects to a menu of all assessment reports (See Sec. 5.2.5.). “History” displays a list of concepts the student has worked on recently, indicating the level of mastery achieved and providing the opportunity to return to that concept for further practice. Clicking on “Done” returns to the Learning Mode. 5.2.4 Print To print the contents of the ALEKS display, click the “Print” button on the menu bar. This transforms the display into a form suitable for printing. Next, click on the browser’s “Print” button, or use whatever keyboard equivalent is provided. The procedure is the same as for printing any web page. To return to the Learning Mode, close or minimize the window that was printed. 5.2.5 Report Clicking on the “Report” button displays a menu of all past assessments, with the most recent displayed by default. Any assessment can be selected (by date) from the menu. Then click “OK” to see the results of that assessment. This will include one or more pie charts, a list of concepts recently learned, a list of concepts most ready to be learned, and the progress bar graphs (See Sec. 4.15). To return to the Learning Mode, click “Done.” NOTE. Click on the link “and many other more elementary concepts.” to see a complete list of topics mastered. 5.2.6 Dictionary Clicking on the “Dictionary” button produces a new browser window with an index of entries in the online student mathematics Dictionary. Click on any entry to view the definition. Remember that the Dictionary can also be accessed by clicking on underlined words (hypertext links) anywhere in the Learning Mode. Dictionary definitions are designed to present concepts in their simplest form first, moving into greater depth as the definition proceeds (See Sec. 5.3.5). Close or minimize the Dictionary window to return to the Learning Mode. 5.2.7 Calculator The Calculator button will light up (become enabled) on topics where ALEKS permits use of a calculator. Click on this button to use the online calculator. 35 36 5.2.8 CHAPTER 5. LEARNING MODE Review The “Review” button gives a list of concepts the student has recently worked on in the Learning Mode (See Sec. 5.5). One can click any of these concepts to get further practice on it. There is also an option for “more extensive review.” Click on “Done” to return to the Learning Mode. 5.2.9 Worksheet The student may obtain an individualized, printable homework sheet by clicking “Worksheet.” The questions on the worksheet are based on that student’s most recent work in ALEKS (See Sec. 5.6). 5.2.10 Quiz The student can take a quiz assigned by the teacher or check the results of quizzes already taken by clicking “Quiz.” If a quiz has been “scheduled” by the teacher, however, the student does not need to use this button; when the student logs on during the time the quiz has be taken it will begin automatically (See Sec. 7.11). 5.2.11 Message The student can use the “Message” button to check for messages from the teacher or administrator, and send or respond to messages if this has been enabled (See Secs. 7.12, 7.13). It is also possible to send messages directly to ALEKS Corporation. Click on “Done” to return to the Learning Mode. 5.2. BUTTONS 37 Figure 5.2: The Help Menu 5.2.12 Help The “Help” button in the Assessment and Learning Modes provides detailed assistance with use of the Answer Editor (Fig. 5.2). The Help Menu contains a list of questions on how to use the various icons of the Answer Editor; clicking any one of these leads to a brief refresher tutorial on the use of the icon. 5.2.13 MyPie Clicking on “MyPie” produces a pie chart display reflecting the current state of the student’s mastery in the Learning Mode (See Sec. 4.13). The student can use this button to select a new concept to work on from among those currently most “ready to learn.” 38 CHAPTER 5. LEARNING MODE Figure 5.3: Item Page 5.3 The Learning Mode Interface 5.3.1 Item Page After clicking on the name of an item from their pie chart, the student comes to an item page containing the title of the current item, such as “Absolute Value of a Negative Integer,” followed by a problem or instance of that item (Fig. 5.3). Mathematical terms are underlined and set off as hyperlinks (clicking on these will open the Dictionary). There is, however, no Answer Editor: the answer to the problem must be given on the Practice page. Underneath the problem are two buttons, “Practice” and “Explain.” Clicking on “Explain” goes to a detailed explanation of the item with additional Dictionary links. Clicking on “Practice” goes to a page containing the Answer Editor and provides the opportunity to attempt solving the problem. 5.3. THE LEARNING MODE INTERFACE Figure 5.4: Explanation Page 5.3.2 Explanation Page Like the item page, the explanation page (Fig. 5.4) begins with the title of the current item and an instance of that item. The answer to the problem is supplied at the end of the explanation. Here again, mathematical terms are linked to Dictionary definitions. The system may suggest looking up certain key terms to help with the explanation (especially if the explanation has already been visited). At the bottom of the page is the “Practice” button. Clicking on this button produces a new instance of the same problem-type. Sometimes there may also be a button for “Additional Explanation” or “Detailed Explanation.” You can always return to the pie chart to choose a different topic by clicking on the “MyPie” icon. 5.3.3 Practice Page This page displays an instance of the problem, followed by the Answer Editor. This is where a solution to the problem can be attempted (Fig. 5.5). All practice problems are generated by algorithms with random selection of numerical values values so that the variety of problem instances for any item is very great. Underneath the Answer Editor are buttons labeled “Next” and “Explain.” Clicking on “Next” has the same effect as described for the Assessment Mode: it submits the 39 40 CHAPTER 5. LEARNING MODE Figure 5.5: Practice Page answer. Here, however, the user finds out immediately whether the answer is right or wrong. If it was correct, a new problem is presented or (if the system believes this topic has been mastered) a choice of new items is offered. Wrong answers will return the presentation of the original problem (on the Wrong Answer page) with feedback on the student’s error. Students can then click on “Explain.” 5.3. THE LEARNING MODE INTERFACE Figure 5.6: Wrong Answer Page 5.3.4 Wrong Answer Page The wrong answer page appears only after an incorrect answer has been submitted on the practice page (Fig. 5.6). It is identical to the previous page except that the system explains the answer is wrong, and offers advice on what went wrong and which words might be looked up in the Dictionary. The old, incorrect answer appears in the Answer Editor, where it can be corrected and resubmitted. Again, clicking on “Explain” is an option that leads to an explanation of the problem. 5.3.5 Dictionary The online mathematics dictionary is always available in the Learning Mode. In addition to the Dictionary menu (button), links to the Dictionary appear in explanations, item descriptions, and in the feedback. Clicking on a link to the Dictionary creates a new window on top of the ALEKS interface. At the top of the window is a bar with an Index button and text entry field (Fig. 5.7). The “Index” button gives access to an index of all the Dictionary’s headings and subheadings. Beneath this bar is the Dictionary entry, with links to other entries and graphic illustrations as appropriate. The window can be closed after use or minimized for quicker access the next time needed. 41 42 CHAPTER 5. LEARNING MODE Figure 5.7: Dictionary 5.4 Feedback in Learning Mode In the Learning Mode feedback is integrated into a sophisticated system of guidance for the student. Some errors prompt ALEKS to give specific hints and suggestions (Fig. 5.6). For example, it may say that a fractional answer needs to be reduced or that a list of expressions is incomplete. After a right answer the system will ask a limited number of questions for the same concept before judging that it has been mastered. If an item is missed too many times, however, a new topic will be suggested. If a concept has been left without mastery being attained, however, the system may suggest returning to it after one or two other topics have been covered. 5.5 Review A student using ALEKS can review topics recently worked on in the Learning Mode by using the “Review” button (Fig. 5.8). Clicking on any of these topics provides the chance for additional practice; this is particularly useful when the student knows that a new assessment is imminent. When the student has not yet worked in Learning Mode since a new assessment, this list may be empty. “More Extensive Review” gives a comprehensive list of all topics mastered by the student for brief, summary review. The Review page also contains a link to the Worksheet (See Sec. 5.6). NOTE. The system will sometimes automatically offer a student the option of reviewing 5.6. WORKSHEET 43 Figure 5.8: Review past material at the time of login. 5.6 Worksheet A student using ALEKS can obtain an individualized, printable homework sheet (in .pdf format) containing 16 practice questions based on the student’s most recent work in ALEKS by clicking the “Worksheet” button (or the “Review” button) (Fig. 5.9). When the student does this, a sheet containing answers for this individual worksheet (labeled with the student’s name and the date) is sent to the teacher via the ALEKS message system (See Sec. 7.13). The teacher may set the option for this feature so that there are 12 review questions and 4 “Extra Credit” questions (See Sec. 7.17). A record will be kept on the Worksheet page of all worksheets produced by the student. The student can click on the link for any past worksheet in order to obtain that worksheet again. If the teacher has permitted access to worksheet answers, there will also be links on this page to answer keys for each of the worksheets (See Sec. 7.17). NOTE. In order to view or print documents in .pdf format, such as the ALEKS worksheet, Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer. Most computers have this software. If for any reason your computer does not, there is a link on the ALEKS Worksheet page to download it. Also, because the worksheet is opened in a new browser window, it may be necessary to disable your popup blocker temporarily in order to produce the ALEKS worksheet. 44 CHAPTER 5. LEARNING MODE Figure 5.9: Worksheet 5.7 Ask a Friend Under some circumstances, a button marked “Ask a Friend” will appear at the bottom of the page in the Learning Mode, next to the “Explain” button. Clicking on this button enables the student to ask for help from another student using ALEKS in the same class. The button appears only if (1) the teacher or school administrator has made this feature active, (2) the student was unsuccessful in answering this concept, and (3) there is another student who has successfully answered the concept and who has chosen to participate in the “Ask a Friend” component. Chapter 6 Teacher Module: Basic Interface The basic interface to the ALEKS Teacher Module was designed for the greatest possible ease of use. Although all parts of ALEKS can be used without training or documentation, the wealth of features in the Teacher Module is not easily grasped by a first-time user. The basic interface, to address this need, has been constructed to be a fully functional, menu-driven gateway to the ALEKS Teacher Module. Once common operations are familiar, the teacher may prefer to bypass the basic interface and work directly in the advanced interface, which is somewhat more powerful, especially in the fewer steps needed to accomplish tasks and in the possibilities for combining tasks and working with groups. Wherever possible in this chapter, descriptions of operations in the basic Teacher Module are cross-referenced to descriptions of similar operations in the Advanced Teacher Module. The essential method of the basic interface is what software designers call the “wizard.” This method breaks a task down into steps and leads the user through those steps, asking questions and confirming the accuracy of information and decisions as it goes. The wizard minimizes the likelihood that the user will become lost or confused or take an unintended action while using the system. The use of the wizard interface involves a tradeoff between the number of steps required for a given action and the degree of familiarity expected of the user. Throughout the Teacher Module (as we will call the basic interface in this chapter) there is a left-hand sidebar with links to the major areas of the Teacher Module: “How do I,” “Class Admin,” “School Admin” (available to users with Administrator status), “Reporting,” “Taking Actions,” and “Advanced” (Fig. 6.1). The links are all active when the user has selected a class for the focus of Teacher Module functions. These areas will be explained in the following sections. Also, each page of the Teacher Module contains a link to the Message Center, which can be used at any time to send queries or messages to ALEKS Corporation Customer Support. Like the Advanced Teacher Module, the basic Teacher Module offers different capacities 45 46 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.1: Teacher Module to users who are registered in ALEKS with Administrator status, as opposed to those with Teacher status. Essentially, a Teacher has control only over those classes for which she or he is the teacher; an Administrator has control over all classes for all teachers in the school, exactly as though he or she were the teacher for each of those classes. In the following, the parenthetical notation “(Administrator)” indicates which areas, operations, and parts of operations are available only to users with Administrator status. 6.1 How do I The first page to appear when you log on to your Teacher Module account is a list of the classes currently set up in your Teacher account. Click on one of these classes to indicate that it will be the focus of your next actions. You can change the class you are working with at any time by using a menu of current classes just at the top of your Teacher Module page (labeled “My Class”). It is also possible to create a new class from this initial page, using the link at the bottom marked “Create a new class.” The first thing you will notice on the home page of the Teacher Module (called “How do I”) is a brief list of the most common actions that you may wish to take (e.g., 6.1. HOW DO I 47 Figure 6.2: How do I Questions “Customize this class’). Click any one of these items to initiate the action. Underneath this list is menu of questions. These questions correspond to a longer list of the most frequently performed operations in the Teacher Module, such as “How do I change someone’s password?” or “How do I create a new teacher account?” By choosing the last item, “More,” in the menu, or clicking “full list,” you can see the entire list of questions, arranged by category (Fig. 6.2). These categories are also included in the links featured in the left-hand sidebar of the Teacher Module: “Class Admin,” “School Admin” (Administrator), “Reporting,” “Taking Actions,” and “Advanced.” Along with “How do I” (for the home page), these are available from anywhere in the Teacher Module. The questions on “How do I” are simply a way of getting quickly to the tutorial descriptions found in the Teacher Module. For example, clicking on “How do I move a student from one class to another?” brings you to the page for “Move a student from one class to another,” which can also be found by clicking the sidebar link for “Class Admin.” The “How do I” page contains an email link and telephone number for contacting ALEKS Corporation Customer Support. Questions and messages can also be sent directly to ALEKS Corporation Customer support using the Message Center links found 48 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.3: Class Admin on each page of the Teacher Module. 6.2 Class Admin Class Admin is concerned with the creation and management of classes in ALEKS, and is available to all teachers for ALEKS in a given school (Fig. 6.3). This area of the Teacher Module will be needed especially around the beginning of a new term or class, and also as the term proceeds, when students complete domains in ALEKS and need to be moved up to new ones. 6.2.1 Create a new course See also Section 7.17. (Administrator) click on a name from a list of existing teachers; enter name of class, choose topic, and click “Save”; receive Class Code for new class, with option for further customization (below). 6.2. CLASS ADMIN 6.2.2 View all your courses and course codes This command is useful for obtaining an overview of the classes you are teaching. for each class (Administrator: for each teacher), view name, topic, teacher (Administrator), number of students, and Class Code. 6.2.3 Customize a course See also Section 7.18. click “Course name or topic taught; edit name and topic of class and click “Save”; click “Textbook used for teaching”; choose textbook to be linked to class in ALEKS and click “Next”; set dates for completion of textbook chapters and click “Save”; click “Content editor”; click boxes to remove topic areas from class coverage and click “Save” (see also Section 7.24); click “Content List”; view list of topics currently included in class coverage; click individual topics to see sample problems; click “Worksheet”; check options for access to Worksheet answers and click “Save”; ALEKS has powerful features for organizing the content of courses according to the textbook being used. Please see Sec. 7.19 for a complete description. 6.2.4 Password issues See also Section 7.21. click on name from list of students in class; enter new password twice and click “Save.” 6.2.5 Account preferences See also Section 7.16. edit own title, name, status options, email, and email/message options and click “Save.” 6.2.6 Student Account preferences See also Section 7.21. click on name from list of students in class; edit name, email, and active status of student and click “Save.” 49 50 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE 6.2.7 Move a student from one class to another See also Section 7.20. click on name from list of students in class; click on name from list of classes (Administrator: for each teacher) to move student to that class. NOTE. This procedure is fine for moving one student at a time. If groups of students need to be moved, see Section 7.20. 6.2.8 Unenroll a student from a class See also Section 7.20. click “Select All” if all students are to be unenrolled, or click “Select None” to cancel section, or click the names of students to select them individually, and then click “Next”; click “Confirm” to confirm unenrollment of student or students. 6.2.9 Delete a class See also Section 7.18. click “Confirm” to confirm deletion of empty class. Note that a class must be empty (contain no students) before it can be deleted. See above, “Unenroll a student from a class.” 6.3. SCHOOL ADMIN (ADMINISTRATOR) Figure 6.4: School Admin 6.3 School Admin (Administrator) School Admin allows the ALEKS Administrator(s) for a given school to create and manage the accounts of teachers using ALEKS, and is accessible only to users with Administrator status (Fig. 6.4). In most cases, teachers, once they are enrolled in ALEKS, will be able to manage their own accounts, and will require little or no assistance from the Administrator. 6.3.1 Create a new teacher account See also Section 7.15. fill in title, name, and administrator status (Administrator) and click “Next”; edit Login Name, set Password, and click “Save”; option to create classes for new teacher (below). 6.3.2 Password issues See also Section 7.16. click on a name from a list of existing teachers (including self); enter new password twice and click “Save.” 51 52 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE 6.3.3 Teacher account preferences See also Section 7.16. click on a name from a list of existing teachers (including self); edit title, name, status options, email, and email/message options and click “Save.” 6.3.4 Move a class from one teacher to another See also Section 7.18. click on a name from a list of existing teachers (including self) to transfer class to that teacher. 6.3.5 Delete an Teacher Account See also Section 7.16. click on a name from a list of existing teachers (including self); click “Confirm” to confirm deletion of teacher account (possible only if the teacher does not currently have classes in ALEKS). 6.4. REPORTING 53 Figure 6.5: Reporting 6.4 Reporting Reporting should be used frequently during a class taught with ALEKS to monitor the students’ use of and progress in the system. After you click on the link for “Reporting,” a series of options for reporting will be shown (Fig. 6.5). 6.4.1 Class Progress options The rows in the “Progress” views contain bar graphs showing students’ performance on and following dated assessments. You can use the students’ Login Names or id’s rather than their names as the identifier in the left-hand column; simply click on the corresponding link at the top of that column. This may be useful when the data from this page needs to be downloaded and stored in a particular format for administrative purposes. Each student’s name is linked to their individual Progress page (See Sec. 6.4.17). 54 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE 6.4.2 Download Excel spreadsheet A link at the top of the page allows you to download the data in Excel spreadsheet format. 6.4.3 Sorting The information in the Class Progress page can be sorted on any of the columns. Simply click on the header or footer of a column to sort on that column; a second click switches between ascending and descending order. 6.4.4 Statistical information Most display options provide additional types of statistical information on student progress in the right-hand part of the display. Their significance varies according to the display option, and is indicated in the column headings. One or more fields may be blank if the information gathered for that student is not sufficient at a particular time. It is also possible to choose “Time to Completion”; this indicates the estimated time necessary for individual students to complete the course goals based on average progress for the period chosen. Where the Intermediate Objectives are in use, this also shows “Time to Current Objective” (See Sec. 7.23). 6.4. REPORTING 55 Figure 6.6: State standards report 6.4.5 State standards report State standards report analyzes the current progress of the class in terms of the strands and substrands of the applicable state standards. For each strand, a vertical bar graph at the top of the display shows the satisfaction of that strand as measured by ALEKS; the numbers beneath each bar indicate the proportion of substrands under that strand which have been satisfied by the students, according to the parameters set beneath the bars. The options appearing beneath the bars enable the teacher to choose: what percentage of ALEKS items supporting a substrand must be completed by a student for the student to be considered as having satisfied that substrand; how the students’ mastery of items will be determined: by initial assessment, by most recent assessment, or by most recent work in the Learning Mode; which students will be used to calculate levels of achievement: all students in the class, or students who have spent certain amounts of time (10, 20, 40, or 60 hours) using their ALEKS accounts. Further down the page, the display provides complete detail on standards-based achieve- 56 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE ment by the class. The teacher can choose to see this detail organized by student (which substrands have been mastered by each student) or by substrand (what the precise level of satisfaction is for each substrand, with lists of ALEKS items supporting the substrands and how many of them individual students have mastered). This report is also available in the Advanced Teacher Module (See Sec. 7.8.1). 6.4. REPORTING Figure 6.7: Individual learning progress since latest assessment 6.4.6 Individual learning progress since latest assessment Individual learning progress since latest assessment displays a list of the students in the class, each with a single bar graph showing the most recent assessment and progress made since that assessment (Fig. 6.7). All students who have completed at least one assessment have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the most recent assessment, and the green portion shows progress in the Learning Mode since that assessment. 57 58 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.8: Individual detailed progress history 6.4.7 Individual detailed progress history Individual detailed progress history displays a list of the students in the class, each with a series of bar graphs for each assessment taken to date (Fig. 6.8). For each student who has taken at least one assessment, there is a bar graph shown for each assessment taken in the last 6 months (other periods may also be chosen). The blue part of the bar shows mastery on the assessment, and the green part additional mastery achieved in Learning Mode following that assessment (but before any subsequent assessment). 6.4. REPORTING 59 Figure 6.9: Individual overall progress in assessment 6.4.8 Individual overall progress in assessment Individual overall progress in assessment displays a list of the students in the class, each with a single bar graph showing the progress made between that student’s first and most recent assessments (Fig. 6.9). All students who have completed at least two assessments have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the first assessment, and the light blue portion shows progress made between that assessment and the most recent assessment taken. 60 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.10: Scheduled Assessment Report 6.4.9 Scheduled assessment report Scheduled assessment report shows the results of an assessment that has been scheduled for the class in the form of a series of bar graphs (Fig. 6.10). The blue portion of each bar graph shows the student’s knowledge as measured by the assessment; subsequent progress in Learning Mode is not shown in this view. Grades for the assessment are shown if the teacher has chosen to grade the assessment (See Sec. 6.5.1). A menu at the top of the display can be used to choose earlier scheduled assessments. 6.4. REPORTING 61 Figure 6.11: Average report (pie chart) 6.4.10 Average report (pie chart) Average report (pie chart) displays one or more combined pie charts for the class, showing its average progress toward mastery of the curriculum (Fig. 6.11). 6.4.11 Display options for Average Report Beneath the pie charts there are other kinds of analysis available for class assessment data. Choose “Average,” “Ready to learn (learning),” “Ready to learn (assessment),” “What students can do (learning),” or “What students can do (assessment)” from the “Display Mode” menu and click on “OK” to display results. 6.4.12 Average This option produces a list of the specific concepts mastered by a percentage of the students, as of their most recent assessment. The list is organized by general categories (Fig. 7.6). For each concept, the percentage of students in the class who demonstrated mastery is given. 62 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE 6.4.13 Ready to learn This option also shows a list of specific concepts, organized by general categories. For each concept, it shows the number of students in the class who are ready to learn that concept in the Learning Mode (learning) or as of their most recent assessment (assessment). Clicking on the number of students will display a list of their names; there also appears a link for sending a message to all the students in the group so defined (See Secs. 7.12, 7.13). The button “Open All” displays all students’ names in each group (with links). 6.4.14 What students can do This option also shows a list of specific concepts, organized by general categories. For each concept, it shows the number of students in the class who have recently mastered that concept in the Learning Mode (learning) or as of their last assessment (assessment). Clicking on the number of students will display a list of their names; there also appears a link for sending a message to all the students in the group so defined (See Secs. 7.12, 7.13). The button “Open All” displays all students’ names in each group (with links). 6.4. REPORTING 63 Figure 6.12: Quiz results for all the students 6.4.15 Quiz results for all the students Quiz results for all the students shows the results on any given quiz for all students in the class who took the quiz (Fig. 6.12). Clicking on the Date Submitted for any particular quiz will give the individual results of that quiz by question. It will also be possible to see the individual questions and the answers that the student submitted for them. Please also note the option to view quiz results on a per-question basis, which can be useful in identifying the specific class strengths and weakness shown by the quiz results. 64 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.13: State standards report for a single student 6.4.16 State standards report for a single student State standards report for a single student analyzes the student’s current progress in terms of the substrands of the applicable state standard. For each substrand, the page indicates how many ALEKS items supporting that substrand have been mastered by the student, with detail available on the specific items mastered and not mastered. This report is also available in the Advanced Teacher Module (See Sec. 7.6.2) and in the student’s own account (See Sec. 4.13.3). 6.4. REPORTING Figure 6.14: Progress report for a single student in this class 6.4.17 Progress report for a single student in this class Progress report for a single student in this class displays a list of bar graphs for the single student chosen. There is one row for each assessment that the student has taken, with dates (linked to the Report page for that assessment) (Fig. 6.14). Each row contains one to three bar graphs, depending on the student’s grade. Each bar graph measures the student’s mastery as of the given assessment as seen by the blue portion of the bar. Progress made in the Learning Mode subsequently to that assessment (but before the next assessment, if there is one) is measured by the green portion of the bar. There are also percentage values given beneath the bar for the blue and green portions of the bars; for example, 57+9% means that the last assessment showed 57% mastery, and that subsequent work in the Learning Mode added another 9% mastery. If there is more than one bar per row, they will correspond to the programs for the previous grade, the current grade, and the subsequent grade. Information on each assessment, total hours and weeks spent subsequently in the Learning Mode (up to the time of the next assessment) with average numbers of items gained per hour and per week is also provided (optionally, this shows the time left to completion of course goals). 65 66 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.15: Report for a single student in this class 6.4.18 Report for a single student in this class (pie chart) Report for a single student in this class (pie chart) displays one or more pie charts for the single student chosen, showing the student’s current progress toward mastery of the curriculum (Fig. 6.15). There is also a menu giving access to earlier points in the student’s progress. Beneath the pie charts is a list of concepts that the student has mastered recently (“What Name Can Do”) and another list of concepts that the student is currently (as of the given assessment) most ready to begin learning (“Ready to Learn”). There may also be a summary of the student’s history in ALEKS (“History”) and a log of work in the Learning Mode following that assessment (“Learning Log”). There are also buttons allowing the teacher to request or cancel an assessment for that student and to edit Intermediate Objectives (See Sec. 7.23). 6.4.19 Complete list of topics mastered Click on the link “and many other more elementary concepts.” to see a complete list of topics mastered by the student. 6.5. TAKING ACTIONS 67 Figure 6.16: Taking Actions 6.4.20 Quiz results for a particular student Quiz results for a particular student shows the results for any given student on any quizzes taken by that student. 6.5 Taking Actions Additional class management features are available under “Taking Actions” (Fig. 6.16). Many of these are ways of providing assignments to the students in the class. 6.5.1 Schedule a new assessment See also Section 7.10. provide name and date for assessment and click “Next” (Fig. 6.17); provide start time for assessment with option for more detailed scheduling (prevent automatic assessment up to 7 days in advance, trigger assessment on specified day only, restrict assessment to school; assign grading scale to assessment) and click “Save.” In order to schedule a class assessment, the teacher is asked to specify the name of the assessment (by default, a scheduled assessment is called “Requested Assessment” plus its 68 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.17: Schedule a new assessment number), a date (by default the current date), and a time (by default the current time) (Fig. 7.8). “Detailed scheduling options” permit the teacher to restrict the assessment to campus and to limit the time when it can be begun. When this information has been given, the teacher schedules the assessment by clicking “Save.” If all the defaults are left, the students will immediately enter Assessment Mode at their next login. If a later date and/or time are chosen, the students will enter Assessment Mode the next time they log in after that date and time. The calendar graphic provides a quick and easy way to choose the date of an assessment (click on the calendar thumbnail to use this feature). NOTE. A Progress Assessment will tend to focus its questions on the material most recently learned by the student, and will be shorter than a Comprehensive Assessment. A Comprehensive Assessment is a bit longer, but will question the student more comprehensively on material covered in the course product. If an assessment is being given to determine students’ overall mastery at the end of a course, the Comprehensive Assessment should be used. 6.5.2 Detailed scheduling options You can block automatic assessments for up to 7 days prior to a scheduled assessment (useful to avoid having some students assessed twice in a row); limit the effect of a scheduled assessment to the day it is assigned to or control the period of time during which it is in effect. If an assessment is limited to the assigned day, a student logging 6.5. TAKING ACTIONS Figure 6.18: Grading with Scheduled Assessment on to ALEKS on that day (after the start time) will be assessed, but if the student does not log on that day that student will not be assessed until the next automatic or scheduled assessment. The period during which the assessment is in effect can be extended for a number of days. 6.5.3 Grading with Scheduled Assessments You can assign a grading scheme to this assessment only. The Grades feature uses a chart with sliders (Fig. 6.18). The grades received by students on scheduled assessments can be seen under “Scheduled Assessment Report” (See Sec. 6.4.9). The three buttons under the graph determine the use of the evaluation: if “Disabled,” no one sees it; if “Private,” the teacher sees it but the students do not; if “Public,” the teacher sees it and each student sees it for their own work. The graph has sliders, with labels referring to the intervals they define. Additional sliders may be placed by dragging the right-hand or left-hand sliders, or sliders may be removed by dragging them off to the right or left. The sliders may be set and the labels edited as the teacher desires. To change the label on a new or existing slider, select the text of the current label, retype as desired, and then press “Return.” 69 70 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE 6.5.4 Cancel an assessment See also Section 7.10. click on name from list of scheduled assessments; click “Save” to confirm cancellation of assessment. 6.5.5 Change the name, date, grading scale of an assessment See also Section 7.10. click on name from list of scheduled assessments, with option to schedule new assessment; click link to modify grading scale, name, date, or other property of assessment; modify settings and click “Save” (possible option for more detailed settings). 6.5.6 Create a quiz See also Section 7.11. enter a name for the quiz, or leave the name provided (“Quiz N”), and click “Next” (you can also use the link provided to copy an existing quiz, if there is a quiz in existence for this kind of class); select from the list of topics in the left-hand window either by dragging topics into the right-hand window, or by highlighting topics and clicking “Add”, then click “Save”; use the links provided to continue editing the topics on the quiz, assign a grading scale, change how the quiz is made available to your students, or assign the quiz to some group of students within the class. NOTE. Often it is necessary to provide a “makeup” quiz to some students. This can easily be done by copying the original quiz, then editing it so that it is assigned only to the students needing the makeup. 6.5.7 Tips for making quizzes Double-click on the name of any topic to see a sample problem. Topics can be selected in continuous groups using the Shift key or discontinuous groups using Ctrl; the entire folder is selected by using Ctrl-a. The Quiz feature in ALEKS allows teachers to create quizzes for their students using any topics in the ALEKS domain. These quizzes are administered through ALEKS and scored automatically, with optional use of a grading scale set by the teacher. Quizzes 6.5. TAKING ACTIONS may be scheduled for particular days and times, or they may be made available for the students in a class to take when they are ready (“Homework Quiz”). The results of quizzes can be seen through the reporting features of ALEKS, but do not influence the students’ knowledge states or their guided learning in ALEKS. 6.5.8 Grading with quizzes The grading scale used with quizzes is like the one used for assessments (See Sec. 6.5.3). As with assessments, grading is not obligatory; if no grading scale is set, the students and the teacher will only see the percentage of questions answered correctly. 6.5.9 Availability of quizzes to students. By default, quizzes are made available to students as “Homework Quizzes.” This means that the student is not forced into the quiz by ALEKS; rather, the student clicks the “Quiz” button when they are ready to take the quiz (See Sec. 5.2.10). If this option is chosen, the teacher must indicate a due date for the quiz, after which the quiz will no longer be available to students. A message can also be sent to students informing them that the quiz has been assigned. Quizzes may also be “hidden” for later availability to students (“Don’t make this quiz available yet”), or they may be scheduled. A graphic calendar is provided for easy scheduling of quizzes. If the quiz is scheduled, the teacher will have options for specifying the time of day it is to begin, the time limit on the quiz, whether students are notified, how many days the quiz should be in effect (“Window of time to take the quiz”), whether the quiz is restricted to the school, and prevention of automatic assessments up to five days before the quiz is scheduled. The quiz may be assigned to all the students in the class or, optionally, to some group within the class. 6.5.10 Edit a quiz See also Section 7.11. click on name from a list of existing quizzes; modify the quiz using the features described above. 6.5.11 Delete a quiz See also Section 7.11. click on name from a list of existing quizzes; click on “Confirm” to delete the quiz, or “Cancel” to leave it. 71 72 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Figure 6.19: Advanced 6.5.12 Authorize a student account See also Section 7.22. NOTE. If there are students waiting for authorization, there will be a notification appearing to the teacher immediately upon login. You can click on the link in this notification to go directly to the authorization page (See Sec. 3.8). if there are any students waiting for authorization, check the “Authorize” box next to their names, or use the option “Authorize every account below”; click the “Delete” box for any duplicate names, then click “Next”; check the availability of licenses for new students, then click “Next” to complete the authorization process. Clicking “Back” will enable you to modify your selection of students for authorization. 6.6 Advanced On clicking this link, the user is shown a brief explanation of how the Advanced Teacher Module differs from the standard one (Fig. 6.19). Teachers using ALEKS should not be intimidated about trying the advanced interface. It is a visual or graphic (“point and click”) interface based on a model of directories, files, and actions applied to files and directories, which is essentially shared by all modern 6.6. ADVANCED computer systems. With even slight familiarity, most users will have no difficulty using it (See Chapters 7-8). 6.6.1 Show me a tutorial for the “Advanced” Teacher Module. The Tutorial for the Advanced Teacher Module is a complete guide to the most commonlyused features of this area (See Sec. 7.2). From within the Advanced Teacher Module, it is possible to retake the Tutorial at any time or to review parts of it by using the “Help” button. click “Next” to enter the Tutorial for the Advanced Teacher Module. 6.6.2 Enter the “Advanced” Teacher Module now. When a teacher has achieved a certain level of familiarity with the Teacher Module, she or he may wish to try using the advanced interface, or even to use the advanced interface exclusively. As noted, the Advanced Teacher Module has certain advantages of efficiency and flexibility, especially in operations affecting groups of students. click “Next” to enter the Advanced Teacher Module (optionally, set your preferences to log directly into the Advanced Teacher Module when using this account). 73 74 CHAPTER 6. TEACHER MODULE: BASIC INTERFACE Chapter 7 Advanced Teacher Module: Results & Progress 7.1 The ALEKS Advanced Teacher Module The Advanced Teacher Module interface provides an array of features enabling teachers having some familiarity with ALEKS to carry out management and monitoring of their classes with more efficiency and power. The Advanced Teacher module is entered from the basic Teacher Module by clicking “Advanced”; teachers may also choose to make the advanced interface their default interface for the ALEKS Teacher Module. Teachers using the Advanced Teacher Module can return to the basic Teacher Module at any time by using the link, “Go to the Basic Teacher Module,” located at the top of the Advanced Teacher Module window. 7.2 Teacher Tutorial (Advanced Teacher Module) The Tutorial for the Advanced Teacher Module is designed to parallel the function of the Tutorial taken by all student users of ALEKS when they first register with the system. It introduces the teacher to the features of the ALEKS Advanced Teacher Module in a brief, but thorough, interactive way, and will give teachers who choose this interface confidence in carrying out the operations needed to effectively monitor and manage their ALEKS classes. The Tutorial for the Advanced Teacher Module reproduces the advanced ALEKS interface and poses the teacher a series of tasks involving the interface tools (Fig. 7.1). The teacher proceeds to the next page by carrying out the current task; feedback is provided to guide the teacher through all needed actions. Teachers will normally take the Tutorial at the time that they begin to explore or use the Advanced Teacher Module interface. The Tutorial can be skipped; a teacher who has 75 76 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Figure 7.1: Tutorial for the Advanced Teacher Module skipped part of the Tutorial can return to where they left off or restart from scratch. Also, the Help page contains an index, which links to every section of the Tutorial. Current teachers may take the Tutorial at any time by clicking the link marked “Show me a Tutorial” at the top of the Advanced Teacher Module window. (An teacher who has chosen to skip all or part of the Tutorial sees “Return to the Tutorial.”) 7.3. ACCESS TO THE ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE Figure 7.2: The Results and Progress Directory (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.3 Access to the Advanced Teacher Module When you enter the Advanced Teacher Module with teacher status, you will see a directory containing only your own classes. If you have an administrator account you will see all of the teacher directories for your school. If you have a root administrator account you will see directories for all schools under your administration (Fig. 7.2). NOTE. The directory window is called the “Selector.” It is the chief graphic navigation tool of the Advanced Teacher Module. You can always return to the Selector by scrolling your browser window up. Similar Selector windows are used in other areas of the Advanced Teacher Module for special purposes. If you have a teacher account, the system features at your disposal can affect only your classes and the students under your supervision. If your account is that of a school administrator, your privileges are similar, but extend to all the classes and all of the students in the school. If your account is that of a root administrator (e.g., over an entire school district), your privileges extend to all schools under your administration. In the following, we assume that your account is that of a school administrator. The Advanced Teacher Module has two parts: “Results & Progress” and “Standards & Programs.” When you enter the Advanced Teacher Module, you are automatically placed in “Results & Progress.” Use the ALEKS menu bar to change the part of the Advanced Teacher Module in which you are working (See Chapter 8). “Results & Progress” is used for most administrative tasks, such as monitoring individ- 77 78 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS ual and group progress. Teachers using ALEKS with one or more classes will probably wish to check into this part of the Teacher Module on a daily basis. This allows the teachers to verify the rate of progress achieved by the students. The features also enable teachers to set up additional classes if they need to. The following sections describe the various actions that can be carried out by teachers with appropriate levels of privilege in the Advanced Teacher Module. 7.4 Online Help in the Advanced Teacher Module Context-sensitive online help in the Advanced Teacher Module can be obtained by clicking on “Help” in the bar at the top of the window (next to the “Message” button). Bulletin Board and Mailing List. The “Help” button also gives access to the ALEKS bulletin board and mailing list for teachers. The purpose of these features is to allow teachers using ALEKS to exchange information and viewpoints on teaching methods, strategies, and the like. They can also be accessed from the ALEKS website by registered teachers (click on “Help”). 7.5. VIEW STUDENT PROGRESS Figure 7.3: Student Progress (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.5 View Student Progress To view student progress, select the name of the student and click on the “Progress” button. A chart will appear below the directories window with one or more rows of information (Fig. 7.3). There is one bar graph for each assessment that the student has taken, with dates (linked to the Report page for that assessment). Each bar graph measures the student’s mastery as of the given assessment as seen by the blue portion of the bar. Progress made in the Learning Mode subsequently to that assessment (but before the next assessment, if there is one) is measured by the green portion of the bar. There are also percentage values given beneath the bar for the blue and green portions of the bars; for example, 57+9% means that the last assessment showed 57% mastery, and that subsequent work in the Learning Mode added another 9% mastery. If there is more than one bar per row, they will correspond to the programs for the previous grade, the current grade, and the subsequent grade. A variety of other information, clearly labeled, is provided on the Progress page: date of last login, enrollment date, total hours spent on the system. Information on each assessment, total hours and weeks spent subsequently in the Learning Mode (up to the time of the next assessment) with average numbers of items gained per hour and per week is also provided (optionally, this shows the time left to completion of course goals). There are also buttons allowing the teacher to schedule or cancel an assessment 79 80 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS for that student and to edit Intermediate Objectives (See Secs. 7.9, 7.23), and a link for downloading this information to the teacher’s computer. Downloading. Information from the Student Progress page can be downloaded in two formats. “Spreadsheet Format” is comma-separated values (CSV), which can be imported into a variety of applications but is raw in appearance. “Excel Format” is in Microsoft Excel format, and has a legible, professional appearance, suitable for printing. Monitoring progress. When a student has spent enough time on ALEKS to have had two or more assessments, the sequence of bar graphs appearing on the Student Progress page begins to tell a clear story of the student’s success in moving toward mastery. There may be considerable difference among individual students in the speed and smoothness of their progress. When one bar graph appears above another bar graph, the uppermost one represents a later assessment, in which the student seeks to confirm knowledge of material tentatively mastered in Learning Mode. For some students, progress in assessments is slower than that in Learning Mode. This can be seen when the green portion of one bar graph extends further to the right than the blue portion of the bar graph above it (not everything covered in Learning Mode was confirmed subsequently in the assessment). For other students the opposite is true: progress in assessments is faster than that in the Learning Mode. This can be seen when the green portion of one bar graph does not extend so far to the right as the blue portion of the bar graph above it (more knowledge was confirmed in the assessment than had been covered previously in Learning Mode). When a student is frustrated, this will be obvious from the bar graphs; in such cases the teacher may need to provide extra help or encouragement. It is well worth the teacher’s time to check daily on individual and class progress in ALEKS. 7.6. VIEW STUDENT ASSESSMENT REPORT Figure 7.4: Student Report (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.6 View Student Assessment Report Select the name of the student for whom you wish to observe a report and click on the “Report” button. A display containing one or more pie charts will appear beneath the directories window (Fig. 7.4). Its interpretation is the same as for the reports received by students following all assessments (See Sec. 4.13.1). By default, the Report page shows the most recent assessment or the most recent knowledge attained in the Learning Mode. Other assessments or other Learning Mode reports may be chosen by selecting dates from the menu at the top of the chart and clicking on “OK.” 7.6.1 Dates Each report in the menu at the top of the Student Report page is dated. If an assessment is begun on one date and finished on another, the begin and end dates are shown on the Student Report page, along with the amount of time spent in the assessment (the menu shows only the begin date). The date for a Learning report is the last date on 81 82 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS which the student worked in the Learning Mode before any subsequent assessment. 7.6.2 State Standards Report In some states and for some courses, there will also be an entry in this display giving access to the state standards report for this student. For a complete description of this feature, see Sec. 6.4.16. 7.6.3 Learning Log Beneath the pie charts is a list of concepts that the student has mastered recently (“What Name Can Do”) and another list of concepts that the student is currently (as of the given assessment) most ready to begin learning (“Ready to Learn”). There may also be a summary of the student’s history in ALEKS (“History”) and a log of work in the Learning Mode following that assessment (“Learning Log”). There are also buttons allowing the teacher to request or cancel an assessment for that student and to edit Intermediate Objectives (See Secs. 7.9, 7.23). 7.6.4 List of Topics Mastered Click on the link “and many other more elementary concepts” to see a complete list of topics mastered by the student. 7.7 View Class Progress Select the class for which you wish to observe progress and click on the “Progress” button. A chart will appear below the directories window with a series of rows, one for each student enrolled in the class (Fig. 7.5). The rows contain bar graphs (See interpretation in “View Student Progress,” Sec. 7.5). By default, only the bar graph for the most recent assessment is shown (the students’ names are linked to their individual Progress pages, while the assessment dates are linked to their individual Report pages). You can use the students’ Login Names or ids rather than their names as the identifier in the left-hand column; simply click on the corresponding link at the top of that column. This may be useful when the data from this page needs to be downloaded and stored in a particular format for administrative purposes. Buttons at the bottom of the page allow the teacher to schedule an assessment for all the students taking the class and to download information from the page in a format suitable for spreadsheet display (See Sec. 7.10). 7.7. VIEW CLASS PROGRESS Figure 7.5: Class Progress (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.7.1 Report Style A range of options providing variations on this format are accessible through a menu at the top of the chart. Choose the desired format from the menu and click on “Compute” to view results. Of these options, the following have been found particularly useful by a wide range of users: “Progress in learning mode” (for frequent checks on progress and time spent in ALEKS), “Total progress” (for viewing the overall effectiveness of students’ use of ALEKS over a longer period of time, such as a term or semester), and “Full progress over last 6 months” (for convenient examination of the learning patterns followed by students in a class). 7.7.2 Progress in Learning Mode All students who have completed at least one assessment have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the most recent assessment, and the green portion shows progress in the Learning Mode since that assessment. 83 84 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS 7.7.3 Total progress All students who have completed at least two assessments have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the first assessment, and the light blue portion shows progress made between that assessment and the most recent assessment taken. 7.7.4 Most recent progress All students who have completed at least two assessments have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the assessment immediately preceding the most recent one, and the light blue portion shows progress made between that assessment and the most recent assessment taken. 7.7.5 Progress over last 6 months All students who have completed at least two assessments within the last six months have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the first assessment taken within the last six months, and the light blue portion shows progress made between that assessment and the most recent one taken. 7.7.6 Progress over last 3 months All students who have completed at least two assessments within the last three months have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the first assessment taken within the last three months, and the light blue portion shows progress made between that assessment and the most recent one taken. 7.7.7 Progress over last month All students who have completed at least two assessments within the last month have bar graphs. The blue portion of the bar graph shows mastery as of the first assessment taken within the last month, and the light blue portion shows progress made between that assessment and the most recent one taken. 7.7.8 Most recent assessment only All students who have completed at least one assessment have bar graphs. The blue portion shows mastery as of the most recent assessment. 7.7. VIEW CLASS PROGRESS 7.7.9 Full progress over last 6 months For each student who has taken at least one assessment, there is a bar graph shown for each assessment taken in the last 6 months. The interpretation is the same as for “Progress in learning mode”; that is, the blue part of the bar shows mastery on the assessment, and the green part additional mastery achieved in Learning Mode following that assessment (but before any subsequent assessment). 7.7.10 Full progress over last 3 months For each student who has taken at least one assessment, there is a bar graph shown for each assessment taken in the last 3 months. The interpretation is the same as for “Progress in learning mode”; that is, the blue part of the bar shows mastery on the assessment, and the green part additional mastery achieved in Learning Mode following that assessment (but before any subsequent assessment). 7.7.11 Full progress over last month For each student who has taken at least one assessment, there is a bar graph shown for each assessment taken in the last month. The interpretation is the same as for “Progress in learning mode”; that is, the blue part of the bar shows mastery on the assessment, and the green part additional mastery achieved in Learning Mode following that assessment (but before any subsequent assessment). 7.7.12 Scheduled Assessment Underneath the “Report Style” menu is a second menu listing assessments that have been scheduled for this class. To view the results of that assessment, select the name (with date) of the assessment and click “Compute” (See Sec. 7.10). 7.7.13 Statistical Information Most display options provide additional types of statistical information on student progress in the right-hand part of the display. Their significance varies according to the display option, and is indicated in the column headings. One or more fields may be blank if the information gathered for that student is not sufficient at a particular time. It is also possible to choose “Time to Completion”; this indicates the estimated time necessary for individual students to complete the course goals based on average progress for the period chosen. Where the Intermediate Objectives are in use, this also shows “Time to Current Objective” (See Sec. 7.23). 85 86 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS 7.7.14 Assign Learning Rates A link at the top of the Class Progress page provides access to the learning rates feature (See Sec. 7.25). 7.7.15 Sorting The information in the Class Progress page can be sorted on any of the columns. Simply click on the header or footer of a column to sort on that column; a second click switches between ascending and descending order. 7.7.16 Grouping It is possible to create arbitrary groups within the class and generate Progress pages for these groups. Simply select the names of the students in the Selector: hold Shift to select a continuous range, or Ctrl to select a discontinuous group. Then click the “Progress” button. 7.7.17 Downloading Information from the Class Progress page can be downloaded in two formats. “Spreadsheet Format” is comma-separated values (CSV), which can be imported into a variety of applications but is raw in appearance. “Excel Format” is in Microsoft Excel format, and has a legible, professional appearance, suitable for printing. 7.8. VIEW CLASS REPORT Figure 7.6: Class Report (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.8 View Class Report Select the class for which you wish to view a report and click on the “Report” button. A display containing one or more pie charts will appear beneath the directories window (Fig. 7.6). Its interpretation is the same as for the reports received by students following all formal assessments, except that it represents an analytic summary of reports received by all students in the class. The period summarized may be changed using the menu at the top of the chart (click on “OK” to display results). 7.8.1 State Standards Report In some states and for some courses, there will also be a tab in this display giving access to the state standards report for this class. For a complete description of this feature, see Sec. 6.4.5. At the bottom of the Class Report page there are buttons allowing the teacher to 87 88 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS schedule an assessment for all the students in the class or to edit Intermediate Objectives (See Secs. 7.10, 7.23). 7.8.2 Display Options Beneath the pie charts there are other kinds of analysis available for class assessment data. Choose “Average,” “Ready to learn (learning),” “Ready to learn (assessment),” “What students can do (learning),” or “What students can do (assessment)” from the “Display Mode” menu and click on “OK” to display results. 7.8.3 Average This option produces a list of the specific concepts mastered by a percentage of the students, as of their most recent assessment. The list is organized by general categories (Fig. 7.6). For each concept, the percentage of students in the class who demonstrated mastery is given. By default, items are not listed if they have been learned by fewer than 5% or by more than 95% of the students in the class. For a comprehensive list (0%-100%), click the link “Display full list.” 7.8.4 Ready to learn This option also shows a list of specific concepts, organized by general categories. For each concept, it shows the number of students in the class who are ready to learn that concept in the Learning Mode (learning) or as of their most recent assessment (assessment). Clicking on the number of students will display a list of their names; there also appears a link for sending a message to all the students in the group so defined (See Secs. 7.12, 7.13). The button “Open All” displays all students’ names in each group (with links). 7.8.5 What students can do This option also shows a list of specific concepts, organized by general categories. For each concept, it shows the number of students in the class who have recently mastered that concept in the Learning Mode (learning) or as of their last assessment (assessment). Clicking on the number of students will display a list of their names; there also appears a link for sending a message to all the students in the group so defined (See Secs. 7.12, 7.13). The button “Open All” displays all students’ names in each group (with links). 7.9. SCHEDULE STUDENT ASSESSMENT 7.8.6 Focusing Instruction These tools can be used to focus instruction for classes and groups of students. The “Average” display shows very clearly which specific concepts and general areas within the program need the most work for the greatest number of students. Consequently, it can be used to prioritize topics for lectures and lesson plans. The “Ready to learn” display, on the other hand, makes it possible to break a large class up into small groups, each focused on the concept or concepts that it is working on currently in Learning Mode. The “What students can do” display mode can be used to form groups of students for special discussions and exercises designed to expand and deepen their understanding of a concept they have all recently mastered. Where there is not sufficient teaching staff to coach several groups simultaneously, the teacher may call out small groups during their use of ALEKS for brief, pointed “chalk talks.” 7.8.7 Grouping It is possible to create arbitrary groups within the class and generate Report pages for these groups. Simply select the names of the students in the Selector: hold Shift to select a continuous range, or Ctrl to select a discontinuous group. Then click the “Report” button. 7.9 Schedule Student Assessment Assessments for individual students may be requested or canceled using buttons on the Progress or Report pages for those students (Fig. 7.7). If more than one student name is selected before clicking “Progress” or “Report,” the assessment will be requested for that group of students. When the teacher has requested an assessment, the student or students will immediately enter the Assessment Mode at the next login. The teacher can specify whether the assessment is to be taken from any location or only from the school. NOTE. If an assessment is scheduled, whether by the teacher or automatically by the system, and the student is required to take the assessments at the school, the student will be unable to use the system from locations other than school until the assessment is completed (See Sec. 7.17). Teachers wishing to constrain assessments in this way should contact ALEKS Corporation for assistance in determining the domain addresses used by their school. 7.10 Schedule Class Assessment Assessments for entire classes may be scheduled using buttons on the Progress or Report pages for those classes, or on the Edit page under the tab “Advanced.” 89 90 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Figure 7.7: Student Assessment (Advanced Teacher Module) In order to schedule a class assessment, the teacher is asked to specify the name of the assessment (by default, a scheduled assessment is called “Requested Assessment” plus a number), a date (by default the current date), and a time (by default the current time) (Fig. 7.8). The teacher can also specify whether the assessment can be taken anywhere (the default) or is restricted to campus. When this information has been given, the teacher schedules the assessment by clicking “Save.” If all the defaults are left, the students will immediately enter Assessment Mode at their next login. If a later date and/or time are chosen, the students will enter Assessment Mode the next time they log in after that date and time. The calendar appearing to the right of the input fields provides a quick and easy way to choose the date of an assessment. The calendar also shows the dates of all currently scheduled assessments and days on which automatic assessments have been blocked. At the bottom of the Class Assessment page all currently scheduled assessments are listed. Clicking any of these links brings up the scheduled assessment for modification or deletion. Use the “Delete Assessment” button to delete a scheduled assessment, or the “Create New Assessment” button to add a new assessment from this page. The tabs “Message,” “Grades,” and “Advanced” provide access to additional features 7.10. SCHEDULE CLASS ASSESSMENT Figure 7.8: Class Assessment (Advanced Teacher Module) affecting scheduled assessments. 7.10.1 Message Add a special message to accompany the automatic message which students receive informing them that they are entering a scheduled assessment. If you prefer that the students not receive a message, cancel the automatic message. 7.10.2 Grades Assign a grading scheme to this assessment only. The Grades feature uses a chart with sliders (Fig. 7.9). The grades received by students on scheduled assessments can be seen under Class Progress using the “Scheduled Assessment” menu (See Sec. 7.7). The three buttons under the graph determine the use of the evaluation: if “Disabled,” no one sees it; if “Private,” the teacher sees it but the students do not; if “Public,” the teacher sees it and each student sees it for their own work. The graph has sliders, with labels referring to the intervals they define. Additional sliders may be placed by dragging the right-hand or left-hand sliders, or sliders may be removed by dragging them off to the right or left. The sliders may be set and the labels edited as the teacher desires. To change the label on a new or existing slider, select the text of the current label, retype as desired, and then press “Return.” 91 92 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Figure 7.9: Grading with Scheduled Assessment (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.10.3 Advanced Block automatic assessments for up to 7 days prior to a scheduled assessment (useful to avoid having some students assessed twice in a row); limit the effect of a scheduled assessment to the day it is assigned to or leave it in effect until the next scheduled assessment. If an assessment is limited to the assigned day, a student logging on to ALEKS on that day (after the start time) will be assessed, but if the student does not log on that day that student will not be assessed until the next automatic or scheduled assessment. The period during which the assessment is in effect can be extended for a number of days. 7.10.4 Restricted Assessment If an assessment is scheduled, whether by the teacher or automatically by the system, and the student is required to take assessments at the school, the student will be unable to use the system from locations other than school until the assessment is completed (See Sec. 7.17). Teachers wishing to constrain assessments in this way should contact ALEKS Corporation for assistance in determining the domain addresses used by their school. 7.10.5 Grouping It is possible to create arbitrary groups within the class and request assessments for these groups. Simply select the names of the students in the Selector: hold Shift to select a 7.11. CREATE, EDIT, VIEW QUIZZES Figure 7.10: Creating a Quiz (Advanced Teacher Module) continuous range, or Ctrl to select a discontinuous group. Then click the “Progress” or “Report” button, and request the assessment as you normally would for an entire class. 7.11 Create, Edit, View Quizzes To create, edit, or view quizzes, select the name of the class for which you wish to do this and click “Quiz.” You will see a list of students in the class with results for the most recent quiz. A menu above the list allows you to select a previous quiz (then click “OK” to view the quiz results). To see detailed results for any particular student on that quiz, click on the date of the quiz opposite the student’s name. It will also be possible to see the individual questions and the answers that the student submitted for them. To see all quiz results for a particular student, click that student’s name in the main display. This list can be resorted on any of the headings by clicking on that heading. Links at the top of the page enable you to see a breakdown of quiz results by question and to assign a grading scale for the quiz. The Quiz feature in ALEKS allows teachers to create quizzes for their students using 93 94 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS any topics in the ALEKS domain. These quizzes are administered through ALEKS and scored automatically, with optional use of a grading scale set by the teacher. Quizzes may be scheduled for particular days and times (“Scheduled”), or they may be made available for the students in a class to take when they are ready (“Homework”). The results of quizzes can be seen through the reporting features of ALEKS, but do not influence the students’ knowledge states or their guided learning in ALEKS. 7.11.1 Create New Quiz To create a new quiz, click on the button to lower right, “Create New Quiz.” On the page that follows, you will see various options for the quiz. Enter a name for the quiz in the box to upper left, or leave the name provided (“Quiz 1”, etc.). Next, select from the list of topics in the left-hand window either by dragging topics into the right-hand window, or by highlighting topics and clicking “Add.” Click “Save” to create the quiz. To set the availability of the quiz, use the radio buttons at the bottom of the page and the “Scheduling” button. When the quiz is properly configured, click “Save.” Other buttons enable you to create a different quiz (“Create New Quiz”) or delete this one (“Delete Quiz”). There are links at the bottom to edit any existing quiz. Also, a new quiz can be created by duplicating an existing quiz (“Copy Quiz”). The tabs at the top can be used to schedule, send a message to announce the quiz, or set a grading scale. The Schedule tab generally features an interactive calendar for scheduling quizzes. For “Scheduled” quizzes, this is the date (and time) when students are put into the quiz by ALEKS; for “Homework” quizzes, it is the date on which the quiz is due (at midnight of the date indicated). The Assign To tab allows the teacher to assign any quiz to particular students in the class (including a single student, or no students). By default, any quiz is assigned to all students in the class. The Message tab allows the teacher to customize the simple message normally sent to students announcing a quiz, or to cancel the message. By default, a message is sent to all students indicating that a quiz has been scheduled (for “Scheduled” quizzes) or posted (for “Homework” quizzes). The Grades tab allows the teacher to set a grading scale for the quiz. By default, the grading scale is “Disabled,” meaning that neither teacher nor students see any grades. If it is set to “Private,” only the teacher sees the grades for all students. If it is set to “Public,” the teacher sees the grades for all students, and each student sees their own grade. NOTE. Often it is necessary to provide a “makeup” quiz to some students. This can easily be done by copying the original quiz, then editing it so that it is assigned only to the students needing the makeup. 7.11. CREATE, EDIT, VIEW QUIZZES Tips. Double-click on the name of any topic to see a sample problem. Topics can be selected in continuous groups using the Shift key or discontinuous groups using Ctrl; the entire folder is selected by using Ctrl-a. 7.11.2 Grading with Quizzes The grading scale used with quizzes is like the one used for assessments (See Sec. 7.10.2). As with assessments, grading is not obligatory; if no grading scale is set, the students and the teacher will only see the percentage of questions answered correctly. 7.11.3 Availability of Quizzes to Students By default, quizzes are made available to students as “Homework Quizzes.” This means that the student is not forced into the quiz by ALEKS; rather, the student clicks the “Quiz” button when they are ready to take the quiz (See Sec. 5.2.10). If this option is chosen, the teacher must indicate a due date for the quiz, after which the quiz will no longer be available to students (Homework Quizzes are always due on midnight of the due date specified). A message can also be sent to students informing them that the quiz has been assigned. Quizzes may also be “hidden,” meaning that the students do not have any access to them (pending the teacher’s decision to “release” the quiz), or they may be scheduled (“Scheduled Quiz”). A graphic calendar is provided for easy scheduling of quizzes. If the quiz is scheduled, the teacher will have options for specifying the time of day it is to begin, the time limit on the quiz, whether students are notified, how many days the quiz should be in effect (“Window of time to take the quiz”), whether the quiz is restricted to the school, and prevention of automatic assessments up to seven days before the quiz is scheduled. 7.11.4 Edit Quiz To edit an existing quiz, click on the button to the lower right, “Edit Quiz.” The quiz may be modified using the features described above for the creation of quizzes, or it may be deleted. 7.11.5 Downloading Information from the Quiz page can be downloaded in two formats. “Spreadsheet Format” is comma-separated values (CSV), which can be imported into a variety of applications but is raw in appearance. “Excel Format” is in Microsoft Excel format, and has a legible, professional appearance, suitable for printing. 95 96 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS 7.11.6 Makeup Quizzes The easiest way to create makeup quizzes is to duplicate the quiz needing to be made up, then give it a new due date and “assign” the quiz to only those students needing to make it up. When doing this, either turn off the Message notification or make sure that the quiz has been assigned to the necessary students before clicking the “Save” button. Attention to this detail will spare your other students from an unintended notification of the new quiz! 7.12. SEND MESSAGE Figure 7.11: Send Message (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.12 Send Message Select the student or class to whom you wish to send a message, and click on the “Compose Message” button. A full-featured editor will appear beneath the directories window with fields for a subject and a message and a “Send Message” button (Fig. 7.11). The student or students to whom the message is being sent will see it at their next login (See Sec. 5.2.11). It is also possible to send messages directly to ALEKS Corporation. ALEKS Message Center. The ALEKS Message Center resembles an email program in most of its features, although the exchange of messages takes place within the ALEKS system. Also, the Message Center is equipped with special symbols and tools appropriate to communication about the subject-matter used in ALEKS. Optionally, you can have copies of your students’ messages sent to your email account as well (See Sec. 7.15). Mathematical Expressions. The ALEKS Message Center contains a full range of tools for using mathematical symbolism, constructions, and expressions in your messages. The tools are like those used by ALEKS itself in the Answer Editor (See Sec. 4.5). Moreover, students sending you messages in the Message Center can attach a graphic representation of the problem they are currently working on, to facilitate posing and answering mathematical questions. 97 98 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Figure 7.12: Server Statistics (Advanced Teacher Module) Grouping. It is possible to create arbitrary groups within the class and send messages to these groups. Simply select the names of the students in the Selector: hold Shift to select a continuous range, or Ctrl to select a discontinuous group. Then click the “Compose Message” button. 7.13 Check Messages Click on the “Message” button at the top of the Teacher Module window. You can receive messages from students in a class only if this has been enabled in the teacher account (See Sec. 7.15.). 7.14 Check Server Usage Click on the “Server Stats” button. A table will appear beneath the directories window (Fig. 7.12). The type of information shown in the table can be changed by selecting a heading from the menu at the top of the table and clicking the “Compute” button. The options for display are: Enrollment/Activity, Class Activity, Assessment/Performance, Enrollment List, Server Use: Page Hits, Server Use: User Hours. 7.15. CREATE TEACHER ACCOUNT Figure 7.13: Teacher Account (Advanced Teacher Module) NOTE. The information provided by this feature is of interest to system administrators, teachers, and educational administrators seeking general statistical information on the use of ALEKS. 7.15 Create Teacher Account Select the directory for the school where you wish to create a teacher account (or the directory “All teachers”) and click on the “New Teacher” button. A form for the new account will appear beneath the directories window (Fig. 7.13). Supply the teacher’s first and last names, a title (“Mr.,” “Mrs.,” “Ms.,” etc.), a Login Name, and a Password. By default, the new account is set for a teacher. If you are an administrator, you can make another administrator account by checking “Teacher and Administrator.” The “id” field is optional and may be left blank. “Message from student” should be enabled if you wish the account holder to receive messages from students (See Sec. 7.13). “Status” must be enabled if the teacher is to have classes assigned (if “Status” is enabled, you will see here how many classes are assigned to the teacher). 99 100 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS When you are finished filling in the form click on “Save.” This creates the account. To start over, click “Reset.” To cancel the account, click “Delete File.” Other settings may be changed for the teacher by using the additional tabs “Mail” and “Advanced.” Mail This tab contains options for entering an email address, forwarding ALEKS messages to this address, and permitting students to send the teacher messages through ALEKS (See Sec. 7.13). Advanced This tab contains a button for “Cleanup Tools.” These tools permit the teacher to unenroll and delete students and to modify database records in other ways. NOTE. Deleting a student removes that student’s records permanently from the ALEKS system. NOTE. Under the “Cleanup Tools,” “Records” refers to information in the database concerning student knowledge as shown on assessments and in the Learning Mode. Clear Records will remove all such information. “Stats” refers to information in the database concerning the hours students have spent in ALEKS. Clear Stats will remove all such information. 7.16 Edit Teacher Account Select the teacher whose account you wish to edit and click the “Edit” button. The same form will appear as described in “Create Teacher Account” (Fig. 7.13). The account may be deleted (“Delete File”) only if there are no classes and no students enrolled for this teacher (“Advanced”). 7.17. CREATE CLASS ACCOUNT Figure 7.14: Class Account (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.17 Create Class Account Select the teacher for whom you wish to create a class and click on the “New Class” button. A form for the new account will appear beneath the directories window (Fig. 7.14). Select a grade or level for the class. Provide a name (e.g., “Aleks”) and choose a category. At this point, you have the option of choosing a teacher other than the one initially selected (if others are available). This will transfer the class to that teacher. The “id” field is optional and ordinarily left blank. The Class Code for the newly-created Class appears in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. When you are finished filling in the form click on “Save.” This creates the account. To start over, click “Reset.” To cancel the account, click “Delete File.” Other settings may be changed for the class by using the additional tabs “Status,” “Assessment,” “Learning,” “Content,” Status Under “Status” you can close the class for enrollment (by default it is open) and restrict students’ access to their account (“assessment only” or “denied”—no access). Also, you can request to be notified by ALEKS (through the Message Center) when any student in the class assesses at 100% of your syllabus. 101 102 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Assessment The students’ assessments can be restricted so that either the initial assessment, or subsequent assessments, or both, can be taken only from the school. For this setting to be effective, a valid domain name must be entered in the school account. Teachers wishing to constrain assessments in this way should contact ALEKS Corporation for assistance in determining the domain addresses used by their school. Learning If the “Ask a friend” option is checked, students in the class will be able to request the name of a classmate for help with a topic that is causing difficulty. “Novice” means the system will choose a classmate who has mastered the concept very recently. “Expert” means that the system will choose a classmate who mastered the concept earlier than others in the group. The teacher may pick any point on the continuum between “novice” and “expert.” This tab also contains options for the use of the ALEKS Worksheet (See Sec. 5.6). The teacher may enable or disable the worksheet, choose between 16 review questions or 12 review plus 4 extra credit, remind students to print a worksheet when exiting ALEKS, and have answer sheets sent through the Message Center each time a student downloads a new worksheet. The teacher can also choose to make the answers to the worksheets directly available to students on their Worksheet page. Other options here concern the availability of the calculator and of the “Time to Completion” data to students on their Report page (See Secs. 5.2.5, 7.5, 7.7). Content Clicking the “Content” tab gives access to the ALEKS Content Editor (See Sec. 7.24). This feature lets the teacher quickly and easily modify the content for a course. If the teacher clicks in the checkbox for any content area, that content area is removed from the curriculum of the course; it will also not appear in assessments. To see exactly which items are contained in this content area, click on the title of the content area. Advanced Under “Advanced” it is possible to find a range of class management features. “Cleanup Tools” permit the teacher to unenroll and delete students and to modify database records in other ways. The “Class Program” button is equivalent to the “Select Class Program” button (See Sec. 7.19). “Assign Learning Rates” opens the Learning Rates feature (See Sec. 7.25). “Edit Int. Objectives” gives access to the Intermediate Objectives feature (See Sec. 7.23). “Schedule Assessment” permits the teacher to schedule an assessment for the class (See Sec. 7.10.). If the user has Administrator privileges, there is also a button for scheduling upgrades of ALEKS course products. If QuickTables are in use for this class, there are also buttons for setting QuickTables options (See Sec. 9). NOTE. Under the “Cleanup Tools,” “Records” refers to information in the database concerning student knowledge as shown on assessments and in the Learning Mode. Clear Records will remove 7.18. EDIT CLASS ACCOUNT Figure 7.15: Textbook Integration (Advanced Teacher Module) all such information. “Stats” refers to information in the database concerning the hours students have spent in ALEKS. Clear Stats will remove all such information. 7.18 Edit Class Account Select the class you wish to edit and click on the “Edit” button. The same form will appear as described in “Create Class Account” (Fig. 7.14). The account may be deleted (“Delete File”) only if there are no students currently enrolled in the class (“Unenroll Students”). The Class Code for the Class being edited appears in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. 7.19 Textbook Integration Select the class for which you wish to choose the class program and click on the “Select Class Program” button. (This feature can also be used in the Basic Teacher Module; see Sec. 6.2.3 You will be shown a menu of textbooks available for integration with this course. If you wish to organize the content of your course on the basis 103 104 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS of an available textbook, select the name of the textbook and click “Next.” (There is also a checkbox which you can uncheck if you wish to have the precise textbook coverage and textbook references, but not full integration.) There may also be a choice in the textbook menu labeled “ALEKS Curriculum.” This organizes the class material on the basis of the slices of the ALEKS pie chart rather than any particular textbook. The page that follows contains a list of chapters in the textbook with menus for assigning dates to each of them. For each chapter, assign the date on which you require your students to complete that material. If the date is left blank, no date will be assigned for that material; this does not mean it will be skipped, but rather that it will be included in the material for the next chapter to which a completion date is assigned. When you are done assigning dates, click “Save,” and the dates chosen will go into effect. They can be modified at any time. The textbook integration feature in ALEKS presets both syllabus and intermediate objectives for the course. During the time that the students are supposed to be completing a particular chapter, they will see dotted lines on their pie charts showing how far they need to fill in, and the date by which they need to do it; if they complete the chapter there will be a congratulatory message and they will be moved to the next chapter. The teacher will also see which students in the class have completed the current chapter (See Sec. 7.23). If a student does not complete the chapter by the completion date, there will be no congratulatory message, and the dotted lines on that student’s pie chart will move out to their new positions. The student will still have to complete any prerequisite material from unfinished chapters while working on the current one. Another effect of textbook integration is that references will appear on the ALEKS Explain pages, indicating the specific place in the textbook where the current concept is covered (See Sec. 5.3.2). When textbook integration is in effect, the quiz feature in ALEKS is also customized so that quizzes can easily be created on the basis of textbook chapters (See Sec. 7.11). If you do not wish to use full integration of an available textbook with this course, click the button “No Integration.” You will then have a choice of programs for the class. You may also have the option of choosing a textbook to be used with ALEKS (this will generate textbook references on the Explain page, but will not provide full textbook integration). When you are finished filling in the form click on “Save.” To start over or restore defaults, click on “Reset.” NOTE. The “class program” is a set of topics or items used as a goal for mastery by the students in a given class (See Chapter 8.). In school classes one program is usually set for the class. “Standards” are collections of programs covering a range of grades. ALEKS always contains ready-made standards set to appropriate defaults. Thus, in most cases the school teacher need not select the class program. 7.20. ENROLL AND UNENROLL STUDENTS 7.20 Enroll and Unenroll Students Select the class for which you wish to enroll or unenroll students and click on “Enroll in Class.” A display will appear beneath the directories window showing the names of all students who may be enrolled. The students currently enrolled in this class appear with their names highlighted in gray; those enrolled in some other class are highlighted in yellow. The names of students can be highlighted (enrolled) or dehighlighted (unenrolled) by clicking on them. When all desired changes have been made, click on the “Save” button. Drag and drop. Students may be moved between classes more easily by dragging and dropping their names. Simply select the names of students to be moved in the right-hand side of the directories window and drag them to the target folder on the left. The entire class can be selected by using Ctrl-A; a continuous range by holding Shift and clicking; or a discontinuous group by holding Ctrl and clicking. You will see the target folder become highlighted when the student or students are ready to “drop.” 105 106 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Figure 7.16: Student Account (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.21 Edit Student Account To edit a student account, select the name of the student and click on the “Edit” button. A form will appear beneath the directories window containing the student’s account information: name, login name, id, email, and current enrollment status (Fig. 7.16). The student’s Password is not shown in a readable form, but it can be changed to provide a student with a new Password when one has been forgotten. Corrections or changes may also be made to the student’s name, login name, id, and email. The student’s id and email are optional, though it may be useful to have these on record. Advanced. Under “Advanced,” “Cleanup Tools” permit the teacher to unenroll and delete the student and to modify database records in other ways. “Records” refers to information in the database concerning student knowledge as shown on assessments and in the Learning Mode. Clear Records will remove all such information. “Stats” refers to information in the database concerning the hours the student has spent in ALEKS. Clear Stats will remove all such information. Account Information. The begin and expiration dates of the student’s current account are also shown on this page. Similar information is available to the student on the Options page (See Sec. 5.2.3). 7.22. AUTHORIZE STUDENT ACCOUNT Figure 7.17: Intermediate Objectives List (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.22 Authorize Student Account A detailed account of the authorization procedure can be found in Sec. 3.8. To begin the authorization process in the Advanced Teacher Module, click on the “Authorization” button in the menu bar at the top of the ALEKS window. If there are any students waiting for authorization, check the “Authorize” box next to their names, or use the option “Authorize every account below.” Then, click the “Delete” box for any duplicate names, and click “Done” at the bottom of the page. On the page that follows, check the availability of licenses for new students, then click “Next” to complete the authorization process. Clicking “Back” will enable you to modify your selection of students for authorization. 7.23 Intermediate Objectives The Intermediate Objectives feature was created to address the needs of teachers using ALEKS in conjunction with a planned sequence of topics for classroom instruction 107 108 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Figure 7.18: Intermediate Objectives (Advanced Teacher Module) (Fig. 7.18). It enables teachers to prioritize certain groups of topics for specified segments of time, when these topics will be at the focus of class discussion. When intermediate objectives have been set, students will be directed to work on these objectives as soon as they are available in the domain and guided through their prerequisites in the most direct way possible. Both students and teacher will receive clear information on current progress toward completion of scheduled objectives. To create or edit intermediate objectives, select the name of the class for which you would like to set or modify objectives and click “Edit.” On the Edit page, click the tab marked “Advanced.” On the page that follows, click “Edit Int. Objectives.” The page that follows shows you a list of any intermediate objectives currently set for your class (or a note that none is currently set) and buttons for adding and copying intermediate objectives (Fig. 7.17). The dates for existing intermediate objectives can be changed by using menus in the list and clicking “Update.” If you wish to copy one or more intermediate objectives that have been set for another class or section, click “Copy Int. Objectives.” Also, you can choose to prevent automatic assessments for students in this class for up to five items before fulfillment of your intermediate objectives. To create a new set of intermediate objectives, click “Add Int. Objectives.” To edit an existing set of intermediate objectives, click on their link in the list. 7.23. INTERMEDIATE OBJECTIVES Here you will see a vertically divided selector window (Fig. 7.18). This window displays the topics available to be selected for the set of intermediate objectives. To view a single, scrolling list of topics, click on “Open All,” then on the tiny “X” in the upper right-hand corner of the window. Select and unselect items for inclusion by clicking on and off the little checkmarks in the boxes that precede them. NOTE. ALEKS always maintains the coherence of its intermediate objectives; any set of intermediate objectives must contain all of the items within the domain needed to learn the items it contains. If an item being added to the objectives has prerequisite items not currently also belonging to the objectives, these will be automatically added as well; conversely, if an item being removed from the objectives is a prerequisite item for some items presently in the objectives, these will also be removed. The editor warns when this is occurring (See Sec. 8.4.3). Every set of intermediate objectives is assigned to a particular date, which is the date by which the students are to have completed this set of objectives. The date is set in a pair of menus directly below the selector window, one for month, one for day. The set of objectives will be in effect through the date to which it is assigned, after which the next set of objectives will take effect. If no date is assigned, the objectives will take effect following the last set of objectives to which a date has been assigned, and remain in effect to the end of the class (“final” objectives). The name of a set of objectives appears at the top of the list of topics. Click on this name to edit it. When you have picked a name, selected topics, and set a date, click “Save” to enter the objectives into the system for this class. When a set of objectives is in effect, both teacher and student will receive information about progress toward their fulfillment. The teacher will see notations on the Class Progress page indicating which students have fulfilled the current objectives, and which are close to doing so. The student will see dotted lines on their pie chart showing how far each slice will need to be filled in to achieve the current objectives. The teacher will see the same dotted lines when they view the pie charts for the class and for individual students. When a student uses MyPie to choose a topic for work in the Learning Mode, the items shown as available are those which the student is “Ready to Learn,” excluding any items which do not lead directly to fulfillment of the current objective. Once the student has completed the intermediate objective, she or he will move immediately into the next objective, whether or not the completion date has passed. If the completion date passes without the student’s completion of that objective, the new intermediate objective will take effect in terms of the student’s guidance, but unfinished prerequisite material from the earlier objective will still have to be completed before moving on. 109 110 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS Figure 7.19: Content Editor (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.24 Content Editor The ALEKS Content Editor is a quick and easy way to modify the content of a course (Fig. 7.19). Select the name of the course and click “Edit,” then click on the tab for “Content.” You will see a list of content areas, each preceded by a checkbox. To see what is contained in any of these areas, click on its title. To remove the area from the course, click on the checkbox to place an “x” in the box. This indicates that the area has been removed from the course content; it will also not appear in assessments. Then click “Save” to put your changes into effect, or “Reset” to undo them. NOTE. The Content Editor is far more convenient, though somewhat less powerful, than the Program Editor (See Sec. 8.4). Keep in mind that while a program created or modified by the Program Editor can be used by any number of classes within the school, the Content Editor acts on only one course at a time. 7.25. ASSIGN LEARNING RATES Figure 7.20: Assign Learning Rates (Advanced Teacher Module) 7.25 Assign Learning Rates The purpose of the Assign Learning Rates feature in ALEKS is to provide teachers with a highly flexible tool for interpreting and evaluating the work of students in ALEKS. One possible use of the information provided by this feature is as a component in the grading system used for a class, or in some other method of motivation or reinforcement for student success. In the Advanced Teacher Module, select the name of the class for which you wish to assign learning rates and click the “Progress” button. At the top of the Class Progress page you will see a link marked “Assign Learning Rates.” Clicking on this link produces a page with four rectangular graphs (Fig. 7.20). Each of the graphs refers to a particular way of evaluating a student’s work: by the percentage of course objectives that they have mastered (Grading), by the total number of hours spent on ALEKS (Time on Task), by the average number of items gained per hour (Hourly Progress), and by the average number of items gained per week (Weekly Progress). The vertical bars appearing in the graphs indicate the distribution of students relative to the given scales. Any combination of these scales may be used. The three buttons to the right of each graph determine the use of the evaluation: if “Disabled,” no one sees it; if “Private,” the teacher sees 111 112 CHAPTER 7. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: RESULTS & PROGRESS it but the students do not; if “Public,” the teacher sees it and each student sees it for their own work. Each graph has sliders, with labels referring to the intervals they define. Additional sliders may be placed by dragging the right-hand or left-hand sliders, or sliders may be removed by dragging them off to the right or left. The sliders may be set and the labels edited as the teacher desires. To change the label on a new or existing slider, select the text of the current label, retype as desired, and then press “Return.” The function of the sliders is as follows: a student’s evaluation on a given scale is the label of the interval within which that student is currently located. For example, if one slider is set to 80 on the “Grading” graph and another slider to 90, with the interval between them labeled “B,” a student who has mastered 82% of the class goals will have the evaluation “B.” To take another example, if a slider under “Time on Task” has been set to 10 hours and another to 20 hours, with the label for their interval set to “Enough,” a student who has spent 11 hours on ALEKS will receive the evaluation “Enough.” When the desired settings have been made, click “Save.” Now the labels set to “Private” will appear in the Progress page. If any of these charts are set to “Public” the students will see their ratings according to those charts when they log on to ALEKS. Explain carefully to the students what the meaning is of the notations that they will see, and how they relate to the overall goals for the class. Some charts, such as Weekly Progress, may be more useful to the teacher than to the students, as an aid to monitoring students’ work and learning. These should be set to “Private.” Variable Scale. By default, the segments into which values are divided in the “score” graph are at 5-unit intervals. This can be reset to 2 units for greater precision, using a link in the lower right-hand part of the page. Chapter 8 Advanced Teacher Module: Standards & Programs By default, the Advanced Teacher Module displays “Results & Progress,” as described in the preceding sections (See Chapter 7). A second mode, “Standards & Programs,” can be chosen from the menu at the top of the Advanced Teacher Module window (Fig. 8.1). This mode enables the teacher to explore the system of standards and programs currently available in their ALEKS database. Administrators with a sufficiently high level of user privilege may also copy programs and standards, and modify them to suit the needs of a school. The “program” is a set of concepts taken from the sum total of concepts defining mastery of a domain (e.g., Arithmetic or Algebra) that has been set as the curricular goal for a particular level of study. That is to say, mastery of this set of concepts is equivalent to completion of the curriculum for that level, and all reports generated by the system for students and classes using the program are framed in terms of this program. A “standard” is a collection of programs covering a range of grades. To view a particular standard or program, use the directories window of “Standards & Programs.” This will open the folder for a particular grade within a particular standard. Normally the program will be organized by topics and subtopics using standard mathematical terminology. There is a list of individual concepts within each of these topics, each of which is either marked with a checkmark, indicating that it belongs to the program, or not so marked. Editing a new standard means adding and removing checkmarks from individual “items” according to some scheme of curricular progress. 8.1 Items, Programs, and Standards In order to understand and use this part of the Advanced Teacher Module effectively, it is necessary to grasp three key concepts. Additional information can be found in the 113 114 CHAPTER 8. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: STANDARDS & PROGRAMS Figure 8.1: The Standards & Programs Directory (Advanced Teacher Module) discussion of Knowledge Space theory (See Chapter 11). Item An item is a fundamental unit of knowledge or ability recognized by the system. An example of an item in Arithmetic is “Subtraction of Negative Integers.” Every mathematical subject covered by ALEKS (such as Arithmetic) corresponds to a set of items, each of which can be tested and taught by the system. Mastery of the subject means mastery of each of the items making up the subject. Program A program is a subset of the set of items belonging to a mathematical subject that has been defined as the goal for a particular class. For example, a program for Arithmetic is a set of items that students completing the class are expected to master. All assessment reports by the ALEKS system are based on some program selected by teachers or administrators for use by those students. The ALEKS Program Editor is provided to permit teachers and administrators to customize existing programs (See Sec. 8.4). Standard A standard is a set of programs, usually covering the entire range of grades over 8.2. NAVIGATION AND USE which a particular subject is taught. A standard should organize the teaching of a subject in a coherent and methodical way. That is, items belonging to the program for one grade should belong to the programs for higher grades, and items should be distributed among the programs according to some well-founded pedagogical rationale. Under “Standards & Programs,” users of the Advanced Teacher Module can navigate through a hierarchical listing of the standards currently available and the programs contained by them. Standards and programs can be copied. Users with appropriate levels of privilege can enter the Program Editor to create new programs based on existing ones, possibly leading to the creation of new standards. 8.2 Navigation and Use Access to directories under “Standards & Programs” is the same for all levels of user privilege, teacher and above. Any user of the Advanced Teacher Module may navigate through all directories and make copies of all available standards and programs. Users, however, may change only those standards and directories which they have themselves created (by copying existing ones), or those created by users within their authority. This means, for a root administrator, any administrator or teacher under their administration; for a school administrator, it means any teacher in the school. A user not within the authority of another given user has independent authority. Standards and programs created by a user with independent authority may not be changed. The privilege level of a particular user also determines where the new standards and programs created by that user will be placed. On choosing “Standards & Programs,” the user begins with a master directory entitled “All Standards,” containing a list of all the standards available for that system (Fig. 8.1). On opening any of the listed standards, the user is presented with a list of the grades covered by that standard. On opening any of the grades listed for the given standard, the user will see a list of the (mathematical) subjects covered for that grade. At a minimum, there will be an element entitled “Basic.” Each element in this list corresponds to a program available within the system. 8.3 Buttons The following buttons appear next to and beneath the navigation display in “Standards & Programs” (Fig. 8.1). The buttons are always visible; which buttons are active at any given moment depends on what is selected in the navigation display. 115 116 CHAPTER 8. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: STANDARDS & PROGRAMS Edit Standard The selected standard must have been created (copied from another standard) by the current user or by one within the authority of the current user. The basic standards included with ALEKS and programs created by users with independent authority cannot be changed, but they can be copied and the copies changed. A standard is defined by designating its name, source (authority), and an optional id number. The “Enabled” button must be selected if the standard is intended for use. Edit Program This will open the selected program for modification in the Program Editor (See Sec. 8.4). The selected program must have been created (copied from another program) by the current user or by one within the authority of the current user. Programs belonging to the basic standards included with ALEKS and programs created by users with independent authority cannot be changed, but they can be copied and the copies changed. Copy/New Standard If a standard is selected, this will make a copy of that standard, usually for the purpose of establishing a new one based on it. If no standard is selected, it creates a new, empty one. Copy/New Program If a program is selected, this will make a copy of that program, usually for the purpose of establishing a new one. If no program is selected, it creates a new, empty one. If a new standard has been created, the new program will be placed here. Drag and drop. The programs may be copied between folders by dragging and dropping them. Simply select the names of programs to be copied in the righthand side of the directories window and drag them to the target folder on the left. You will see the target folder become highlighted when the program is ready to “drop.” 8.4 Program Editor In order to make changes to programs that have been copied, users must select the new program and click on the “Edit Program” button (or double-click on the icon for that program). This gives access to the ALEKS Program Editor for that program. Although the Program Editor is always entered under the heading “Standards & Programs,” it has its own, distinctive interface appearing beneath the “Standards & Programs” directory. The Program Editor displays items for the given subject, organized in folders by general topic. To see items you must open all folders in which they are contained. Items are labeled by name and topic, and indicate whether or not they belong to the current 8.4. PROGRAM EDITOR Figure 8.2: The Program Editor (Advanced Teacher Module) program by a checkmark (Fig. 8.2). If a new program is created by copying another program, precisely the same items are selected in it as in the original. If the program is created from scratch, no items in it are selected. NOTE. If a folder is marked with a large checkmark, this means that all items in that folder currently belong to the program. A small checkmark means that some of the items in that folder belong to the program. No checkmark means no items in that folder belong to the program. Clicking on the tiny “x” in the upper right-hand corner of the directory window creates a single window and makes it possible to view all the items at once (click on “Open All”). 8.4.1 Fields The following fields appear above and below the editor display, and should be filled in as needed in creating or editing a program. Standard The standard to which this program belongs. 117 118 CHAPTER 8. ADVANCED TEACHER MODULE: STANDARDS & PROGRAMS Status Should be set to “enabled” if the program is to be available for use. Parser The name of the person creating or modifying the program (and so responsible for selection of items). To parse in this sense means to establish functional relationships between all elements of a sequence; the parser is making all items for the subject either members or nonmembers of the program. id Optional identification number. 8.4.2 Buttons The following buttons also appear adjacent to the editor display. Open All Shows all folders in the editor display. This gives a complete picture of the topical structure of the subject matter. Undo Undoes the most recent editing action (the addition or removal of an item). 8.4.3 Using the Program Editor To define a program, the teacher must first ascertain which of the items in the complete list of items making up the subject matter are to belong to this program. This should be a thoughtful decision, usually made within an appropriate institutional framework. If a particular source is used for defining a program, the source should be recorded in the standard containing the new program, and should be documented externally as justification for the decision to adopt the given program. If the class is part of a sequence, the programs for the other classes in this sequence will normally be defined together with it as part of a single progression. Once the list of items to be included has been established, the teacher responsible for editing the program examines each of the displayed items. There should be a checkmark before each item to be included, and no checkmark before items that are not to be included. A checkmark is added or removed by clicking once on the checkbox. Following this, click on the “Save” button to record the program. NOTE. ALEKS always maintains the coherence of its programs; any ALEKS program must contain all of the items within the domain needed to learn the items it contains. If an item being added to the program has prerequisite items not belonging to the program, these will be automatically added as well; conversely, if an item being removed from the program is a prerequisite item for some items presently in the program, these will also be removed. The Program Editor warns when this is occurring. Chapter 9 QuickTables QuickTables is a special tool for mastery of Arithmetic facts (Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division), available as part of ALEKS course products for levels 3, 4, and 5 and as an independent ALEKS course product. It uses individually configured, progressive, paced-response drill to develop mastery of the math facts, in a supportive, colorful, child-friendly interactive environment. Among many other features, it contains a series of games which the students “earn” through the progress that they make toward mastery of the various fact tables. 9.1 Setting Up QuickTables for your Class Although ALEKS QuickTables is available at any time for any Level 3, 4, or 5 class, they will not appear for your students until you have completed a simple configuration procedure for the tables that you wish to use. In any ALEKS class at levels 3, 4, and 5, you may select any one or any combination of the following tables: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division. The selection may be changed at any time; for example, you may start out with only Addition, then add Subtraction and the others one at a time as the students work their way through these tables. When you log on to your Teacher account for the first time, you will be prompted to set up QuickTables for your classes. If you elect to skip this, you can return at any time by clicking “Class Admin” in the upper left-hand part of your Teacher account, then “Customize this class,” then “Edit QuickTables.” Scroll down to see the list of tables currently available for this class (Fig. 9.1). To add a table, click the link marked “Add a table.” (Tables currently available can be deleted by clicking the “Delete” button to the right of the table row.) When you add a table, you will be prompted to choose the operation for the table (Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division) and the range of numbers to be used (0-9, 1-9, 0-10, 1-10, 0-12, 1-12). You can make the table available to all students in this class (the default) or only to selected students. 119 120 CHAPTER 9. QUICKTABLES Figure 9.1: QuickTables Configuration Other options that you see on the “Edit QuickTables” page apply to all the tables that you set up in this class. These are: the maximum length of a session (default 15 minutes), maximum number of sessions per week (default 3), maximum number of games per session (default 6), minimum length of session before games become available (default 10 minutes). In most cases, you may wish to leave the defaults; if, however, after some experience using QuickTables with your students, you wish to change them, a range of options are available. Why are there limits on the use of QuickTables by students? From consultation with experienced educators, it is clear that in most cases the students’ use of QuickTables should be limited through the choices mentioned above. This is both to ensure that students for whom QuickTables is only one part of their ALEKS class also spend time working in the “regular” ALEKS class, and also because the benefit of using the type of drill that QuickTables provides is at its greatest when concentrated in relatively short and well-spaced sessions. You will notice that your students’ work in QuickTables is broken up into short “bursts” of drill activity. This is also to maximize benefit by keeping the students’ concentration sharp. High score chart. The final option on this page is to reset the “high score chart” at regular intervals. When your students play the games that QuickTables gives them as 9.2. HOW YOUR STUDENTS USE QUICKTABLES Figure 9.2: QuickTables Learning Display a reward for progress made, they earn numerical scores, which are compared with the scores of other students in the class. The current “high score” is reset at the interval that you choose (default weekly). In effect, this interval establishes a regular period of competition among the students for highest game score, for added motivation. 9.2 How Your Students Use QuickTables When your students log on in an ALEKS class where QuickTables is enabled, they will see tabs on the right-hand part of their top bar for choosing ALEKS or QuickTables. If they click on QuickTables, they will switch into the QuickTables environment. The first time a student enters QuickTables, they are given a brief training in how to type numbers quickly and enter them as answers to the problems they will be given in QuickTables. It is parallel to the Tutorial that students experience when using ALEKS for the first time, but focused exclusively on typing and entering answers smoothly and promptly. Please note that an answer can be “entered” in QuickTables by using either the Enter button or the Space Bar on the keyboard, whichever the student finds more convenient. 121 122 CHAPTER 9. QUICKTABLES Figure 9.3: QuickTables Reporting NOTE. The drill provided by QuickTables is paced, in the sense that students need to enter their answers within a specified “Target Time.” QuickTables seeks to develop quick, “automatic” response to questions on math facts. The actual time period for answering is subject to customization (see below). Following the introductory training, the students take a brief test to determine their current knowledge of the math facts in the particular table being used. (Where there is more than one table, a test will be taken for each new table.) This is parallel to the Assessment taken in regular ALEKS. When the student completes the test, the color-keyed Learning Display is presented, showing them their current knowledge of the table and permitting them to choose how they will work toward complete mastery of the table facts (Fig. 9.2). This display has a function similar to that of the pie chart in regular ALEKS. To choose a math fact to work on, the student clicks on the corresponding cell in the table. If the student simply presses Enter or the Space Bar, a fact will be chosen from those available. There is a brief introduction to the fact, and then a paced drill sequence in which review of previously-learned facts is mixed in with reinforcement of the new fact. Sequences are kept short so that the student’s concentration remains high. If there is a mistake, the drill is halted while the student reenters the correct answer, with help 9.2. HOW YOUR STUDENTS USE QUICKTABLES Figure 9.4: QuickTables Advanced Options from QuickTables; also, if the student takes too long in answering, there is a similar halt while the student catches up with the drill. Once the student shows good knowledge of the new fact, there is a pause before the next cycle of learning. As the student progresses in mastery of new facts, the colors in the table flow across to show the changing area of mastery. This provides the student with direct, tangible evidence of progress, building the student’s motivation. At the same time, the thermometer graphic to the right of the table also indicates the percentage of the table contents that the student has worked through. Gold stars next to the thermometer indicate levels of progress where new games become available to the student. Students can click on the Games button in the top bar to take a break from drill and play any of the games that they have earned, subject to the limits chosen by the teacher (see above). The games provided in QuickTables are designed to reinforce the students’ knowledge of the math facts that they have just learned. 123 124 CHAPTER 9. QUICKTABLES Figure 9.5: QuickTables Worksheets 9.3 Reporting your Students’ Progress in QuickTables The Report for QuickTables appears as an option under Reporting for any class where QuickTables has been enabled. (Click “Reporting” in the left-hand margin, then “QuickTables,”, then the tab for the table whose report you would like to see (e.g., “Addition”). The Reporting view for QuickTables shows, for each student, the Target Time (how long the student has to answer problems), the date they started in QuickTables, the last login date, and the total hours spent in QuickTables (Fig. 9.3). Then it shows a bar graph; the bar graph displays percent mastery of the table contents in blue for the most recent assessment, with an additional segment in green showing what was added since the last assessment (blue plus green equals the student’s total current mastery). To print the Reporting page, use the ALEKS Print button to upper right; to download its contents in Excel format, use the link just above the tabs at the right-hand margin. To see separate bar graphs for all of your students’ assessments, use the link beneath the report marked “Display old Sessions.” 9.4. ADDITIONAL FEATURES IN QUICKTABLES 9.4 Additional Features in QuickTables By clicking on the ”Edit“ button at the end of a row in the report, it is possible to change the “Target Time” for students’ answers, display the On-Screen Timer, and activate the Keypad for students who may need it. The Keypad allows students to enter answers by clicking with their mouse, rather than using the computer keyboard. There are also checkboxes, at the right-hand end of the row, used to order new assessments or Worksheets for individual students or for the group. QuickTables Worksheets. You can also find options for the use of QuickTables Worksheets under “Taking Actions” (Fig. 9.5). Like other Worksheets in ALEKS, QuickTables Worksheets are individualized to each student’s current progress. It is also possible to produce customized Worksheets on selected facts from the tables. 125 126 CHAPTER 9. QUICKTABLES Chapter 10 Teaching with ALEKS 10.1 The ALEKS Educational Paradigm ALEKS is based on the realization that students learn math in different ways, at differing speeds. Starting from an accurate assessment of their current knowledge, students in ALEKS are only offered what they have shown themselves ready to learn. They therefore experience less frustration (from material that is too hard for them) and boredom (from material that is too easy for them). Learning is more efficient and more rapid. Students have “ownership” of their learning process, and grow in confidence and independence. If a student forgets what was once learned, ALEKS smoothly and efficiently guides the student through all necessary review and reinforcement. The student will not be “lost.” With time and persistence, every ALEKS student will progress toward mastery; this progress will be clearly visible to both student and teacher. It is normal for students to be in disparate knowledge states; this would be the case in any event, but ALEKS puts this information clearly at the teacher’s disposal. The relative mastery attained by students appears clearly from the “Learning Progress Since Latest Assessment” Report in the Teacher Module. ALEKS does not require the students to progress as a unified group. ALEKS will permit a student to work on any topic in the category “ready to learn,” a well-chosen list of topics which the student has not yet learned, but has demonstrated (within ALEKS) the readiness to begin learning. Students using ALEKS will experience new independence in learning, to which some may be unaccustomed. Many will find this difference exhilarating. Teachers also may find different opportunities for optimizing their role in the learning process, with a greatly expanded ability to accurately monitor and effectively promote their students’ learning. The role of the teacher is critical in providing structure, support, and reward for the students’ effective use of ALEKS. If ALEKS is used properly, the teacher’s scope for individual coaching and small-group instruction will be greatly expanded, as will the freedom to teach a broader and richer math culture (to some or all students, time permitting). 127 128 CHAPTER 10. TEACHING WITH ALEKS In other words, ALEKS turns the teacher from a footsoldier in the trenches into a field commander, possessed of powerful resources, surveying a broad landscape of information, able to make effective strategic decisions. The point is that ALEKS puts the teacher in command; among other things, the teacher can take more or less of ALEKS, give it a greater or lesser position among other class requirements and activities. Various styles of use are possible. The following should be understood as mere suggestions, designed to give teachers a sense of the possibilities offered by ALEKS’s substantial library of tools. 10.2 The Teacher and ALEKS Not every way of using ALEKS involves supervised classroom sessions. When this is sensible, however, it provides a new dimension to the students’ learning. The teacher in an ALEKS class need not be collecting, correcting, or distributing papers, struggling with discipline issues, organizing groups, managing materials, giving instructions, or supervising activities. The teacher in an ALEKS class may be just as busy teaching mathematics to individual learners: getting one student started on a new topic, checking another student’s work, responding to questions, suggesting alternate methods and explanations, making or reinforcing connections among concepts, congratulating those who “add an item to their pie.” ALEKS provides comprehensive support to the student in every phase of its use; yet the teacher will find that the additional direct support given this way is unexpectedly welcome and productive. Suddenly the relation of teacher and student is based on knowledge and discovery, not management and sanction. No one is “behind” in ALEKS; setbacks are readily addressed and overcome; every student can expect to make progress and be recognized. It is important, especially in the early stages of an ALEKS class, that the teacher be generous in recognizing student progress. Students need to understand that when they add an item to their pie, or show progress in a new assessment, it is an achievement, and the proper use of ALEKS. Soon this will become second nature and learning will be its own motivation. At the same time, formal rewards for the effective use of ALEKS need to be built into the class structure and made clear from the outset (See Sec. 10.3.). Students will be assessed at the beginning of their use of ALEKS (following Registration and the Tutorial), and at regular intervals thereafter. The teacher does not need to supervise all ALEKS assessments; normally, students will be using ALEKS outside as well as in the lab or classroom, and taking assessments at various times and locations. Once the students realize that the purpose of the ALEKS assessment is to provide appropriate material in the Learning Mode, there will be little reason to get help, use the textbook or calculator inappropriately, or in any other way achieve incorrect assessment results. We recommend that the initial assessment be supervised. The students may need assistance in their first use of the system, they will need to be reassured that the assessment is not for a grade, and it is important that the results of this initial assessment 10.3. PLANNING THE ALEKS CLASS be valid, so that that the students’ work in the Learning Mode be productive from the start. For the teacher’s own information, other supervised assessments may also be held at regular intervals to provide accurate “snapshots” of overall progress by the class (See Sec. 10.11). We suggest that such supervised assessments be scheduled at the midpoint and end of the class. Also, any assessment results which may be used as a component in the students’ grades should, of course, be obtained from assessments performed with the level of supervision required by the educational institution for final exams (See Sec. 10.15). NOTE. In cases where students do not seem to be making adequate progress in ALEKS, the cause may be found in help that the student received on an unsupervised assessment from a person or inappropriately used calculator, skewing the assessment results and leading to inappropriate material in the Learning Mode. 10.3 Planning the ALEKS Class In some ways, planning a class in which ALEKS is to be used is simpler than planning other kinds of classes. The teacher may assume complete freedom in planning lectures, lessons, and assignments, while ALEKS ensures that students can progress toward mastery regardless of their level of preparation. It is neither necessary nor helpful for the teacher to attempt to constrain the interactions of the ALEKS system with individual students. To the extent that students will be working independently in ALEKS, the content of lab classes is provided by their work in ALEKS, and need not be planned separately. Teachers wishing to give their students the greatest possible benefit from using ALEKS, however, can use its features to plan focused small-group instruction from week to week (See Sec. 10.5). At the same time, it is extremely important to make ALEKS an integral part of the class requirements and grading scheme. There is no other single factor which influences the success of students using ALEKS so much as the time that they spend on the system, along with the regularity of their use. This means that the students must be required to spend a suitable amount of time in ALEKS on a weekly basis, say 2-4 hours, that they must be informed of this at the very beginning of the class, and that the teacher must monitor their fulfillment of this obligation. Moreover, the amount of time required must be carefully determined to be reasonable, and in balance with other requirements for the course. The teacher should not simply include an ALEKS requirement without reducing in corresponding measure the other requirements that the students would have had to fulfill without ALEKS. For example, the quantity of homework problems may be reduced, as the students will be solving problems in their ALEKS sessions. In a sense, the ALEKS requirement is stricter than others, since the teacher knows exactly what time the students have spent, and the students will naturally be sensitive to this. With time, students will realize the benefit that they receive from ALEKS, and its effect on their overall grades. At first, however, it will be simply another requirement, one whose communication requires particular thoughtfulness on the teacher’s part. 129 130 CHAPTER 10. TEACHING WITH ALEKS Obviously these are only suggestions, and experienced teachers may well choose approaches that will be more effective with their own students. The underlying idea is that there must be clear, formal support for the use of ALEKS, however that support is best implemented in a particular setting. Many teachers have found that in order for the ALEKS requirement to be meaningful, it may beneficially be made part of the grading system or system of rewards for the class. The simplest approach is to provide a certain number of points toward the final grade for each week that the student fulfills their required hours. It is advisable to reward each week, so that the student does not fall into the expectation that all of the required hours can be done at the end; consistency should be rewarded, along with total hours. If a student falls short of the specified hours during a particular week, that week is not rewarded, but neither is the “deficit” carried forward; the next week begins with a clean slate (the primary concern is regular use of the system; for this reason a surplus is also not carried forward). Proportional rewards are also possible; each hour spent has a point value, up to the required minimum. In order to effectively monitor the students’ use, the teacher should check the hours on the “Learning progress since latest assessment” page (under “Reporting”). This page can be printed out every week for record-keeping. In very rare cases, students will try to fool ALEKS by logging on to their accounts and doing something else; this can be detected by noticing that the number of items gained per hour is far too low (or null). ALEKS will log the student off if there is no activity after a certain amount of time. Teachers can obtain a precise record of a student’s actual work in ALEKS by viewing the student’s Report (“Reporting”/“Report for a single student in this class (pie chart)”), under “Learning Log.” The students’ achievement in ALEKS (as opposed to their use of the system) may also be used as a component in their final grade. For information on how to do this please see Sec. 10.15. 10.4 Preparing Your Students The following considerations may be useful in preparing your students to begin to use ALEKS. Computer Skills Some students who have had little experience with computers may need assistance with the use of the mouse and, in particular, with “scrolling” the window of a web browser. We recommend that you demonstrate these skills to the students before beginning their use of ALEKS. If possible, additional staff should be on hand for the first session to assist the students as necessary. Difficulty of Assessment Questions The ALEKS assessment is always comprehensive in order to achieve the highest degree of accuracy and reliability. In the course of the assessment, some questions 10.5. FOCUSED INSTRUCTION WITH ALEKS may be too easy or too difficult for some students. The students should be told to click the “I haven’t learned this yet” button if a question is completely unfamiliar to them, but otherwise that they should do their best to answer. As the assessment proceeds, the questions will focus more and more closely on the outer limits of the student’s actual knowledge. In Learning Mode (following the assessment), students will be provided only material that they are ideally prepared to learn. Length of Assessments The number of questions asked in an ALEKS assessment varies. Normally an assessment in Arithmetic requires between 15 and 25 questions. Occasionally, the number of questions asked may be greater than this. No Help in Assessments Explain to the students that they will need to use paper and pencil for answering assessment questions, but that no help or collaboration whatsoever is permitted during assessment. If the teacher or anyone else helps the student during assessment, even to the extent of explaining or rephrasing a question, assessment results may be inaccurate and the student’s learning in ALEKS may initially be hindered. Be sure they understand that the purpose of the initial assessment is to give ALEKS a precise, detailed understanding of what a student knows, so as to render learning very efficient by focusing on what the student is ready to learn. It is not a “test” that one can pass or fail. They will not receive a grade on an ALEKS assessment unless the teacher deliberately chooses to use grades. 10.5 Focused Instruction with ALEKS The features of the Teacher Module make it possible to prepare students for specific topics that they are going to work on, and to reinforce and expand on knowledge that students have recently acquired. This involves either guiding lectures or focused instruction to small groups of students based on data obtained from ALEKS. From the teacher’s viewpoint, these are powerful features of ALEKS, and their use constitutes a proactive integration of ALEKS with the class structure. The two kinds of “teaching opportunities” cued by ALEKS come from two types of information maintained by the system for students over the entire time that they use it: the set of items a student is “ready to learn” (or “outer fringe” of the student’s knowledge state), and the set of items most recently learned (“what students can do,” the “highest” topics in the student’s knowledge state, called the “inner fringe”) (See the Teacher’s Guide under “Inner and Outer Fringes of a Knowledge State,” in the chapter “Knowledge Spaces and the Theory Behind ALEKS”). The items “ready to learn” are the topics a student may normally choose to work on in ALEKS; the items recently learned (“what a student can do”) are considered the least secure and most likely to need review or reinforcement. (These items may be made available for review by clicking “Review.”) When the students are logged on to ALEKS these two kinds of information are used automatically to guide and manage their learning. The teacher, 131 132 CHAPTER 10. TEACHING WITH ALEKS however, can also view the inner and outer fringes in a convenient format to plan focused instruction that will parallel, supplement, and enhance the individual work that their students are doing in ALEKS. To find this information for a class, the teacher should enter the Teacher Module and click “Reporting,” the name of the class, then “Average report (pie chart).” The piechart in Average report represents the average student in the given class, and displays the weaknesses and strengths of the class as a whole. To see the outer and inner fringes of the group we need to use options from the “Display mode” menu: “Ready to learn,” and “What students can do.” Suppose we choose the option “Ready to learn (learning)” from the menu “Display Mode.” This will summarize the topics that all of the students in the class are currently ready to learn; the parenthesis “(learning)” indicates that the information is based on their most recent work in the Learning Mode, and so completely current. For each topic the number of students ready to learn that topic appears to the right (e.g., “12 students”); clicking on that phrase displays the students’ names, whereas clicking on “Open All” displays all the students’ names for all of the topics. For each topic-list, there is a link to send a message to precisely those students. The purpose of this analysis is that the teacher may pick one or more topics from the list and schedule small-group sessions preparing the named students to learn them more effectively. Now suppose we choose “What students can do (learning)” from the menu “Display Mode.” Another list of topics will be produced; the students listed for these topics, however, are those who have recently worked on and, at least tentatively, learned the topics. Thus, the teacher can schedule focused sessions with these groups of students to reinforce or expand on material that is fresh in the students’ minds, on which they are likely to have the most questions and ideas. This gives the teacher the possibility of always teaching to students who are ideally prepared. It suggests a mode of teaching to the moment of opportunity, and generalizes individual learning to small groups of learners at specific times; obviously, the data obtained for this purpose from ALEKS on one day will be of considerably less value if used a week later. It may be useful to look at some examples illustrating how these features may be used. If you have not used the ALEKS Teacher Module extensively, it will make more sense as you have more experience using ALEKS as a teaching tool. Example 1: Basic On a Friday evening, the teacher sits down to plan lessons for the following week. He or she logs onto ALEKS, selects the reporting feature and the name of a class in Arithmetic, and clicks “Average Report.” A pie chart appears showing the average profile of mastery in the class. The “slice” of the pie chart for Whole Numbers is full to about 90 percent; the slices for Fractions, Decimals, and Proportions and Percents are filled much less, ranging between 20 and 40 percent. This indicates that lessons for the week may 10.5. FOCUSED INSTRUCTION WITH ALEKS focus profitably on the most advanced Whole Numbers topics as well as on topics of moderate difficulty in Fractions, Decimals, and Proportions and Percents. Example 2: Intermediate On a weekend afternoon, the teacher logs on to ALEKS, clicks “Reporting,” then the name of a class in Arithmetic, and then “Average report (pie chart).” After a look at the pie chart, the teacher selects “Ready to learn (learning)” from the “Display Mode” menu, and clicks “OK.” When the list of topics appears, the teacher scans this list for items of particular difficulty. There it is! “Ordering Numbers with Exponents” has 16 students currently able to choose this topic from their pie charts. The teacher notes this topic down for class discussion early in the week. With the benefit of some timely preparation, the students can be expected to master this troublesome topic with little or no difficulty. Example 3: Advanced On a Monday morning, the teacher logs on to his or her ALEKS account, clicks “Reporting,” then the name of a class in Algebra 1, and then “Average report (pie chart).” Following this the teacher switches, first, to the option for “Ready to learn (learning)” and clicks the ALEKS Print button. Even if “Open All” was not clicked the page will be displayed with all lists of students’ names displayed. Then, the teacher switches to the option for “What students can do (learning),” and, again, clicks the Print button. With these two printouts in hand, the experience and expertise of the teacher are used to used to plan with this information. Suppose that there is only time in the week’s schedule for two small-group sessions. (The ALEKS class has only one hour in the lab, and ten minutes are set aside to speak with each small group; the remaining 40 minutes are for helping students in the lab.) The teacher will look over the topics with two questions in mind: which topics have the greatest numbers of students, and which are pedagogically most worth discussing. For example, looking at the list of topics “Ready to learn,” the teacher sees “Solving a Linear Equation with Absolute Value: Problem Type 1.” The teacher knows from experience that students have difficulty with the concept, and that they are more successful with it if they have had a chance to review. This topic has 12 students out of 30 in the class. The teacher uses the message feature to send a note to these students, asking them to meet in the front of the room at the beginning of the lab; the students will receive this note the next time they log on to ALEKS, no later than the beginning of that lab. Looking over the list of topics “What students can do,” the teacher sees “Marking a point in the coordinate plane,” with 10 students. Although the number of students is less than for other topics, this one seems to the teacher richer in its content of mathematical culture than the others. Students who have just worked on this topic are using the coordinate plane for the first time, and they are ripe for an introduction to the vast areas of mathematical thought for which it opens the door. Thus this is chosen as the second topic, and a second message is sent to these students, to meet at the front of the room, ten minutes into the lab. 133 134 CHAPTER 10. TEACHING WITH ALEKS 10.6 Models of Classroom Integration There are numerous ways in which ALEKS can be and is used in concrete educational situations. 1. Supervised Math Lab. Expert supervision can be provided for the students’ use of ALEKS in regularly scheduled math lab periods, whether or not these are part of a conventional class structure. Students benefit from the direct coaching and assistance of qualified teachers in the course of their work with ALEKS. 2. Math Lab in Structured Course. The supervised math lab may be part of a structure of class meetings, combined with conventional and lecture-style classes. The teacher in such a setting need not gear the sequence of topics covered in classes in any way with what the students are doing in ALEKS; the students’ independent work in ALEKS will increasingly benefit their performance on quizzes and tests, as well as their understanding of lectures, as the class progresses. ALEKS is not designed to “teach to the test,” although experience has shown that students’ performance on comprehensive tests improves dramatically when they have worked with ALEKS over time. 3. Small-Group Instruction. The recommended use of ALEKS in a classroom setting makes use of the detailed analysis of individual student knowledge provided through the Class Report page to tailor the lectures to the skills of students. 4. Self-Paced Learning. In this scenario students may use the school computer lab on their own, with only informal supervision. ALEKS is used in this case much as it is for distance learning, except that students have the opportunity for closer consultation with the instructor. 5. Distance Learning. ALEKS is used with great independence by students who may never enter the physical classroom, or may enter only on a few occasions for orientation and supervised assessments. ALEKS provides a range of features for communication between teacher and student, as well as powerful facilities for the monitoring and evaluation of student work. Regardless of which approach is used, you can derive more benefit from ALEKS though monitoring the students’ use of ALEKS and communicating with them, whether in direct contact, by email, or by messages through the ALEKS system. As discussed above, we recommend that a certain number of hours in ALEKS each week be required (See Sec. 10.2); this should be made clear from the start as part of the published course syllabus and rewarded appropriately through the grading scheme. Students’ progress in ALEKS should be recognized and reinforced early on by informal, personal praise; conversely, students who do not seem to make adequate progress should be contacted promptly, the cause of their difficulty determined and remedied. The following sections of this chapter provide more information on these issues affecting the classroom use and integration of ALEKS. 10.7. MONITORING STUDENT USE 10.7 Monitoring Student Use In the day-to-day use of ALEKS by a class, a principal concern of the teacher is to monitor that students are using the system with the required regularity and for at least the minimum required amount of time. The most convenient place to find this information is the “Learning progress since latest assessment page” (under “Reporting”). Each student’s name is displayed on this page with the total number of hours that student has spent logged on to the system. Students can see this same total in their own accounts by using the button “Report.” It is also important that critical assessments throughout the class be supervised by the teacher, to ensure that valid results are received (See Sec. 10.2). 10.8 Monitoring the Progress of a Class The teacher can also use the bar graphs to see how close each student is to mastery of the subject matter on the Learning Progress Since Latest Assessment page. It should be kept in mind that the bar graphs displayed on this page show only the students’ achievement as of their last assessment (in blue) and any progress made in the Learning Mode since that assessment (in green). For a more panoramic view of the progress made by a group, select the “Overall progress in assessment” report. This displays the difference between the students’ knowledge as of their first assessment and that demonstrated on their most recent assessment. To see each of the assessments for a given student, with that student’s progress subsequent to each assessment in the Learning Mode, the teacher should view the page “Progress report for a single student in this class” for the student. 10.9 Monitoring Individual Progress On the page “Progress report for a single student in this class” there is a line for each assessment taken by a particular student, with bar graphs showing mastery as of that assessment and subsequent progress made in the Learning Mode. The initial assessment is shown in the bottom line, with later assessments “stacked” upward. By following progression from earlier to later assessments, the teacher can see very clearly how a student is progressing toward mastery of the subject matter. Caution should be exercised in interpreting this information. Students vary widely both in the smoothness and in the speed with which they master material. Progress made in the Learning Mode (green bar) is not always immediately reflected in the student’s level of mastery on a subsequent assessment. Some students progress more quickly in assessment than in the Learning Mode. In such cases the “new” blue line is further ahead than the green line just below it. On the other hand, many students make faster 135 136 CHAPTER 10. TEACHING WITH ALEKS progress in the Learning Mode than in assessment. In such cases the “new” blue line lags behind the green line below it. It is very common for a student to master the entire subject matter two or more times in the Learning Mode before that mastery is finally confirmed in an assessment. None of these situations is unusual. Part of the power of the ALEKS system is that it does not expect students to behave like machines, but makes allowance for a robust and unpredictable “human factor.” NOTE. In cases where a student moves backward in his or her mastery, the teacher should make individual contact with the student. This student may be experiencing a personal problem, there may have been third-party help on an initial assessment, or there may be other external factors affecting the situation. 10.10 Moving a Student to a New Class A student subscription to ALEKS entitles the student to work through as many subjects in the sequence as the student masters during the subscription period. When a student completes the objectives of a class, ALEKS will allow the student to continue until the subject-matter is exhausted. At this point the student should be moved to a more advanced class. For example, when a student completes the subject matter for a class whose program corresponds to Arithmetic, the teacher should unenroll that student from Arithmetic in ALEKS and reenroll the student in a new class whose topic is set to Algebra. If no such class exists, it should be created so that the student is not prevented from making further progress. 10.11 Ordering Assessments Following the initial assessment (which should be taken under the teacher’s supervision), the ALEKS system will automatically schedule any other assessments needed for correctly informing and guiding a student’s progress. The instructor, however, can order an individual or group assessment at any time. It is a good practice for the teacher to schedule supervised assessments at regular intervals (interim and end of the class), as “snapshots” of overall class achievement. Assessments may be ordered more frequently if the teacher feels that there has been third-party help on some automatic assessments, producing invalid results. 10.12 Independent Study and Distance Learning The ALEKS system is well suited to use in an independent study or distance learning context. ALEKS is self-contained and adaptable to any program or class materials. Students using ALEKS under these circumstances know exactly what the class goals 10.13. THE ALEKS KNOWLEDGE STRUCTURE are, where they stand in relation to those goals, and where to find the instructional and practice tools to achieve them. For the teacher administering an independent study or distance learning program, ALEKS solves nearly every problem of management, oversight, evaluation, and communication. All of the information needed to keep track of far-flung independent learners is at the teacher’s fingertips, through the features of the Teacher Module. The internal message system of ALEKS puts the teacher in constant touch with students without dependence on telephone or email communication. 10.13 The ALEKS Knowledge Structure Each ALEKS subject, such as Algebra 1, has a knowledge structure associated with it. The knowledge structure for Algebra 1, for example, is covered by about 300 ALEKS items (or problem types). A knowledge state is a subset of items which may correspond to the knowledge of an actual student (i.e., there may be a student who has mastered exactly those items, and no others). A knowledge structure is the family of all the knowledge states that we may encounter for a given subject. An ALEKS structure affects virtually every aspect of ALEKS’s functioning. In the ALEKS assessment mode it enables ALEKS to make inferences from student answers, keeping the ALEKS assessments brief, but uncannily accurate. The structure is also crucial in the ALEKS Learning Mode. Using the structure of Algebra 1, for example, the system knows precisely which items are in the inner fringe and outer fringe of each of the knowledge states in ALEKS for Algebra 1. The items in the outer fringe of a student’s knowledge state are those items that the student is the most ready to learn next. (From a technical standpoint an item is in the outer fringe of a state if adding that item to the state results in a feasible knowledge state.) These items are presented to the student in MyPie when the student moves the mouse pointer over the ALEKS pie chart. Similarly, an item in the inner fringe of a student’s state is an item either recently learned or one whose mastery by the student might be shaky. (Technically, an item is in the inner fringe of a state if removing that item from the state results in another feasible knowledge state.) They are presented to the student when the student is having difficulty in the ALEKS Learning Mode and during ALEKS review. An additional benefit of the proliferation of connections among items in ALEKS is its extreme flexibility from the students’ viewpoint: for any particular topic, there is a vast number of possible approaches, or learning paths, which may lead students to mastery of that topic. This flexibility does not imply, however, that any order is possible. Each learning path leading to a particular topic must contain, at a minimum, the items which are “below” such topic in the ALEKS structure. That is, we may say that the more “advanced,” or “highest,” topics in an ALEKS structure are those for which the ALEKS system will require the student to learn the largest number of other items before those items will be presented to the student. 137 138 CHAPTER 10. TEACHING WITH ALEKS 10.14 Modification of Programs Teachers do not need to create or modify the program in order to use ALEKS. Every subject has a comprehensive default, which will be in effect without any actions on the teacher’s part. In some cases it may be desirable to modify the program used for a particular group of students. Extensive creation and modification of Standards and Programs is possible in the ALEKS Advanced Teacher Module, depending on the course product used. Please keep in mind the following points regarding the use of programs in ALEKS: A program in ALEKS implies the existence of a knowledge state, that is, a possible configuration of a student’s knowledge, defined as the goal of the class. As such, all items in this “final” knowledge state of the program must be learnable within the program. This is determined in ALEKS by reference to the ALEKS structure (See above, Sec. 10.13). If an item is added to the program in ALEKS, all other items which are “below” that item will also be added. If an item is removed, all other items in the program which are “above” that item in the ALEKS structure will also be removed. The Content Editor warns when this is occurring. Thus it is possible to modify a program in ALEKS only by “trimming” the tree from its branches, not from its roots. ALEKS also provides a facility for creating multiple sets of programs within a single class (See the Teacher’s Guide under “Intermediate Objectives,” in the chapter “Advanced Teacher Module: Results & Progress”). The Intermediate Objectives feature makes it possible to prioritize particular sets of items for particular periods of time, by constraining the choices available to the students. When Intermediate Objectives have been set, students will be guided to these items by the shortest possible path. Items that they are ready to learn, but are not on the shortest path to the Intermediate Objectives, with be “grayed out”; they will appear in the students’ pie charts, but the students will not be able to choose them. 10.15 Learning Rates in ALEKS ALEKS allows teachers to flexibly evaluate and interpret student learning. There are four criteria, which can be used in any combination: percentage of course goals mastered, total hours spent in ALEKS, average items gained per hour of use, and average number of items gained per week of use. Each can be set to “Private,” so that only the teacher sees the evaluations, to “Public,” so that the teacher sees the evaluations for all students, and each student sees their own, or to “Disabled,” so that no one sees them. Detailed instructions on the use of the learning rates feature may be found in the Teacher’s Guide under “Assign Learning Rates,” in the chapter “Advanced Teacher Module: Results & Progress.” 10.15. LEARNING RATES IN ALEKS Caution must be exercised in determining which, if any, of these criteria should be set to “Public,” so that they are seen by the students. For example, if the evaluation for percentage of course goals mastered is set to A for 90 percent, B for 80 percent, C for 70 percent, D for 60 percent, and Failure below that, the students will see these letters in their accounts as long as their percentage mastery is in the ranges given (i.e., D when it is between 60 and 69 percent). This will only make sense when the students are close to finishing the course, and may cause confusion if the grades are made “Public” before then. The same proviso applies to the other kinds of evaluations available through ALEKS. The value of using these evaluations in the “Public” mode may be greatly enhanced if the teacher decides to set a new scale every week, or at other appropriate intervals. This might mean, for example, that A is set to 20 percent for the first week, to 25 percent for the second week, and so forth, with the other evaluations set accordingly. Such a procedure requires more work by the teacher, but it certainly gives the students a more meaningful frame of reference for their progress. Some of the kinds of evaluations in ALEKS may be more useful for the teacher alone than for the students. Such evaluations should be set to “Private.” The evaluation based on average items gained per week, for example, might be set to some minimum value like 3 (in an Algebra class requiring 3 hours of work in ALEKS per week). Now, the teacher would not want to send the message to the students that 3 items gained per week is “Enough,” since many students in the class may be capable of much more. Conversely, a student whose progress falls below this rate might not be helped by the stern notation in their account that their progress is “Not enough”; the reasons for slow progress may be varied. At the same time, a student making slower progress than this should be brought to the teacher’s attention for intervention of some kind. If the evaluation is set to “Private,” the teacher will see the flag “Not enough” appearing next to the names of students whose progress is slower than this, on the Class Progress page, alerting them to the need for special attention. 139 140 CHAPTER 10. TEACHING WITH ALEKS Chapter 11 Knowledge Spaces and the Theory Behind ALEKS 11.1 History Knowledge Space Theory has been under development since 1983 by Professor JeanClaude Falmagne, who is the Chairman and founder of ALEKS Corporation, and other scientists (especially, Jean-Paul Doignon from Belgium) in the United States and Europe. ALEKS is the first computer system to embody Knowledge Space Theory for assessment and teaching. 11.2 Theory An exposition of Knowledge Space Theory is not intended here, nor is one necessary for the purposes of this manual. Knowledge Space Theory is expressed in a mathematical discipline often referred to as “Combinatorics.” The Bibliography contains a number of references for those interested in further details (See Sec. 11.3). What follows here is a brief, intuitive summary introducing certain fundamental terms employed in discussions of ALEKS. 11.2.1 Domain, Items, and Instances An academic discipline such as Arithmetic or Algebra is represented as a particular set of problems or questions that comprehensively embody the knowledge of the discipline. That set is called the domain, and the problems are called items. A symbolic representation of the domain of Arithmetic uses dots standing for items (Fig. 11.1). One of 141 142 CHAPTER 11. KNOWLEDGE SPACES AND THE THEORY BEHIND ALEKS Figure 11.1: Domain of Arithmetic the items, which might be entitled “Word problem with percentages,” is indicated by a line. The problem in the rectangle is an instance of that item. Each item, or problem type, has dozens, sometimes hundreds or thousands, of instances. Full mastery of the domain implies the ability to solve problems corresponding to all the items making up the domain. Determining the set of items that make up the domain is the first step in constructing a “knowledge structure” for that domain. This is done by research in instructional materials and standards and very systematic, painstaking consultation with teachers. Substantial agreement is achieved among expert pedagogues on the choice and definition of items. The set of items finally arrived at and forming the domain must be comprehensive, that is, it must cover all the concepts that are essential in the particular academic discipline. 11.2.2 Knowledge States The knowledge state of a student is represented by the set of items in the domain that he or she is capable of solving under ideal conditions (Fig. 11.2). This means that the student is not working under time pressure, is not impaired by emotional turmoil of any kind, etc. In reality, careless errors may arise. Also, the correct response to a question may occasionally be guessed by a subject lacking any real understanding of the 11.2. THEORY 143 Figure 11.2: Knowledge State question asked. (This will occur very rarely when using the ALEKS system, because multiple choice answers are not used.) In general, an individual’s knowledge state is thus not directly observable, and has to be inferred from the responses to the questions. 11.2.3 Knowledge Structures and Knowledge Spaces It should be intuitively obvious that not all possible subsets of the domain are feasible knowledge states. For instance, every student having mastered “long division” would also have mastered “addition of decimal numbers.” Thus, there is no knowledge state containing the “long division” item that does not also contain the “addition of decimal numbers” item. The collection of all feasible knowledge states is referred to as the knowledge structure. In the current implementation of ALEKS for Arithmetic, the number of feasible knowledge states is approximately 50,000. Thus, the knowledge structure for Arithmetic contains approximately 50,000 knowledge states. In order to assess a student in Arithmetic, ALEKS must find out by efficient questioning which of these 50,000 states the student is in. This large number of states means that there are many possible ways of acquiring knowledge, i.e., many learning paths (Fig. 11.3). In the ALEKS knowledge structure there are literally billions of such learning paths. A “knowledge space” is a particular kind of knowledge structure. As in many real-life applications, “noise” and errors of various sorts often creep in, 144 CHAPTER 11. KNOWLEDGE SPACES AND THE THEORY BEHIND ALEKS Figure 11.3: Learning Path which require the elaboration of a probabilistic theory. The ALEKS System is based on such a probabilistic theory, which makes it capable of recovering elegantly from any misconceptions. For instance, ALEKS is capable of deciding that a student has mastered an item, even though the student has actually made an error when presented with a problem instantiating this item. This is not mysterious: a sensible examiner in an oral exam, observing an error to a question about addition would nevertheless conclude that the student has mastered addition, for example, if that student had given evidence of skillful manipulation of fractions. 11.2.4 Inner and Outer Fringes of a Knowledge State An item that has not yet been mastered by a student may not be immediately learnable by that student. Learning one or more prerequisite items may be necessary. Consider a student in a particular knowledge state K. The set of all items that may be learned immediately by a student in that state K is called the outer fringe of the state K. More precisely, an item is in the outer fringe of the state K if the addition of that item to the state K forms a new, feasible knowledge state (Fig. 11.4). Typically, the outer fringe of a knowledge state will contain between one and several items. Similarly, an item is in the inner fringe of a state K if there is some other knowledge state to which that item may be added to form state K (Fig. 11.5). The inner fringe 11.2. THEORY 145 Figure 11.4: Outer Fringe of a Knowledge State of a state K is thus defined as the set of all items which may have been the last one learned. These two concepts of inner and outer fringes are used in powerful ways in the Learning Mode of the ALEKS system. For example, the system always offers a student problems to solve that are based on items in the outer fringe of his or her state. If ALEKS judges that a student is experiencing difficulties in learning some new item, ALEKS typically reviews the mastery of items in the inner fringe of the student’s state that are also related to the new item to be learned. 11.2.5 Assessment How can ALEKS uncover, by efficient questioning, the particular knowledge state of a student? While the details of ALEKS’s method for achieving such a goal are technical, the guiding intuition is straightforward. At every moment of an assessment, ALEKS chooses a question to be “as informative as possible.” In our context, this means a question which the student has, in the system’s estimate, about a 50 percent chance of getting right. The student’s response (correct or false) determines a change in all the likelihood values: for instance, if the question involved a manipulation of fractions, and the student’s response was correct, then all the knowledge states containing this item would have their likelihood values increased. The specific way the questions are chosen and the likelihood values altered makes it possible for ALEKS to pinpoint the student’s state quite accurately in a relatively short time. In Arithmetic, for example, 146 CHAPTER 11. KNOWLEDGE SPACES AND THE THEORY BEHIND ALEKS Figure 11.5: Inner Fringe of a Knowledge State approximately 15–25 questions often suffice. Finally, it should be noted that the assessment report given to students, teachers, and administrators is a very precise summary of the student’s knowledge state. If the structure is known, the outer fringe and inner fringe together completely define the student’s knowledge state. Internally, the system registers the student’s knowledge or non-knowledge of each item in the domain. A comprehensive treatment of Knowledge Space Theory can be found in Doignon and Falmagne, Knowledge Spaces (Springer-Verlag, 1999). 11.3 Selected Bibliography Albert, D., editor. (1994). Knowledge Structures. Springer Verlag, New York, 1994. Albert, D. and Hockmeyer, C. (1997). Adaptive and dynamic hypertext tutoring systems based on knowledge space theory. In Benedict du Boulay and Riichiro Mizoguchi, editors, Artificial Intelligence in Education: Knowledge and Media in Learning Systems, volume 39 of Frontiers in Artificial Intelligence and Applications, pp. 553-555, Amsterdam, 1997. IOS Press. Albert, D. and Lukas, J., editors. (1999). Knowledge Spaces: Theories, Empirical Research, Applications. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Mahwah, NJ, 1999. Albert, H. P. Bahrick, J.-C. Falmagne, C. Witteveen, G. d’Ydewalle, and M. Toda. 11.3. SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY Representation and assessment of knowledge. (1990) In B. Wilpert, H. Motoaki, and J. Mitsumi, editors, General Psychology and Environmental Psychology, volume 2, pp. 9-98, July 1990. Proceedings of the 22nd International Congress of Applied Psychology. Baumunk, K. and Dowling, C. (1997). Validity of spaces for assessing knowledge about fractions. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 41, 99-105, 1997. Brandt, S., Albert, D., and Hockemeyer, C. (1999). Surmise relations between tests preliminary results of the mathematical modelling. Electronic Notes in Discrete Mathematics, 2, 1999. Cosyn, E. (2002). Coarsening a knowledge structure. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 46, 123-139, 2002. Cosyn, E. and Thiery, N. (2000). A practical procedure to build a knowledge structure. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 44, 383-407, 2000. Degreef, E., Doignon J.-P., Ducamp A., and Falmagne J.-C. (1986). Languages for the assessment of knowledge. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 30, 243-256, 1986. Doignon, J.-P. (1998). Dimensions of chains of relations. Electronic Notes in Discrete Mathematics, 2, 1999. Abstract of a Talk presented at the OSDA98, Amherst, MA, September 1998. Doignon, J.-P. and Falmagne, J.-C. (1985). Spaces for the assessment of knowledge. International Journal of Man-Machine Studies, 23, 175-196, 1985. Doignon, J.-P. and Falmagne, J.-C. (1987). Knowledge assessment: A set theoretical framework. In B. Ganter, R. Wille, and K.E. Wolfe, editors, Beitrage zur Begriffsanalyse: Vortrage der Arbeitstagung Begriffsanalyse, Darmstadt 1986, pp. 129-140, Mannheim, 1987. BI Wissenschaftsverlag. Doignon, J.-P. and Falmagne, J.-C. (1988). Parametrization of knowledge structures. Discrete Applied Mathematics, 21, 87-100, 1988. Doignon, J.-P. and Falmagne, J.-C. (1997). Well-graded families of relations. Discrete Mathematics, 173, 35-44, 1997. Doignon, J.-P. and Falmagne, J.-C. (1999) Knowledge Spaces. Springer-Verlag, 1999. Doignon, J.-P. and Falmagne, J.-C., editors. (1991). Mathematical Psychology: Current Developments. Springer-Verlag, New York, 1991. Dowling, C.E. (1993). Applying the basis of knowledge space for controlling the questioning of an expert. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 37, 21-48, 1993. Dowling, C.E. (1993). On the irredundant construction of knowledge spaces. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 37, 49-62, 1993. Dowling, C. and Hockemeyer, C. (1998). Computing the intersection of knowledge spaces using only their basis. In Dowling, C., Roberts, F., and Theuns, P., editors, Recent Progress in Mathematical Psychology, pp. 133-141. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Ltd., Hillsdale, USA, 1998. 147 148 CHAPTER 11. KNOWLEDGE SPACES AND THE THEORY BEHIND ALEKS Dowling, C. and Hockemeyer, C. (1998). Integrating knowledge spaces obtained by querying different experts. Electronic Notes in Discrete Mathematics, 2, 1999. Abstract of a Talk presented at the OSDA98, Amherst, MA, September 1998. Dowling, C. and Hockemeyer, C. (2001). Automata for the assessment of knowledge. IEEE Transactions on Knowledge and Data Engineering, 13(3), 451-461, 2001. Dowling, C., Hockemeyer, C., and Ludwig, A. (1996). Adaptive assessment and training using the neighbourhood of knowledge states. In Claude Frasson, Gilles Gauthier, and Alan Lesgold, editors, Intelligent Tutoring Systems, volume 1086 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science, pp. 578-586, Berlin, 1996. Springer Verlag. Dowling, C. and Kaluscha, R. (1995). Prerequisite relationships for the adaptive assessment of knowledge. In Jim Greer, editor, Artificial Intelligence in Education, 1995, pp. 43-50, Charlottesville, VA, 1995. Association for the Advancement of Computing in Education (AACE). Dowling, C., Roberts, F., and Theuns, P., editors. (1998). Recent Progress in Mathematical Psychology. Scientific Psychology Series. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Ltd., Hillsdale, USA, 1998. Duntsch, I. and Gediga, G. (1995). Skills and knowledge structures. British Journal of Mathematical and Statistical Psychology, 48, 9-27, 1995. Duntsch, I. and Gediga, G. (1996). On query procedures to build knowledge structures. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 40, 160-168, 1996. Duntsch, I. and Gediga, G. (1998). Knowledge structures and their applications in CALL. In Sake Jager, John Nerbonne, and Arthur van Essen, editors, Language teaching and Language Technology, pp. 177-186. Swets and Zeitlinger, Lisse, 1998. Falmagne, J.-C. (1989). A latent trait theory via stochastic learning theory for a knowledge space. Psychometrika, 54, 283-303, 1989. Falmagne, J.-C. (1989). Probabilistic knowledge spaces: a review. In Roberts, F., editor, Applications of Combinatorics and Graph Theory to the Biological and Social Sciences, volume 17 of IMA, pp. 283-303. Springer Verlag, New York, 1989. Falmagne, J.-C. (1993). Stochastic learning paths in a knowledge structure. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 37, 489-512, 1993. Falmagne, J.-C. (1996). Errata to SLP. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 40, 169174, 1996. Falmagne, J.-C. (1998). ALEKS, an application of knowledge space theory. Electronic Notes in Discrete Mathematics, 2, 1999. Tutorial given at the OSDA98, Amherst, MA, September 1998. Falmagne, J.-C. and Doignon, J.-P. (1988). A class of stochastic procedures for the assessment of knowledge. British Journal of Mathematical and Statistical Psychology, 41, 1-23, 1988. Falmagne, J.-C. and Doignon, J.-P. (1988). A markovian procedure for assessing the state of a system. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 32, 232-258, 1988. 11.3. SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY Falmagne, J.-C. and Doignon, J.-P. (1993). A stochastic theory for system failure assessment. In B. Bouchon-Meunier, L. Valverde, and R.R. Yager, editors, Uncertainty in Intelligent Systems, pp. 431-440. North-Holland, Amsterdam, 1993. Falmagne, J.-C. and Doignon, J.-P. (1997). Stochastic evolution of rationality. Theory and Decision, 43, 107-138, 1997. Falmagne, J.-C. and Doignon, J.-P. (1998). Meshing knowledge structures. In Dowling, C., Roberts, F., and Theuns, P., editors, Recent Progress in Mathematical Psychology, Scientific Psychology Series, pp. 143-153. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Ltd., Hillsdale, USA, 1998. Falmagne, J.-C., Koppen, M., Villano, M., Doignon, J.-P. and Johannesen, L. (1990). Introduction to knowledge spaces: How to build, test and search them. Psychological Review, 97, 201-224, 1990. Fischer, G. and Laming, D., editors. (1994). Contributions to Mathematical Psychology, Psychometrics, and Methodology. Springer–Verlag, New York, 1994. Fries, S. (1997). Empirical validation of a markovian learning model for knowledge structures. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 41, 65-70, 1997. Hockemeyer, C. (1997). Using the basis of a knowledge space for determining the fringe of a knowledge state. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 41, 275-279, 1997. Hockemeyer, C., Albert, D., and Brandt, S. (1998). Surmise relations between courses. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 42, 508, 1998. Abstract of a talk presented at the 29th EMPG meeting, Keele, UK, September 1998. Kambouri, M., Koppen, M., Villano, M. and Falmagne, J.-C. (1991). Knowledge assessment: Tapping human expertise. Irvine Research Unit in Mathematical Behavioral Sciences. University of California, 1991. Kambouri, M., Koppen, M., Villano, M., and Falmagne, J.-C. (1994). Knowledge assessment: tapping human expertise by the QUERY routine. International Journal of Human-Computer-Studies, 40, 119-151, 1994. Koppen, M. (1993). Extracting human expertise for constructing knowledge spaces: An algorithm. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 37, 1-20, 1993. Koppen, M. and Doignon, J.-P. (1990). How to build a knowledge space by querying an expert. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 34, 311-331, 1990. Lakshminarayan, K. and Gilson, F. (1998). An application of a stochastic knowledge structure model. In Dowling, C., Roberts, F., and Theuns, P., editors, Recent Progress in Mathematical Psychology, Scientific Psychology Series, pp. 155-172. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Ltd., Hillsdale, USA, 1998. Lukas, J. and Albert, D. (1993). Knowledge assessment based on skill assignment and psychological task analysis. In Strube, G. and Wender, K., editors, The Cognitive Psychology of Knowledge, volume 101 of Advances in Psychology, pp. 139-160. NorthHolland, Amsterdam, 1993. 149 150 CHAPTER 11. KNOWLEDGE SPACES AND THE THEORY BEHIND ALEKS Muller C. (1989). A procedure for facilitating an expert’s judgments on a set of rules. In Edward E. Roskam, editor, Mathematical Psychology in Progress, pp. 157-170. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1989. Rusch, A. and Wille, R. (1996). Knowledge spaces and formal concept analysis. In Hans-Hermann Bock and Wolfgang Polasek, editors, Data Analysis and Information Systems, Studies in Classification, Data Analysis, and Knowledge Organization, pp. 427-436, Berlin, Germany, 1996. Springer-Verlag. Schrepp, M. (1997). A generalization of knowledge space theory to problems with more than two answer alternatives. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 41, 237-243, 1997. Schrepp, M. (1999). Extracting knowledge structures from observed data. British Journal of Mathematical and Statistical Psychology, 52, 213-224, 1999. Schrepp, M. (1999). On the empirical construction of implications between bi-valued test items. Mathematical Social Sciences, 38, 361-375, 1999. Schrepp, M. (2001). A method for comparing knowledge structures concerning their adequacy. Journal of Mathematical Psychology, 45, 480-496, 2001. Schrepp, M. and Held, T. (1995). A simulation study concerning the effect of errors on the establishment of knowledge spaces by querying experts. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 39, 376-382, 1995. Stefanutti, L. and Albert, D. (2002). Efficient assessment of organizational action based on knowledge space theory. In Klaus Tochtermann and Hermann Maurer, editors, 2nd International Conference on Knowledge Management, Journal of Universal Computer Science, pp. 183-190, 2002. Strube, G. and Wender, K., editors. (1993). The Cognitive Psychology of Knowledge, volume 101 of Advances in Psychology. Elsevier, 1993. Suck, R. (1998). Ordering orders. Mathematical Social Sciences, 36, 91-104, 1998. Suck, R. (1998). The basis of a knowledge space and a generalized interval order. Electronic Notes in Discrete Mathematics, 2, 1999. Suck, R. (1999). A dimension-related metric on the lattice of knowledge spaces. Journal of Mathematical psychology, 43, 394-409, 1999. Taagepera, M., Potter, F., Miller, G., and Lakshminarayan, K. (1997). Mapping students thinking patterns by the use of knowledge space theory. International Journal of Science Education, 19, 283-302, 1997. Theuns, P. (1998). Building a knowledge space via boolean analysis of co-occurrence data. In Dowling, C., Roberts, F., and Theuns, P., editors, Recent Progress in Mathematical Psychology, Scientific Psychology Series, pp. 173-194. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Ltd., Hillsdale, USA, 1998. Villano, M., Falmagne, J.-C., Johannsen, L., and Doignon, J.-P. (1987). Stochastic procedures for assessing an individual’s state of knowledge. In Proceedings of the International Conference on Computer-assisted Learning in Post-Secondary Education, Calgary 1987, pp. 369-371, Calgary, 1987. University of Calgary Press. 11.3. SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY Wille, R. (1998). Formal concept analysis. Electronic Notes in Discrete Mathematics, 2, 1999. Abstract of a Tutorial given at the OSDA98, Amherst, MA, September 1998. Wille, R. (1998). Mathematical support for empirical theory building. Electronic Notes in Discrete Mathematics, 2, 1999. Abstract of a Talk presented at the OSDA98, Amherst, MA, September 1998. 151 152 CHAPTER 11. KNOWLEDGE SPACES AND THE THEORY BEHIND ALEKS Chapter 12 Frequently Asked Questions 12.1 General General questions on ALEKS concern what it is, its purpose, and what it contains. What is ALEKS? ALEKS is the new way to learn math on the World Wide Web. By knowing exactly which math concepts the student has mastered, which are shaky, and which are new but within reach, ALEKS enables the student to work on those concepts the student is most ready to learn. ALEKS is a full-time automated tutor, including explanations, practice and feedback. ALEKS closely interacts with the student, continuously updating its precise map of the student’s knowledge state. ALEKS combines the advantages of one-on-one instruction and evaluation with the convenience of being on-call, on your computer, 24 hours a day, seven days a week. The cost of ALEKS is a small fraction of the cost of a human tutor. What makes ALEKS different? A great many important differences exist between ALEKS and other kinds of “educational software,” including its finely individualized instructional features, easy access over the World Wide Web, its rigorous and comprehensive educational content, and its class-management module for teachers and administrators. A critical difference is the capacity of ALEKS for efficient, precise, comprehensive, and qualitative assessment. This not only makes it a valuable tool for monitoring educational progress, but also enables it to provide students with the material they are most able to learn at a particular time. This means that the students are given neither material that they have already mastered nor material that they are not well suited to work on yet because some prerequisites have yet to be learned. ALEKS is a self-contained learning environment, with complete sets of practice and explanatory units needed for the subjects that it covers. There is an online student mathematics 153 154 CHAPTER 12. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS dictionary accessed by clicking on underlined mathematical terms (hypertext links), and a diagnostic feedback facility that, in many cases, is able to explain the nature of misunderstandings and errors made by students. For teachers, ALEKS offers a complete administrative and monitoring facility through which individual and group progress can be checked, standards established, enrollment managed, and messages exchanged. ALEKS can be configured for use with diverse educational standards. ALEKS is not a game or “edutainment.” It is an automated educational tool with robust, carefully-designed features for both learners and educators. What are the parts or “modules” of ALEKS? The principal “modules” of ALEKS are the Assessment Mode, in which student knowledge is rigorously assessed, the Learning Mode, where students work on mastering specific concepts, the Teacher Module, in which teachers and administrators are able to monitor student progress and carry out administrative functions, and the Administrator Module, which permits management and monitoring of an arbitrary number of separate institutions, such as those making up a school district. There is also a Tutorial (which students take once when first registering with the system), online help, a mathematics Dictionary, graphic display of assessment results and learning progress, and many other features. Why is ALEKS on the Internet? ALEKS is available on the Internet so that a student who has registered with the system can use it from any suitable computer, in a school, at home, or anywhere else. Very little technical preparation is required. All you need is a self-installing, self-maintaining “plugin” obtained directly from the ALEKS website. No disks, CD’s, peripherals, or backup facilities are required. All data is kept on the ALEKS Corporation servers. 12.2 Technical The technical information needed to use ALEKS is minimal. These few questions are all that are likely to come up, even in a large number of users. What are the system requirements for using ALEKS? [Sec. 3.2] The following table presents the technical requirements for ALEKS in summary form: Your browser should be configured with Java enabled. Both Netscape and Internet Explorer usually ship with Java. You can also install Sun Microsystems’ Java® VM, version 1.4.1+, which can be obtained from Sun. Note that any of the kinds of direct connection (cable, ISDN, DSL) that are typical in computer labs are adequate for use with ALEKS. If your computer lab has security safeguards in place, you will need the cooperation of your LAN administrator, system administrator, or lab technician to install the ALEKS plugin. 12.3. THEORY 155 Operating System Processor RAM Memory Browser PC Windows Any 64+ MB Explorer 6.0+, Firefox 1.5+ Screen Resolution 800x600 (1024x768 for Chemistry) Modem Speed 56+ kbps Macintosh MacOS 10.3+ Any 64+ MB Safari, Firefox 1.5+ 800x600 (1024x768 for Chemistry) 56+ kbps Figure 12.1: System Requirements Where can I get more information on ALEKS? How can I try out the system? The ALEKS website provides complete information on the ALEKS system, including a Quick Tour, Free Trial use, licensing, history and theory, and technical support. 12.3 Theory For those interested in looking beneath the surface, these questions concern the principles on the basis of which ALEKS is designed and constructed. What is the theory behind ALEKS? [Chapter 11] [Sec. 11.3] ALEKS is based on a field of Cognitive Science (Mathematical Psychology) called “Knowledge Spaces.” The purpose of research in Knowledge Spaces is to model human knowledge in any subject, using mathematical tools such as Set Theory, Combinatorics, and Markovian Processes, so as to make possible fast and accurate assessment through interactive computer applications. There are numerous scientific publications in the field of Knowledge Spaces dating back to the early 1980’s. A recent, authoritative treatment (with Bibliography) is Doignon & Falmagne, Knowledge Spaces (Springer-Verlag, 1999). What is an “item”? [Sec. 11.2.1] In Knowledge Space theory, an “item” is a concept or skill to be learned, the mastery of which is captured by a “problem type” serving as the basis for specific assessment and practice problems. Thus the item “addition of two-digit numbers without carry” might produce the problem (instance) “What is 25 plus 11?” What is a “domain”? [Sec. 11.2.1] In Knowledge Space theory, a “domain” is the set of all items making up a particular subject matter, such as Arithmetic. A learner is considered to have mastered the domain when that learner can solve problems corresponding to all the items in the domain. 156 CHAPTER 12. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS What is a “knowledge state”? [Sec. 11.2.2] In Knowledge Space theory, a “knowledge state” is the set of items belonging to a domain that a learner has mastered at some point in time. We speak of knowledge states in relation to a particular learner and a particular domain. Obviously, a learner’s knowledge state changes in time, and the goal of learning is that it should eventually include (correspond to) the entire domain. What is the “outer fringe” of a knowledge state? [Sec. 11.2.4] In Knowledge Space theory, a learner’s “outer fringe” is the set of items, any one of which can be added to the current knowledge state, to make a new, feasible knowledge state. These are the items that the student is considered most “ready to learn.” Progress is made from one state to another through one of the items in the first state’s “outer fringe.” What is the “inner fringe” of a knowledge state? [Sec. 11.2.4] In Knowledge Space theory, a learner’s “inner fringe” is the set of items, any one of which can be taken away from the current knowledge state, to make a new, feasible knowledge state. These are the items that the student may have learned recently, and thus whose knowledge might be shaky. What is a “knowledge structure”? What is a “knowledge space”? [Sec. 11.2.3] In Knowledge Space theory, “knowledge structure” or “knowledge space” (the two concepts differ in a technical way) refers to the collection of feasible knowledge states for a particular domain. It is a key point that not all sets of items from the domain (subsets of the domain) are feasible knowledge states. For instance, in mathematics there can be no knowledge state containing the item “finding the square root of an integer” that does not contain the item “addition of two-digit numbers without carry,” since no one will master the first without having mastered the second. How was the structure created? The knowledge structures (or, briefly, “structures”) used by ALEKS are created by analysis of the subject matter and extensive, computer-aided querying of expert teachers. When ALEKS assesses a student, it is actually searching the structure for knowledge states that match the student’s present competence. What is the educational philosophy behind ALEKS? The educational use of ALEKS is not tied to any particular theory of education or knowledge acquisition. A key insight underlying ALEKS is the existence of a vast multiplicity of diverse “learning paths” or sequences of topics by which a field can be mastered. Based on an inventory of knowledge states that numbers in the tens of thousands (for the subjects currently covered by ALEKS) the specialized tools of Knowledge Space theory make it possible for the system to accommodate literally billions of possible individual learning paths implied by the relations among states. ALEKS does not embody a particular philosophy of teaching mathematics; rather, it is compatible with any pedagogical approach. 12.4. ASSESSMENTS & REPORTS 12.4 Assessments & Reports Much of the power of ALEKS comes from its capacity for accurately and efficiently assessing the current state of a learner’s knowledge. What is an ALEKS assessment? [Chapter 4] An assessment by the ALEKS system consists of a sequence of mathematical problems posed to the student. The answers are in the form of mathematical expressions and constructions produced by the system’s input tools (no multiple choice). The student is encouraged to answer “I haven’t learned this yet” where this is appropriate. During an ALEKS assessment, the student is not told whether answers are correct or incorrect. The assessment is adaptive. Each question after the first is chosen on the basis of answers previously submitted. Assessment problems (like practice problems) are algorithmically generated with random numerical values. The length of the assessment is variable, between 15 and 35 questions. There are no time constraints, but many assessments can take less than a half-hour and few more than an hour. Students taking an assessment need to have paper and pencil. Calculators are not permitted in assessments for Arithmetic, but simple calculators without graphing or symbolic functions are permitted for Algebra. A basic calculator is part of ALEKS. No help whatsoever should be given to students taking an assessment, not even rephrasing problems. Outside help can easily lead to false assessment results and hinder subsequent work in the ALEKS Learning Mode. Students are always assessed when they first register with the ALEKS system. It is highly advisable that all assessments from which the teacher uses data in any way (such as for placement) take place under the teacher’s supervision. At a minimum, the initial assessment must be supervised. How does the ALEKS assessment work? [Sec. 11.2.5] In assessing a student’s knowledge, the system is in fact determining which of the feasible knowledge states for that subject corresponds to the student’s current knowledge. The assessment is probabilistic, so that it is not fooled by careless errors. (Lucky guesses are very rare, because multiple choice answers are not used.) Likelihood values (values for the likelihood that the student is in a particular knowledge state) are spread out over the states belonging to the structure. With each correct answer, the likelihood of states containing the item for which a correct answer was given is raised and that of states not containing the item lowered. The reverse occurs for incorrect answers or “I haven’t learned this yet.” At each step of the assessment, the system attempts to choose an item for which it estimates (based on current likelihood values) the student has about a fifty-fifty chance of success; such questions are maximally informative. When the likelihood values of a few states are extremely high and those of all the rest are extremely low (in technical terms, when the entropy of the structure is lower than a certain threshold value), the assessment ends and results are produced. 157 158 CHAPTER 12. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS If a student makes a careless error or lucky guess, this will appear inconsistent with the general tendency of the student’s responses and the system will “probe” that area of knowledge until it is sure. For this reason, inconsistent assessments (often resulting from lack of concentration) may require more questions. How should I interpret the assessment report? [Sec. 4.13] The results of an ALEKS assessment are shown in the form of a colorkeyed pie chart. A pie chart corresponds to a subject matter (domain) or to the curriculum of a particular class. Each slice of the pie corresponds to a general topic. The degree to which the slice is filled in with solid color shows how close the student is to mastering that area. Where classes are being taken in sequence, there may be pie charts showing the previous and/or subsequent classes in that sequence. An extremely important aspect of the pie charts is their indication of what a student is currently most “ready to learn” (that is, the “outer fringe” of the student’s current knowledge state). These items are listed beneath the pie charts in an Assessment Report and are also given through the pie charts themselves. When the mouse pointer is placed over a slice of the pie, a list pops out showing the concepts that the student is most “ready to learn” in that part of the curriculum. Clicking on any of these concepts takes the student into the Learning Mode to work on it. The pie charts are displayed following assessments, after a concept has been worked on in the Learning Mode, and when a student clicks on “MyPie” to change topics. At any given time, a student can only choose to work on concepts that the student is currently most “ready to learn.” This number may vary between two and a few dozen, depending on what part of the structure is involved. 12.5 Learning Mode Students spend by far the greatest part of their time in ALEKS in the Learning Mode. The features of the Learning Mode are designed to provide a maximum of support to the student’s growing mastery of course materials. What is the Learning Mode? [Chapter 5] The Learning Mode in ALEKS contains features to help students practice and master specific mathematical concepts and skills. In the Learning Mode, students are always working on a specific concept that they have chosen and that, in the system’s estimation, they are fully prepared to master. If the learner successfully solves an appropriate number of problems based on that concept, the system will tentatively determine that it has been mastered and offer a new choice of topics. If the student has difficulty, the system will attempt to diagnose and interpret the student’s errors. It will also provide explanations of how to solve problems and definitions of mathematical terms. It may suggest the name of a classmate who can help. If the student is unable to master the concept right now, 12.6. EDUCATIONAL USE or if the student wishes to change topics, a new choice of topics will be offered. After a certain time has been spent in the Learning Mode, or after a certain amount of progress has been made, the student will be reassessed automatically (unless the teacher has already requested a new assessment). What is the relationship between the Assessment Mode and the Learning Mode in ALEKS? The Assessment and Learning Modes work together in a cyclical fashion, beginning with the initial assessment. A student is assessed, and the results of the assessment serve as a basis for the student’s entry into the Learning Mode (the student works on concepts that the assessment showed that student most “ready to learn”). After a certain time in the Learning Mode, during which the results of the previous assessment are tentatively updated according to whether the student masters or fails to master new concepts, the student is reassessed and the cycle begins again. In this sense, ALEKS is an interactive learning system guided and powered by ongoing diagnostic assessment. 12.6 Educational Use ALEKS also provides a full range of features for successful integration into a variety of teaching styles and class plans. What is the best way to use ALEKS with my class? The greatest factor in successful use of ALEKS is regular, structured use, with close monitoring of student progress by the teacher. We recommend scheduling regular lab sessions with ALEKS, totalling a minimum of three hours per week, as part of your class requirements. Not every lab session need be supervised by the teacher, but the initial assessment certainly should be. Any other interim and concluding assessments scheduled specially by the teacher normally should also be supervised. This having been said, there has been successful use of ALEKS in a very wide variety of contexts and structures, including independent study. ALEKS Corporation is happy to consult with teachers on the best way to use ALEKS with their students. Can ALEKS be used with handicapped and learning-disability students? Is ALEKS a remedial tool? ALEKS is designed to help all students who can read sufficiently to understand what it says, and who can use a computer. It has been used successfully with students exhibiting a range of learning disabilities. Students with reading difficulties can also use it, provided that there is someone on hand to help them as needed. The system does not currently contain facilities for audio output. What burden will ALEKS place on our computer lab and Lab Director/LAN Administrator? 159 160 CHAPTER 12. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Normally ALEKS requires very little support from local computer technicians, given the automatic installation and maintenance of the ALEKS plugin. Most of the time, however, the lab administrator will need to assist with installation in order to overcome security obstacles (for excellent reasons, school computer labs tend to prevent students from installing their own software). In a few cases, the presence of a “firewall” or other security measures may require some action on the technician’s part for successful installation. Again, ALEKS Corporation stands ready to assist with problems of this nature. Does ALEKS need to be used with a particular textbook or curriculum? ALEKS is designed to be used with any program, curriculum, or textbook. The system may also be referenced or linked to a textbook or online applications for particular classes. The fundamental idea of the ALEKS system is to allow students to pursue individualized paths to mastery of the subject matter. For this reason teachers may very commonly find their students learning material that has not yet been covered in the class. This should be regarded as a sign of the system’s effective use. Does ALEKS have special features for educators? [Chapters 6, 7, 8] Students’ use of ALEKS and their progress toward mastery can be monitored using the facilities of the Teacher Module. The Teacher Module (called Administrator Module when it includes more than one school) also enables teachers and administrators to establish the programs and standards used by ALEKS, to configure accounts, to find statistics on school district use, and to exchange messages. A teacher or administrator who has been registered with ALEKS enters the Teacher Module immediately upon login. What are Results & Progress? What are Standards & Programs? There are two parts of the Teacher Module, “Results & Progress” and “Standards & Programs.” The former is by far the more commonly used. It contains information on system use and progress by students and groups, as well as all necessary facilities for account and database management. The latter is used strategically, to define the standards and programs that will be used over extended periods of time by schools. Actions taken in “Standards & Programs” should be the outcome of well-considered school district decisions. How does ALEKS define standards and programs? [Chapter 6, 8] In ALEKS, a program is a set of items belonging to a domain that is determined to be the goal for mastery in a particular class. The program is, if not equivalent to the entire domain, is defined by selection of a particular subset of the domain. This is done in the Program Editor by adding and removing checkmarks next to the names of items. A “Standard” in ALEKS is a group of programs considered to constitute a logical, integrated sequence. How can I use ALEKS Corporation Customer Support? [Sec. 13] You can contact ALEKS Corporation using the information in Chapter 10 of this manual. We request that this information not be given to students. 12.6. EDUCATIONAL USE Students should approach their teacher first with any questions or problems regarding the use of ALEKS. Questions the teacher is unable to answer can then be brought to our attention. 161 162 CHAPTER 12. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Chapter 13 Support NOTE. Troubleshooting information is found in Appendix A.11 of this Teacher’s Guide. Most problems can be resolved using this brief reference. Current information on ALEKS is available at the ALEKS website: http://www.aleks.com Technical support and consultation on the effective use of ALEKS is provided to educators by ALEKS Corporation Customer Support. Please contact the support group by email: http://support.aleks.com by telephone: (714) 619-7090 or by fax: (714) 245-7190 NOTE. We ask that students using ALEKS not contact us directly, but approach their teachers first. It is hoped that the information in this Teacher’s Manual will enable teachers to answer many of their students’ questions. We also welcome any and all comments and feedback on ALEKS. Here is our mailing address: ALEKS Corporation Customer Support 15641 Red Hill Avenue, Suite 150 Tustin, CA 92780 163 164 CHAPTER 13. SUPPORT Appendix A ALEKS Student User’s Guide A.1 Preface Welcome to ALEKS! You are about to discover one of the most powerful educational tools available for learning mathematics. Combining advanced learning technology with the flexibility of the Internet, the ALEKS system provides a “smart” interactive tutoring system with unmatched features and capabilities. Richly supplied with illustrations and reference materials, ALEKS constantly challenges you and supplies extensive feedback on what you have accomplished. ALEKS will always help you select the ideal topic to work on now. That way you learn concepts in the order that’s best for you. ALEKS provides individualized, one-on-one instruction that fits your schedule. It is available wherever you access the Web. ALEKS was developed with support from the National Science Foundation. It is based on a field of Mathematical Cognitive Science called “Knowledge Spaces.” The purpose of research in Knowledge Spaces is to model human knowledge of any subject for quick, precise assessment and efficient guided learning in interactive computer programs. The ALEKS system is self-explanatory and includes online instructions and feedback. This booklet contains basic information to help you begin using ALEKS. Teachers using ALEKS with their classes are provided with a Teacher’s Guide containing complete information on the system’s operation. They should be able to answer any questions beyond those dealt with in these pages. NOTE. ALEKS is designed for use without help from a manual. Your teacher will assist you in registering with the system and beginning to use it. If questions arise, or if you want to learn more about ALEKS, use this Guide. It is intended as a convenient and concise reference. Only registered users can keep an account on ALEKS. (Anyone may try the system as a guest.) Two or more persons cannot use the same ALEKS 165 166 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE account. The system will regard them as a single person and give incorrect guidance. A.2 System Requirements The system requirements for ALEKS are such that it can be used on nearly any computer that is connected to the Internet. PC Requirements You can use ALEKS on any PC with a Pentium or equivalent (AMD, etc.) processor. At least 64 MB of RAM are required. Your operating system must be Windows 98 / 2000 / ME / XP / NT4.0 or higher. The following popular web browsers are compatible with ALEKS on PCs: Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher and Firefox 1.5 or higher. Chemistry requires a screen resolution of 1024x768. Macintosh Requirements ALEKS can be used on a PowerMac or iMac with at least 64 MB of RAM and operating system Mac 0S 10.3 or higher. Compatible browsers are Safari and Firefox 1.5 or higher. Chemistry requires a screen resolution of 1024x768. Internet Access ALEKS is used over the World Wide Web. You must have an Internet connection by dial-up modem (at least 28k) or any other kind of access to the Internet (cable, ISDN, DSL, AOL, etc.). A.3 Registration and Installation Before You Begin. In order to register as an ALEKS user you need a Class Code provided by your teacher. When you register with the ALEKS system, your name is entered into the database and records of your progress are kept. If the ALEKS plugin has not been installed on the computer being used for registration, it will be installed automatically as part of this procedure. 1. Go to the ALEKS website by typing in the following address: http://www.aleks.com NOTE. If you are typing this URL by hand, pay careful attention to the spelling “aleks.” Also, the other ALEKS websites you might find using a search engine will not work for you. You will be able to register only at the address given above. For your convenience, add a “Bookmark” or “Favorite” at this location. This is the site where you will log on to your account. A.3. REGISTRATION AND INSTALLATION Figure A.1: The ALEKS Website 2. Click on “SIGN UP NOW” in the upper left-hand corner of the window (Fig. A.1). 3. At the beginning of registration you will be asked for your Class Code. It is provided to you by your teacher. Enter the Class Code in the spaces provided and click on “Continue” (Fig. A.2). 4. Answer the questions to complete your registration. Among other questions, you may be asked to enter your email address. Supplying this information enables your site administrator to help you with problems more quickly. You will also be able to enter your Student ID number. (Both email and Student ID are optional information.) 5. At the end of registration you will be given a Login Name and Password. Write these down and keep them in a safe place. You will need them to return to the system (See Sec. A.6). You can change your Password at any time (See Sec. A.5.5). NOTE. If you do not have a current plugin, one will be installed. Do not interrupt this process until a message appears saying that the installation is complete. Then you will need to quit your Web browser (“Exit,” “Close,” or “Quit” under the “File” menu), open your Web browser again, and go back to the ALEKS website (use your Bookmark/Favorite). NOTE. Your Login Name and Password can be typed with upper- or lower-case letters. Neither may contain spaces or punctuation. If you forget your Password but you did enter your email address in ALEKS, click on the link underneath the Password field on the ALEKS home page (“Did you forget your password?”). 6. You will need to wait for your teacher’s authorization before starting to use your 167 168 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE Figure A.2: Class Code new account. If you need to log off now, you can log back on later using your Login Name and Password. As soon as your teacher authorizes your registration, you will be able to start using ALEKS by beginning the Tutorial. A.4 Tutorial The ALEKS system avoids multiple-choice questions. Most answers are complete mathematical expressions and constructions. After registration, the ALEKS Tutorial will teach you to use the simple tools needed for your class (Fig. A.3). There is plenty of feedback to help you complete it successfully. NOTE. The Tutorial is not intended to teach mathematics. It just trains you to use the ALEKS input tool (called the “Answer Editor”). Online help is also available while you are using ALEKS; just click the “Help” button, which gives you access to the sections of the Tutorial (See Sec. A.5.5). A.5. ASSESSMENTS AND LEARNING Figure A.3: The Answer Editor (Tutorial) A.5 Assessments and Learning A.5.1 Assessments Instruction through ALEKS is guided by precise understanding of your knowledge of the subject. This information is obtained by assessments in which the system asks you to solve a series of problems. (The system’s estimate of your knowledge is also updated when you make progress in the Learning Mode.) Your first assessment occurs immediately after the Registration and Tutorial. NOTE. Your teacher may require that the first assessment be taken under supervision. Don’t try to begin your initial assessment at home until you find out where your teacher wants you to take it. Additional assessments may be scheduled for you by the teacher. These may or may not need to be supervised, depending on the teacher’s preference. The ALEKS system also prompts “automatic” assessments when you have spent a certain amount of time on the system or have made a certain amount of progress. A.5.2 Results Assessment results are presented in the form of a color-coded pie chart. Slices of the pie chart correspond to parts of the program. The relative size of the slices represents the importance of each topic area for the program. The solidly colored part of a slice indicates how close you are to mastering that part of the program. NOTE. You may see more than one pie chart displayed following an assessment when you are progressing through a series of classes or units. (Your knowledge in the previous and/or subsequent units is also displayed.) 169 170 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE Figure A.4: Assessment Report A.5.3 Learning Mode Following the presentation of assessment results, the system will display a pie chart navigation tool (“MyPie”) (Fig. A.4). By placing the mouse pointer over slices of the pie, you can see which concepts you are now most ready to learn. Not all slices will contain concepts at any given time. They may have been mastered already, or work may need to be done in other slices before they become available. The concept you click on becomes your entry into the Learning Mode. The system will help you in seeking to master that concept and “add it to your pie.” A.5.4 Progress in the Learning Mode In the Learning Mode, you are given practice problems based on the chosen topic. In addition, you receive explanations of how to solve this kind of problem and have access to a dictionary of mathematical concepts. Underlined mathematical terms are links to the dictionary. Click on any term to get a complete definition. The system will require a number of correct answers before it assumes that you have mastered the concept. Then it “adds it to your pie.” At this point, a revised pie chart will be shown reflecting your new knowledge. You will be able to choose a new concept to begin. If you make mistakes, more correct answers may be required. If you tire of this topic and wish to choose another, you can click on “MyPie” near the top of the window. This will make you exit the topic and you will return to your pie chart for a new choice. If you make A.6. LOGGING ON TO YOUR ACCOUNT repeated errors on a given concept, the system will conclude that the concept was not mastered. It will offer you a new choice of other concepts. A.5.5 Additional Features All buttons described below are available in the Learning Mode. In the Assessment Mode, only the “Options,” “Exit,” and “Help” buttons are active. Options If you want to change your Password, click on the “Options” button. This page also shows the total number of hours you have spent using ALEKS. Report Any time you wish to look at your assessment reports, click on “Report.” Choose any date from the menu and click “OK.” Dictionary To search the online dictionary of mathematical terms, click “Dictionary.” Review To review past material, use the “Review” button. Worksheet To print out an individualized homework sheet based on your most recent work in ALEKS, use the “Worksheet” button. Quiz To see the results of quizzes you have taken in ALEKS or to begin a quiz assigned to you by your teacher, use the “Quiz” button. Messages Your teacher can send you messages via ALEKS. You see new messages when you log on. You can also check for messages by clicking on the “Message” button. Your teacher can choose to let you reply to messages as well. Help For online help with the use of the Answer Editor, click “Help.” MyPie Clicking “MyPie” gives you a pie chart summarizing your current mastery. You can use this pie chart to choose a new concept. A.6 Logging on to Your Account Here are concise instructions for accessing your ALEKS account. 1. You always log on from the ALEKS website: 171 172 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE http://www.aleks.com Use the “Bookmark” or “Favorite” for this site if you made one (See Sec. A.3). Remember that you may find other ALEKS websites via a search engine, but this is the only one with your account. 2. On the login page, enter your Login Name and Password provided at the time of registration (See Sec. A.3). Be sure to type these correctly, without any spaces or punctuation. 3. If you enter your Login Name and Password correctly, your browser will begin accessing the plugin to start ALEKS. This takes a few seconds. You will then come to the place you left off in your previous ALEKS session, or begin using ALEKS as a first-time user. NOTE. If you forget your Login Name or Password, use the link on the ALEKS home page marked “Did you forget your password?” If you entered an email address at registration time and you remember your Login Name, your Password will be sent to you by email. Otherwise, please contact your teacher. It is a good idea to change your Password to one you will remember easily but is difficult for others to guess (See Sec. A.5.5). A.7 Installation on Additional Machines Before You Begin. Installing ALEKS means installing the ALEKS plugin. This is the software used by your web browser to access and run ALEKS. You can access your ALEKS account from any computer that meets the system requirements and has had the ALEKS plugin installed. You cannot use ALEKS without the ALEKS plugin that is installed over the World Wide Web. 1. Go to the ALEKS website: http://www.aleks.com Add a “Bookmark” or “Favorite” at this location. 2. Use your Login Name and Password to log on (See Sec. A.3). 3. When you log on to ALEKS, the system will automatically check to see if your system is compatible and if you have the most recent version of the ALEKS plugin. If you do not have a current plugin, it will download the plugin and ask your permission to install. After you grant permission, it will install the (new) plugin. Do not interrupt the installation process until a message appears stating that the installation is complete and asks you to restart your browser. You will need to quit your Web browser (“Exit,” “Close,” or “Quit” under the “File” menu), open your Web browser again, and go back to the ALEKS website (use your Bookmark/Favorite). A.8. GUIDELINES FOR EFFECTIVE USE A.8 Guidelines for Effective Use Please take note of the following important suggestions for successful use of ALEKS. Supplementary Materials You should have pencil and paper ready for all assessments and for use in the Learning Mode. Basic calculators should be used only when you are instructed to do so. (A basic calculator is part of ALEKS.) Assessments You should not ask for, nor receive any help during assessments. Not even explanations or rephrasing of problems are permitted. If you receive help, the system will get a wrong idea of what you are most ready to learn, and this will hold up your progress. If you think you don’t know the answer, you should click “I haven’t learned this yet.” (Don’t guess!) Learning Mode You should learn to use the special features of the Learning Mode, especially the explanations and the mathematical dictionary. A button marked “Ask a Friend” may also appear from time to time. Clicking on this button will prompt the system to suggest the name of a classmate who has mastered the concept. Regular Use Nothing is more important to your progress than regular use of the system. Three hours per week is a recommended minimum. A.9 QuickTables QuickTables is a special tool in ALEKS for learning the math facts of Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division. It is available as part of ALEKS classes for Grades 3 through 5, or as a separate class in ALEKS. In classes where QuickTables has been enabled, you can access the tool by clicking on the tab marked “QuickTables” in the upper right-hand corner of your student account. Then, click the round “OK” button under the Welcome message (Fig. A.5). The first time you use QuickTables, you will have a short training session before starting to practice. The purpose of the training is to make sure that you are comfortable typing and entering numbers in the system. There will be a series of quick drills in which you are asked to type numbers that appear on the screen. If you make a mistake, that is no problem; QuickTables will stop to let you correct it before moving on. You can enter the numbers by pressing either your computer’s “Enter” key or the Space bar (the long bar at the bottom of the keyboard). 173 174 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE Figure A.5: ALEKS QuickTables You will need to enter the numbers pretty quickly; QuickTables wants you to learn the math facts so well that you can answer easily and smoothly. If it is easier for you to click numbers on a keypad, this can be turned on for you. After this training, you begin a “test” or assessment of what you know now about the math facts. Do not be anxious about this test; just relax and do your best. The results of the test will tell QuickTables where you should start off in your math facts table. You may have more than one table set up. If so, you will see different tabs on your screen with the names of the tables: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division. Simply click on the tab for the table you wish to work in. You will need to take a brief test when you first start working in any table. Once you finish the test, you will see a colored display that shows all the facts in the table (Fig. A.6). The colors in the cells show whether you have learned that fact, and how well you know it. In general, you will see that the colors fill in through the table diagonally, from the top left corner down. The “hardest” facts are the ones you get to at last, down in the lower right-hand corner. You will have fun filling in this table! Also, to the right of the table is a thermometer that gives your overall percentage of the table. Notice that there are gold stars on the thermometer. Every time you fill in to one of these stars, there will be a new game for you to play. You earn the games by the progress that you make filling in your table. Any time you want to play a game that you have earned, click on the green button marked “Games” at the top of the window. These are fun games that give you extra practice on the math facts that you have been A.10. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Figure A.6: QuickTables Learning Display learning. NOTE. You will only be able to use QuickTables for a certain amount of time on any day, and only a certain number of times per week. These limits are set for the best possible progress in learning and remembering math facts. A.10 Frequently Asked Questions For further information on any of these questions, follow the references provided to other sections of this Guide. What are the rules for taking an assessment in ALEKS? [Sec. A.8] You must have paper and pencil when taking an assessment in ALEKS. A basic calculator should be used only when you are instructed to do so. A basic calculator is part of ALEKS. No help whatsoever is permitted, not even to the extent of rephrasing a problem. During the assessment, you are not told if your answer is right or wrong. In the Learning Mode, however, you are always told if you made a mistake, and often what that mistake was. The assessment is not a test. Its main purpose is to determine what you are most ready to learn and help you make the best progress possible toward mastery. How do I add concepts to my pie? 175 176 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE [Sec. A.5.4] You fill in your pie and achieve mastery in the subject matter by working in the Learning Mode on concepts and skills that the assessment has determined you are most “ready to learn.” When you master a concept in the Learning Mode by successfully solving an appropriate number of problems, you will see that your pie chart has been changed by the addition of that concept. The goal is to fill the pie in completely. Why is it that I mastered all the concepts in the Learning Mode, but my assessment still says I have concepts to learn? In the Learning Mode, you are always working on one concept at a time, whereas assessments are cumulative and evaluate you on everything in the given subject matter. It may be more difficult to show mastery of concepts you have recently worked on, when you are being quizzed on many different topics at the same time. For this reason, your assessment results may not exactly match what you had mastered in the Learning Mode. This is normal and simply means that you should keep working in the system. (Sometimes the opposite also occurs. That is, progress in the assessment turns out to be faster than in the Learning Mode.) Why doesn’t my pie chart show any concepts from a category if I haven’t filled in that category yet? [Sec. A.5.3] You are completely “ready to learn” a set of concepts or skills when you have mastered all the prerequisite concepts or skills that they demand. To take an elementary example, in order to learn “addition of two-digit numbers with carry” you might have to first learn “addition of two-digit numbers without carry” and nothing else. Your pie chart will not offer you concepts to work on if you are not ideally ready to begin learning them, that is, they have prerequisites you have not yet mastered. For this reason, your pie chart may show that you have only mastered 8 out of 10 concepts for a particular slice of the pie (a particular part of the curriculum), but the pie chart says you have no concepts available from that slice to work on. This means that the concepts you have left to master have prerequisites in other areas of the curriculum that you must master first. Keep working in the other slices, and eventually the concepts in that slice will “open up.” What is the difference between “Explain” and “Practice”? When you begin working on a particular concept in the Learning Mode, you will be shown the name of the concept, a sample problem, and a choice between “Practice” and “Explain.” If you think you know how to solve the problem, you can click “Practice.” You will be given a chance to solve the same problem that was initially displayed. If you are not sure, you can click “Explain” to produce an explanation of how to solve the displayed sample problem. At the bottom of the Explanation page you have the “Practice” button, and sometimes other options for more detailed explanations and help. If you click the “Practice” button following an explanation, you are offered a different problem of the same type, not the one whose solution was explained. In order to master A.10. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS the concept and add it to your pie, you must successfully solve a certain number of “Practice” problems. If you wish to choose a new concept, you can click the “MyPie” button on the ALEKS menu bar. You should not use your browser’s “Back” and “Forward” buttons while logged on to ALEKS. Doing so will not help you make progress and may cause temporary software errors. How can I best use the Learning Mode to help me learn? [Sec. A.5.4] In the Learning Mode, you should do your best to solve the problems that are offered to you. You should not lightly change topics or stop before the system tells you that you are done or suggests choosing another concept. You should get to know the features of the Learning Mode, especially the explanations and the mathematical dictionary. The Learning Mode will always tell you if your answer is correct or not. In many cases it will provide information on the kind of error you may have made. You should pay attention to this feedback and be sure to understand it. Keep in mind that ALEKS is always giving you material that, in its estimation, you are ideally ready to learn. It does not offer material you have already mastered, except in the Review mode. To go back to concepts you have already worked on, click the “Review” button on the ALEKS menu bar. How does ALEKS create practice problems? ALEKS creates both Assessment and Practice problems by means of computer algorithms, based on the definition of a particular concept or skill to be mastered. Thus, a particular concept or problem-type may serve as the basis for a very large number of specific problems, each with different numerical values and sometimes (as in the case of applied problems) differing in other ways as well. With ALEKS, you cannot “learn the test” or “teach to the test.” What happens if I don’t learn a concept (or I get tired of working on a concept)? [Sec. A.5.4] You must answer what the system judges to be an appropriate number of Practice problems correctly to add a concept to your pie. If you make mistakes, you must answer more. ALEKS will always tell you when you have mastered the concept. If you wish to stop working on a concept and choose another one, you can click on “MyPie.” It is usually better to master the concept you are working on, unless the system tells you to switch. If you are clearly not making progress, ALEKS will suggest that you work on something else. Why is ALEKS giving me a new assessment? [Sec. A.5.1] New assessments may be prompted automatically by ALEKS when you have spent sufficient time in the Learning Mode or when you have made adequate progress. Your teacher may also request an assessment for you personally, or for everyone in the class. In this case it may be stipulated that the assessment must be taken at school. (If you attempt to work at home when an assessment has been ordered to be done at school, ALEKS will deny access and tell you that you need to log on from school.) 177 178 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE Why do I need to take a Tutorial to use ALEKS? [Sec. A.4] The Tutorial is a brief interactive training program that teaches you to use the ALEKS input tools, or “Answer Editor.” ALEKS avoids multiple-choice questions. It almost always requires that answers be given in the form of numbers, mathematical expressions and geometrical and other constructions. The Answer Editor is a flexible set of tools enabling you to provide such answers. Although the Answer Editor is easy to use, the Tutorial will make sure you are completely proficient with it before beginning the ALEKS system. The Tutorial guides you through every step of learning to use the Answer Editor. What can I do if I make a mistake entering an answer? If you make an error entering an answer with the Answer Editor, you should click on “Undo” to go back one step, or on “Clear” to start over. You can also use the “Backspace” key on your keyboard in the usual way. NOTE. You cannot use “Undo” or the “Back” button on your browser to go back if you have submitted an answer by clicking on “Next.” If you realize that the answer you submitted is incorrect, you should not be concerned; the system will most likely recognize this as a careless error based on your other answers and make allowances for it. What are the icon buttons for? The icon buttons are used to enter mathematical symbols and to create forms for mathematical expressions. In some cases the keyboard equivalents for icon buttons can be used. Why doesn’t anything appear when I type? [Sec. A.11] In order to type input in the Answer Editor, you must first click on a blue box. Each blue box in the input area corresponds to a mathematical expression. When you click on an icon button for a complex expression, it may place more than one blue box in the space, one for each part of the expression. Each blue box must be filled in for a complete expression. For instance, when you click on the “Exponent” icon button, you get two blue boxes. The big one is for entering the base, and a smaller one that is raised and to the right is used to enter the exponent. How do I get help while using ALEKS? [Sec. A.5.5] You can get help using the Answer Editor by clicking the “Help” button on the ALEKS menu bar. Can my teacher or friend help me (or can I use a calculator) in the Learning Mode? [Sec. A.8] Help and collaboration are allowed in the Learning Mode. Keep in mind, however, that if you get too much help, the system will start giving you problems that you are not prepared to solve. As a general rule, you can get help with one Practice problem, but you should solve the others yourself. There should be no help whatsoever on assessments, however. A.10. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS You need paper and pencil for the Learning Mode, just as you did for the assessment. ALEKS provides a calculator when appropriate; when the Calculator button is active, the use of the calculator is permitted (See Sec. A.5.5). Why are some of the words I see underlined? [Sec. A.5.5] Underlined words in the Learning Mode are links to the online mathematical dictionary. You can click on any underlined word to see its definition. You can also access the Dictionary by clicking the “Dictionary” button on the ALEKS menu bar. The Dictionary is not available during assessment. Note that the Dictionary is opened in a new window. When you are finished reading the definition, you can close or “Minimize” the window, and you will see the previous screen. Clicking “Back” on the browser won’t work. What is the “Ask a Friend” button for? [Sec. A.8] The “Ask a Friend” button sometimes appears when you are having difficulty with a particular concept. When you click on the button, the system suggests the name of a classmate who has mastered the concept and may be able to help you. How can I change my Password? [Sec. A.5.5] You can change your Password by clicking the “Options” button on the ALEKS menu bar. How can I review material I have already worked on? [Sec. A.5.5] You can click on the “Review” button to work on material you have already spent time on. How can I see the reports from previous assessments? [Sec. A.5.5] To see any of your assessment reports, click on “Report” (on the ALEKS menu bar). How can I choose a new topic to work on? [Sec. A.5.5] To see your current pie chart and choose a new concept in the Learning Mode, click on “MyPie” (on the ALEKS menu bar), move around on the pie, and choose a new concept in the Learning Mode. How can I print something in ALEKS? [Sec. A.11] To print the contents of the screen, you can click on “Print” in the ALEKS menu bar. This produces a new, printable window (ALEKS output is not normally printable). Depending on your browser, you may also have to click the browser’s “Print” button. When you are done, you can close the new window. What should I do if it’s taking too long for a new page to load (or if the program freezes)? [Sec. A.11] It shouldn’t take more than a few seconds for ALEKS to respond when you click on any button. If you experience delay, freezing, or crashing, your first step is to click on the small “A” button in the upper right corner. If this doesn’t work, you can click your browser’s “Reload” or “Refresh” button. If this doesn’t work, you can close your browser and restart it. In extreme cases, use 179 180 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE Ctrl-Alt-Delete (Cmd-Opt-Esc on Macintosh). You will come back to the exact place you left off after you log back on to ALEKS. How do I exit the ALEKS program? To leave ALEKS, you can click the “Exit” button on the ALEKS menu bar or simply close your browser. ALEKS always remembers where you left off and brings you back to that place. Why do I have to log on to ALEKS? [Sec. A.1] The fact that ALEKS is used over the Internet means that you can access it from your school or from home. As a registered user of ALEKS, you have an account on the server that contains a record of all the work you have done. Your teacher and administrators at your school have access to these records. They can monitor your progress and use of the system as well as carry out administrative functions. Web access also means that there is almost no maintenance or technical preparation required—no disks, CDs, peripherals, or backup procedures. What if I have a question or problem using ALEKS? If you have a question or problem using ALEKS that is not answered here, please contact your teacher. Your teacher has been provided with extensive information on the operation of ALEKS and should be able to answer almost any question you may have. What if I forget my Login Name or Password? If you forget your Login Name or Password, you can use the link on the ALEKS home page marked “Did you forget your password?” If you entered an email address at registration time and you remember your Login Name, the password will be sent to you by email. Otherwise, please contact your teacher. How do I extend or renew my ALEKS account? Wait for your account actually to expire. Don’t worry: your records and progress will not be lost. Obtain the correct Class Code from your teacher. When your account expires, you will be unable to access your account; instead, you will get a message indicating that the account has expired. On this page, click on the left-hand button. (Do not use the right-hand button.) Enter the 10-character course code and other information as prompted. You will now be able to continue using your ALEKS account. A.11 Troubleshooting Difficulties in using ALEKS can very often be resolved by following the suggestions given in this section. Login Not Successful First of all, be careful to type your Login Name and Password correctly, with no spaces or punctuation. Then, be sure you have accessed the correct ALEKS A.11. TROUBLESHOOTING website. There is more than one ALEKS website, and only the one at which you registered contains your account. Use the URL provided in this booklet rather than looking for “aleks” via a search engine. Typed Input Does Not Appear If you have trouble entering numbers or symbols in the Answer Editor, be sure that you have clicked on a blue box and that the pointer is within the answer area (the rectangle containing the blue boxes). NOTE. It is not always possible to use the number keys on your keyboard’s righthand “keypad” (check that “Num Lock” has been pressed). Mixed Number Difficulties The Answer Editor is easy to use. One warning, however: mixed numbers must be entered using the Mixed Number icon, not by entering the whole part and then using the Fraction icon. Freezing and Slow Response If you are logged on to ALEKS and the program is either not responding or taking too long to load a new page, one of the following three actions may help (try them in the order given): 1. click on the small “A” in the upper right-hand corner of the ALEKS window; 2. click on your browser’s “Reload” (or “Refresh”) button; 3. close the browser and log on again (the system will bring you back to where you left off); if you cannot close the browser use Ctrl-Alt-Delete (PC) or CmdOpt-Esc (Macintosh) and end the task (or reboot, if all else fails). Open applications, other than the web browser that you are using to access ALEKS, are another cause of slowness. Closing these applications may correct the problem. If slowness persists, it is most likely due to a problem in the local network. Bring this to the attention of your teacher. Lengthy Assessment It is impossible to know how many questions will be asked in an assessment. The number of questions asked does not reflect your knowledge of the subject matter. It may reflect the consistency of your effort or concentration. Reduction of Pie Chart You may observe a loss of concepts in your pie chart following an assessment. This is not a malfunction in the system, but results from errors made by you on material you had previously seemed to master. Don’t worry: that is the way the system works. In particular, it is not unusual to have a “bad” assessment, one that, for external reasons (bad mood, distractions, etc.), does not reflect your actual knowledge. ALEKS will quickly bring you back to where you belong. Repeated Final Assessments You may need to take more than one final assessment even after you have filled in your pie (in the Learning Mode). This is normal, since mastery is determined by 181 182 APPENDIX A. ALEKS STUDENT USER’S GUIDE the assessment, not by the Learning Mode. The system needs to confirm (in the assessment) that the entire curriculum has been mastered. Printing Problems To print ALEKS output (for instance, an Assessment Report) you must press the ALEKS “Print” button (on the ALEKS menu bar). This opens a new browser window containing the contents of the previous window in the form of a “Print Preview.” When this page has been printed it should be closed to return to the normal ALEKS interface. Appendix B Programs in ALEKS B.1 Mathematics - LV3 Place Value and Money arith066 arith643 arith028 arith060 arith651 arith652 arith077 arith078 arith061 arith660 arith661 Expanded form Expanded form with zeros Numeral translation: Problem type 1 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 Introduction to inequalities Comparing a simple numerical expression with a number Ordering large numbers Rounding: Problem type 1 Rounding: Problem type 2 Finding the value of a collection of coins Finding the value of a collection of bills and coins Addition and Subtraction arith633 arith634 arith635 arith001 arith050 arith630 arith012 arith636 arith007 arith006 Single digit addition with carry Addition of 3 or 4 single-digit numbers Adding a 2-digit number and a 1-digit number with carry Addition without carry Addition with carry Addition with carry to the hundreds place Addition of large numbers Subtracting a 1-digit number from a 2-digit number Subtraction without borrowing Subtraction with borrowing 183 184 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith682 Subtraction with multiple regrouping steps arith637 Subtraction and regrouping with zeros arith613 Word problem using addition or subtraction arith101 Estimating a sum arith102 Estimating a difference arith653 Fact families for addition and subtraction arith655 Introduction to properties of addition alge284 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 1 alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 Multiplication and Division arith008 One-digit multiplication arith679 Multiplication by 10, 100, and 1000 arith675 Understanding multiplication of a one-digit number with a larger number arith003 Multiplication without carry arith004 Multiplication with carry arith632 Multiplication with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 arith639 Using multiplication to find the number of squares arith640 Using addition and multiplication to count the objects on a grid arith641 Multiples: Problem type 1 arith642 Multiples: Problem type 2 arith075 Simple division arith052 Division without carry arith005 Division with carry arith680 Division with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 arith650 Division involving quotients with intermediate zeros arith644 Word problem on quotient and remainder arith614 Basic word problem using multiplication or division arith677 Estimating a product arith678 Estimating a quotient arith645 Introduction to parentheses arith658 Filling in missing operations to make an equation arith654 Fact families for multiplication and division arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication alge683 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 2 alge813 Solving simple equations with multiplication or division arith056 Factors arith646 Even and odd numbers arith647 Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence alge281 Function tables with one-step rules B.1. MATHEMATICS - LV3 Geometry, Measurement, and Graphs geom349 Naming segments, rays, and lines geom358 Introduction to parallel and perpendicular lines geom303 Acute, obtuse, and right angles geom306 Acute, obtuse, and right triangles geom300 Perimeter of a square or a rectangle geom339 Perimeter of a polygon geom019 Area of a square or a rectangle geom354 Volume of a solid made of unit cubes geom348 Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid geom219 Nets of solids geom359 Introduction to congruence geom360 Introduction to similarity geom357 Identifying transformations geom334 Drawing lines of symmetry mstat033 Measuring length to the nearest inch mstat034 Measuring length to the nearest quarter or half inch unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values mstat035 Conversions involving measurements in feet and inches unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values time010 Telling time time008 Reading a calendar unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values time009 Introduction to adding time alge278 Reading a point in quadrant 1 alge279 Plotting a point in quadrant 1 mstat005 Bar graphs for non-numerical data mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat037 Line plots mstat007 Interpreting line graphs mstat042 Venn diagrams with two sets mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event Fractions and Decimals arith623 arith665 arith212 arith666 arith662 arith044 Introduction to fractions Introduction to equivalent fractions Equivalent fractions Introduction to reduced fractions Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions Ordering fractions with same denominator 185 186 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith091 arith618 arith079 arith220 arith608 arith670 arith671 arith624 arith668 arith625 arith669 arith626 arith627 B.2 Ordering fractions with same numerator Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator Product of a unit fraction and a whole number Decimal place value Ordering decimals Introduction to writing a decimal as a fraction Introduction to converting a fraction to a decimal Addition of aligned decimals Addition with money Subtraction of aligned decimals Subtraction with money Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 Mathematics - LV4 Number sense, Addition and Subtraction arith066 arith643 arith028 arith060 arith651 arith077 arith078 arith061 arith633 arith634 arith635 arith001 arith050 arith630 arith012 arith636 arith007 arith006 arith682 arith637 arith613 arith101 arith102 arith653 Expanded form Expanded form with zeros Numeral translation: Problem type 1 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 Introduction to inequalities Ordering large numbers Rounding: Problem type 1 Rounding: Problem type 2 Single digit addition with carry Addition of 3 or 4 single-digit numbers Adding a 2-digit number and a 1-digit number with carry Addition without carry Addition with carry Addition with carry to the hundreds place Addition of large numbers Subtracting a 1-digit number from a 2-digit number Subtraction without borrowing Subtraction with borrowing Subtraction with multiple regrouping steps Subtraction and regrouping with zeros Word problem using addition or subtraction Estimating a sum Estimating a difference Fact families for addition and subtraction B.2. MATHEMATICS - LV4 arith655 Introduction to properties of addition Multiplication and Division arith008 One-digit multiplication arith679 Multiplication by 10, 100, and 1000 arith675 Understanding multiplication of a one-digit number with a larger number arith003 Multiplication without carry arith004 Multiplication with carry arith632 Multiplication with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 arith639 Using multiplication to find the number of squares arith640 Using addition and multiplication to count the objects on a grid arith641 Multiples: Problem type 1 arith642 Multiples: Problem type 2 arith615 Introduction to multiplication of large numbers arith638 Multiplication with trailing zeros: Problem type 2 arith014 Multiplication of large numbers arith075 Simple division arith052 Division without carry arith005 Division with carry arith680 Division with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 arith650 Division involving quotients with intermediate zeros arith644 Word problem on quotient and remainder arith614 Basic word problem using multiplication or division arith649 Division with trailing zeros: Problem type 2 arith023 Word problem using division arith677 Estimating a product arith678 Estimating a quotient arith645 Introduction to parentheses arith681 Introduction to order of operations arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith657 Introduction to the distributive property arith652 Comparing a simple numerical expression with a number arith654 Fact families for multiplication and division arith658 Filling in missing operations to make an equation arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence arith646 Even and odd numbers arith647 Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 arith648 Divisibility rules for 3 and 9 arith056 Factors arith033 Greatest common factor 187 188 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith070 Least common multiple arith034 Prime numbers arith035 Prime number factorization Fractions, Time, and Customary Measurement arith623 Introduction to fractions arith665 Introduction to equivalent fractions arith212 Equivalent fractions arith666 Introduction to reduced fractions arith067 Reduced fraction arith044 Ordering fractions with same denominator arith091 Ordering fractions with same numerator arith092 Ordering fractions arith667 Plotting fractions on a number line arith618 Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator arith664 Introduction to addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators arith230 Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators arith100 Fractional part of a circle arith079 Product of a unit fraction and a whole number arith086 Product of a fraction and a whole number arith662 Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions arith015 Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number arith619 Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction arith215 Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator arith084 Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry arith216 Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing time010 Telling time unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values time008 Reading a calendar time009 Introduction to adding time time006 Adding time time007 Subtracting time mstat033 Measuring length to the nearest inch mstat034 Measuring length to the nearest quarter or half inch mstat035 Conversions involving measurements in feet and inches mstat036 Adding customary units of length unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit006 Customary unit conversion with whole number values, two-step conversion Decimals, Money, and Metric Measurement B.2. MATHEMATICS - LV4 arith660 Finding the value of a collection of coins arith661 Finding the value of a collection of bills and coins arith220 Decimal place value arith221 Rounding decimals arith608 Ordering decimals arith670 Introduction to writing a decimal as a fraction arith087 Converting a decimal to a fraction arith671 Introduction to converting a fraction to a decimal arith672 Introduction to writing a decimal as a mixed number arith624 Addition of aligned decimals arith668 Addition with money arith625 Subtraction of aligned decimals arith669 Subtraction with money arith626 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 arith627 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 arith674 Introduction to percent unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values Geometry geom349 geom358 geom151 geom152 geom303 geom306 geom307 geom001 geom310 geom300 geom339 geom078 geom353 geom019 geom350 geom351 geom340 geom347 geom311 geom354 geom348 geom219 Naming segments, rays, and lines Introduction to parallel and perpendicular lines Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Acute, obtuse, and right angles Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Classifying quadrilaterals Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Perimeter of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a square or a rectangle Distinguishing between area and perimeter Areas of rectangles with the same perimeter Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Introduction to circle: diameter, radius, and chord Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a solid made of unit cubes Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid Nets of solids 189 190 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS geom359 geom360 geom355 geom356 geom357 geom334 Introduction to congruence Introduction to similarity Introduction to translations Introduction to reflections Identifying transformations Drawing lines of symmetry Algebra, Graphs, and Probability mstat004 Histograms for numerical data mstat005 Bar graphs for non-numerical data mstat037 Line plots mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat044 Double bar graphs mstat007 Interpreting line graphs mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set mstat041 Tree diagrams mstat040 Introduction to the counting principle mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event mstat039 Understanding likelihood mstat010 Probability of an event mstat042 Venn diagrams with two sets mstat038 Reading the temperature from a thermometer alge286 Plotting integers on a number line alge284 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 1 alge683 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 2 alge285 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 3 alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge813 Solving simple equations with multiplication or division alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge281 Function tables with one-step rules alge282 Function tables with two-step rules fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 alge278 Reading a point in quadrant 1 alge279 Plotting a point in quadrant 1 alge283 Graphing whole number functions alge280 Graphing a line in quadrant 1 B.3. MATHEMATICS - LV5 B.3 Mathematics - LV5 Whole Numbers arith066 arith643 arith028 arith060 arith633 arith634 arith635 arith001 arith050 arith630 arith012 arith660 arith661 arith636 arith007 arith006 arith682 arith637 arith613 arith641 arith642 arith008 arith679 arith675 arith003 arith004 arith615 arith632 arith638 arith014 arith639 arith640 arith075 arith052 arith005 arith680 arith649 arith650 arith644 arith023 Expanded form Expanded form with zeros Numeral translation: Problem type 1 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 Single digit addition with carry Addition of 3 or 4 single-digit numbers Adding a 2-digit number and a 1-digit number with carry Addition without carry Addition with carry Addition with carry to the hundreds place Addition of large numbers Finding the value of a collection of coins Finding the value of a collection of bills and coins Subtracting a 1-digit number from a 2-digit number Subtraction without borrowing Subtraction with borrowing Subtraction with multiple regrouping steps Subtraction and regrouping with zeros Word problem using addition or subtraction Multiples: Problem type 1 Multiples: Problem type 2 One-digit multiplication Multiplication by 10, 100, and 1000 Understanding multiplication of a one-digit number with a larger number Multiplication without carry Multiplication with carry Introduction to multiplication of large numbers Multiplication with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 Multiplication with trailing zeros: Problem type 2 Multiplication of large numbers Using multiplication to find the number of squares Using addition and multiplication to count the objects on a grid Simple division Division without carry Division with carry Division with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 Division with trailing zeros: Problem type 2 Division involving quotients with intermediate zeros Word problem on quotient and remainder Word problem using division 191 192 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith614 Basic word problem using multiplication or division arith651 Introduction to inequalities arith652 Comparing a simple numerical expression with a number arith077 Ordering large numbers arith078 Rounding: Problem type 1 arith061 Rounding: Problem type 2 arith101 Estimating a sum arith102 Estimating a difference arith677 Estimating a product arith678 Estimating a quotient arith103 Average of two numbers arith645 Introduction to parentheses arith681 Introduction to order of operations arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith646 Even and odd numbers arith647 Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 arith648 Divisibility rules for 3 and 9 arith056 Factors arith034 Prime numbers arith035 Prime number factorization arith033 Greatest common factor arith070 Least common multiple arith240 Word problem with common multiples arith655 Introduction to properties of addition arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication arith657 Introduction to the distributive property arith653 Fact families for addition and subtraction arith654 Fact families for multiplication and division arith658 Filling in missing operations to make an equation alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence Fractions and Proportions arith623 arith663 arith665 arith212 arith666 arith067 arith015 arith619 arith044 Introduction to fractions Introduction to ratios Introduction to equivalent fractions Equivalent fractions Introduction to reduced fractions Reduced fraction Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction Ordering fractions with same denominator B.3. MATHEMATICS - LV5 arith091 Ordering fractions with same numerator arith092 Ordering fractions arith667 Plotting fractions on a number line arith618 Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator arith664 Introduction to addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators arith230 Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators arith100 Fractional part of a circle arith079 Product of a unit fraction and a whole number arith009 Unit fraction multiplication arith086 Product of a fraction and a whole number arith053 Fraction multiplication arith095 Word problem with fractions arith088 The reciprocal of a number arith022 Fraction division arith662 Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions arith215 Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator arith084 Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry arith216 Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing arith085 Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with different denominators arith020 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 1 arith076 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 2 arith068 Mixed number division arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge272 Solving a proportion: Basic arith064 Simple word problem on proportions arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 unit034 Conversion between metric and customary unit systems Decimals and Percents arith220 arith221 arith608 arith609 arith670 arith087 arith671 arith222 arith089 arith672 arith223 arith624 Decimal place value Rounding decimals Ordering decimals Ordering fractions and decimals Introduction to writing a decimal as a fraction Converting a decimal to a fraction Introduction to converting a fraction to a decimal Converting a fraction to a terminating decimal Converting a fraction to a repeating decimal Introduction to writing a decimal as a mixed number Converting a mixed number to a decimal Addition of aligned decimals 193 194 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith668 arith625 arith669 arith626 arith627 arith082 arith017 arith055 arith045 arith628 arith083 arith081 arith019 arith629 arith674 arith226 arith090 arith002 arith069 arith030 arith074 arith232 Addition with money Subtraction of aligned decimals Subtraction with money Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 Multiplication of a decimal by a power of ten Multiplication of a decimal by a whole number Decimal multiplication: Problem type 1 Word problem with powers of ten Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 1 Division of a decimal by a power of ten Division of a decimal by a whole number Decimal division Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 2 Introduction to percent Converting between percentages and decimals Converting a percentage to a fraction Converting a fraction to a percentage Writing a ratio as a percentage Percentage of a whole number Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 Simple interest Geometry and Measurement geom151 geom152 geom303 geom159 geom158 geom349 geom358 geom154 geom306 geom307 geom801 geom001 geom908 geom310 geom532 geom300 geom339 geom078 Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Acute, obtuse, and right angles Constructing congruent angles Constructing an angle bisector Naming segments, rays, and lines Introduction to parallel and perpendicular lines Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Area of a triangle Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 Classifying quadrilaterals Classifying parallelograms Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Sides of polygons having the same perimeter B.3. MATHEMATICS - LV5 geom353 Perimeter of a piecewise rectangular figure geom019 Area of a square or a rectangle geom217 Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area geom350 Distinguishing between area and perimeter geom351 Areas of rectangles with the same perimeter geom340 Area of a piecewise rectangular figure geom022 Area of a parallelogram geom023 Area of a trapezoid geom347 Introduction to circle: diameter, radius, and chord geom016 Circumference of a circle geom802 Circumference and area of a circle geom354 Volume of a solid made of unit cubes geom311 Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism geom090 Volume of a triangular prism geom031 Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism geom345 Surface area of a solid made of unit cubes geom091 Surface area of a triangular prism geom219 Nets of solids geom348 Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid geom359 Introduction to congruence geom360 Introduction to similarity geom037 Similar polygons geom355 Introduction to translations geom356 Introduction to reflections geom357 Identifying transformations geom334 Drawing lines of symmetry mstat033 Measuring length to the nearest inch mstat034 Measuring length to the nearest quarter or half inch mstat035 Conversions involving measurements in feet and inches mstat036 Adding customary units of length unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit006 Customary unit conversion with whole number values, two-step conversion unit007 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values unit008 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values, two-step conversion unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values unit003 Metric distance conversion with decimal values unit004 Metric conversion with decimal values, two-step conversion time010 Telling time time008 Reading a calendar unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values time009 Introduction to adding time time006 Adding time time007 Subtracting time 195 196 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS Algebra and Graphs mstat004 Histograms for numerical data mstat005 Bar graphs for non-numerical data mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat037 Line plots mstat044 Double bar graphs mstat007 Interpreting line graphs stat804 Interpreting circle graphs or pie charts mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean mstat029 How changing a value affects the mean and median mstat025 Finding if a question can be answered by the data mstat041 Tree diagrams mstat040 Introduction to the counting principle stat106 Outcomes and event probability mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event mstat039 Understanding likelihood mstat010 Probability of an event mstat042 Venn diagrams with two sets mstat043 Venn diagrams with three sets mstat038 Reading the temperature from a thermometer alge286 Plotting integers on a number line arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line arith071 Absolute value of a number arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction alge284 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 1 alge683 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 2 alge285 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 3 alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge800 Additive property of equality with decimals alge801 Additive property of equality with fractions alge813 Solving simple equations with multiplication or division alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions B.4. MATHEMATICS - LV6 / ESSENTIAL MATHEMATICS alge803 Using two steps to solve an equation alge281 Function tables with one-step rules alge282 Function tables with two-step rules fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 alge278 Reading a point in quadrant 1 alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge279 Plotting a point in quadrant 1 alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane alge283 Graphing whole number functions alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge280 Graphing a line in quadrant 1 arith233 Introduction to exponents arith683 Powers of 10: Positive exponent arith036 Scientific notation with positive exponent arith016 Square root of a perfect square B.4 Mathematics - LV6 / Essential Mathematics Whole Numbers arith066 arith643 arith028 arith060 arith633 arith634 arith635 arith001 arith050 arith630 arith012 arith660 arith661 arith636 arith007 arith006 arith682 arith637 arith613 arith008 arith679 arith675 Expanded form Expanded form with zeros Numeral translation: Problem type 1 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 Single digit addition with carry Addition of 3 or 4 single-digit numbers Adding a 2-digit number and a 1-digit number with carry Addition without carry Addition with carry Addition with carry to the hundreds place Addition of large numbers Finding the value of a collection of coins Finding the value of a collection of bills and coins Subtracting a 1-digit number from a 2-digit number Subtraction without borrowing Subtraction with borrowing Subtraction with multiple regrouping steps Subtraction and regrouping with zeros Word problem using addition or subtraction One-digit multiplication Multiplication by 10, 100, and 1000 Understanding multiplication of a one-digit number with a larger number 197 198 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith003 arith004 arith615 arith632 arith638 arith014 arith639 arith640 arith641 arith642 arith075 arith052 arith005 arith680 arith649 arith650 arith644 arith023 arith614 arith651 arith652 arith077 arith078 arith061 arith101 arith102 arith677 arith678 arith103 arith645 arith681 arith048 arith051 arith658 arith646 arith647 arith648 arith056 arith034 arith035 arith033 arith070 arith240 arith655 Multiplication without carry Multiplication with carry Introduction to multiplication of large numbers Multiplication with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 Multiplication with trailing zeros: Problem type 2 Multiplication of large numbers Using multiplication to find the number of squares Using addition and multiplication to count the objects on a grid Multiples: Problem type 1 Multiples: Problem type 2 Simple division Division without carry Division with carry Division with trailing zeros: Problem type 1 Division with trailing zeros: Problem type 2 Division involving quotients with intermediate zeros Word problem on quotient and remainder Word problem using division Basic word problem using multiplication or division Introduction to inequalities Comparing a simple numerical expression with a number Ordering large numbers Rounding: Problem type 1 Rounding: Problem type 2 Estimating a sum Estimating a difference Estimating a product Estimating a quotient Average of two numbers Introduction to parentheses Introduction to order of operations Order of operations: Problem type 1 Order of operations: Problem type 2 Filling in missing operations to make an equation Even and odd numbers Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 Divisibility rules for 3 and 9 Factors Prime numbers Prime number factorization Greatest common factor Least common multiple Word problem with common multiples Introduction to properties of addition B.4. MATHEMATICS - LV6 / ESSENTIAL MATHEMATICS arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication arith657 Introduction to the distributive property arith653 Fact families for addition and subtraction arith654 Fact families for multiplication and division alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence Fractions and Decimals arith623 arith665 arith212 arith666 arith067 arith044 arith091 arith092 arith667 arith618 arith664 tors arith230 arith100 arith215 arith088 arith079 arith009 arith086 arith053 arith095 arith022 arith662 arith015 arith619 arith084 arith216 arith085 arith020 arith076 arith068 arith220 arith221 arith608 arith609 Introduction to fractions Introduction to equivalent fractions Equivalent fractions Introduction to reduced fractions Reduced fraction Ordering fractions with same denominator Ordering fractions with same numerator Ordering fractions Plotting fractions on a number line Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator Introduction to addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominaAddition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators Fractional part of a circle Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator The reciprocal of a number Product of a unit fraction and a whole number Unit fraction multiplication Product of a fraction and a whole number Fraction multiplication Word problem with fractions Fraction division Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with different denominators Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 1 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 2 Mixed number division Decimal place value Rounding decimals Ordering decimals Ordering fractions and decimals 199 200 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith670 arith087 arith671 arith222 arith089 arith672 arith223 arith624 arith668 arith625 arith669 arith626 arith627 arith082 arith017 arith055 arith045 arith628 arith083 arith081 arith019 arith629 Introduction to writing a decimal as a fraction Converting a decimal to a fraction Introduction to converting a fraction to a decimal Converting a fraction to a terminating decimal Converting a fraction to a repeating decimal Introduction to writing a decimal as a mixed number Converting a mixed number to a decimal Addition of aligned decimals Addition with money Subtraction of aligned decimals Subtraction with money Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 Multiplication of a decimal by a power of ten Multiplication of a decimal by a whole number Decimal multiplication: Problem type 1 Word problem with powers of ten Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 1 Division of a decimal by a power of ten Division of a decimal by a whole number Decimal division Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 2 Geometry geom151 geom152 geom303 geom039 geom304 geom305 geom159 geom158 geom349 geom358 geom154 geom525 geom306 geom307 geom801 geom001 geom908 geom044 Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Acute, obtuse, and right angles Supplementary and complementary angles Corresponding and alternate angles Supplementary and vertical angles Constructing congruent angles Constructing an angle bisector Naming segments, rays, and lines Introduction to parallel and perpendicular lines Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment Computing distances on the number line Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Area of a triangle Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 Pythagorean Theorem B.4. MATHEMATICS - LV6 / ESSENTIAL MATHEMATICS geom310 geom532 geom078 geom300 geom339 geom019 geom350 geom351 geom217 geom353 geom340 geom022 geom023 geom344 geom347 geom016 geom218 geom802 geom301 geom036 geom302 geom214 geom311 geom354 geom090 geom033 geom035 geom086 geom348 geom031 geom345 geom091 geom034 geom219 geom359 geom360 geom037 geom337 geom355 geom330 geom356 geom332 geom334 geom335 Classifying quadrilaterals Classifying parallelograms Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Area of a square or a rectangle Distinguishing between area and perimeter Areas of rectangles with the same perimeter Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area Perimeter of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a parallelogram Area of a trapezoid Area involving rectangles and triangles Introduction to circle: diameter, radius, and chord Circumference of a circle Finding the radius or the diameter of a circle given its circumference Circumference and area of a circle Perimeter involving rectangles and circles Area between two concentric circles Area involving rectangles and circles Area involving inscribed figures Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a solid made of unit cubes Volume of a triangular prism Volume of a pyramid Volume of a cylinder Volume of a cone Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism Surface area of a solid made of unit cubes Surface area of a triangular prism Surface area of a cylinder Nets of solids Introduction to congruence Introduction to similarity Similar polygons Indirect measurement Introduction to translations Translation of a polygon Introduction to reflections Reflection of a polygon over a vertical or horizontal line Drawing lines of symmetry Rotation of a figure about the origin 201 202 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS geom357 Identifying transformations Measurement and Graphs mstat033 Measuring length to the nearest inch mstat034 Measuring length to the nearest quarter or half inch unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit006 Customary unit conversion with whole number values, two-step conversion unit007 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values unit008 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values, two-step conversion mstat035 Conversions involving measurements in feet and inches mstat036 Adding customary units of length unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values unit003 Metric distance conversion with decimal values unit004 Metric conversion with decimal values, two-step conversion unit034 Conversion between metric and customary unit systems time010 Telling time unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values time008 Reading a calendar time009 Introduction to adding time time006 Adding time time007 Subtracting time arith063 Word problem with clocks mstat004 Histograms for numerical data mstat005 Bar graphs for non-numerical data mstat037 Line plots mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat044 Double bar graphs mstat007 Interpreting line graphs stat804 Interpreting circle graphs or pie charts mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat027 Using back-to-back stem-and-leaf plots to compare data sets mstat006 Box-and-whisker plots mstat014 Random samples and prediction mstat029 How changing a value affects the mean and median stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean mstat025 Finding if a question can be answered by the data Proportions, Percents, and Probability B.4. MATHEMATICS - LV6 / ESSENTIAL MATHEMATICS arith663 Introduction to ratios arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge272 Solving a proportion: Basic arith064 Simple word problem on proportions arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 arith674 Introduction to percent arith226 Converting between percentages and decimals arith090 Converting a percentage to a fraction arith002 Converting a fraction to a percentage arith030 Percentage of a whole number arith069 Writing a ratio as a percentage arith074 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 arith225 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 3 arith232 Simple interest mstat040 Introduction to the counting principle mstat015 Counting Principle mstat008 Permutations mstat009 Combinations stat106 Outcomes and event probability mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event mstat039 Understanding likelihood mstat010 Probability of an event mstat012 Probability of independent events mstat013 Probability of dependent events mstat041 Tree diagrams mstat042 Venn diagrams with two sets mstat043 Venn diagrams with three sets Algebra mstat038 Reading the temperature from a thermometer alge286 Plotting integers on a number line arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line arith071 Absolute value of a number arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction arith231 Integer multiplication and division arith106 Signed fractions addition arith105 Signed fractions multiplication arith234 Signed decimal addition alge001 Integers and rational numbers alge606 Distributive property, simple 203 204 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge607 Combining like terms, basic alge284 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 1 alge683 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 2 alge285 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 3 alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge187 Properties of addition alge188 Properties of real numbers alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge800 Additive property of equality with decimals alge801 Additive property of equality with fractions alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge813 Solving simple equations with multiplication or division alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions alge803 Using two steps to solve an equation alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge015 Writing an inequality alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 alge281 Function tables with one-step rules alge282 Function tables with two-step rules alge283 Graphing whole number functions alge278 Reading a point in quadrant 1 alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge279 Plotting a point in quadrant 1 alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge280 Graphing a line in quadrant 1 alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge263 Interpreting the graphs of two functions arith233 Introduction to exponents arith683 Powers of 10: Positive exponent arith684 Powers of 10: Negative exponent arith036 Scientific notation with positive exponent arith037 Scientific notation with negative exponent arith047 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 arith600 Exponents and order of operations alge004 Evaluation of a polynomial in one variable arith029 Ordering numbers with positive exponents arith016 Square root of a perfect square B.5. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 1 arith602 Estimating a square root B.5 Middle School Math 1 Whole Numbers arith066 Expanded form arith028 Numeral translation: Problem type 1 arith060 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 arith630 Addition with carry to the hundreds place arith012 Addition of large numbers arith006 Subtraction with borrowing arith637 Subtraction and regrouping with zeros arith613 Word problem using addition or subtraction arith004 Multiplication with carry arith615 Introduction to multiplication of large numbers arith014 Multiplication of large numbers arith005 Division with carry arith023 Word problem using division arith614 Basic word problem using multiplication or division arith077 Ordering large numbers arith078 Rounding: Problem type 1 arith061 Rounding: Problem type 2 arith101 Estimating a sum arith102 Estimating a difference arith677 Estimating a product arith678 Estimating a quotient arith681 Introduction to order of operations arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 alge285 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 3 arith647 Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 arith648 Divisibility rules for 3 and 9 arith056 Factors arith034 Prime numbers arith035 Prime number factorization arith033 Greatest common factor arith070 Least common multiple arith240 Word problem with common multiples Fractions and Proportions 205 206 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith623 Introduction to fractions arith665 Introduction to equivalent fractions arith663 Introduction to ratios arith212 Equivalent fractions arith067 Reduced fraction arith667 Plotting fractions on a number line arith044 Ordering fractions with same denominator arith091 Ordering fractions with same numerator arith092 Ordering fractions arith618 Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator arith230 Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators arith100 Fractional part of a circle arith088 The reciprocal of a number arith079 Product of a unit fraction and a whole number arith009 Unit fraction multiplication arith086 Product of a fraction and a whole number arith053 Fraction multiplication arith095 Word problem with fractions arith022 Fraction division arith662 Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions arith015 Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number arith619 Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction arith215 Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator arith084 Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry arith216 Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing arith085 Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with different denominators arith020 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 1 arith076 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 2 arith068 Mixed number division arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge218 Word problem on rates alge272 Solving a proportion: Basic arith064 Simple word problem on proportions arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 Decimals and Percents arith220 arith221 arith608 arith609 arith087 arith222 Decimal place value Rounding decimals Ordering decimals Ordering fractions and decimals Converting a decimal to a fraction Converting a fraction to a terminating decimal B.5. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 1 arith089 Converting a fraction to a repeating decimal arith223 Converting a mixed number to a decimal arith624 Addition of aligned decimals arith625 Subtraction of aligned decimals arith626 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 arith627 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 arith082 Multiplication of a decimal by a power of ten arith017 Multiplication of a decimal by a whole number arith055 Decimal multiplication: Problem type 1 arith045 Word problem with powers of ten arith628 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 1 arith083 Division of a decimal by a power of ten arith081 Division of a decimal by a whole number arith019 Decimal division arith629 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 2 arith674 Introduction to percent arith226 Converting between percentages and decimals arith090 Converting a percentage to a fraction arith002 Converting a fraction to a percentage arith030 Percentage of a whole number arith069 Writing a ratio as a percentage arith074 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 arith031 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 2 arith225 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 3 arith232 Simple interest stat801 Computations from circle graphs stat804 Interpreting circle graphs or pie charts mstat014 Random samples and prediction Measurement, Graphs, and Probability mstat034 Measuring length to the nearest quarter or half inch unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit006 Customary unit conversion with whole number values, two-step conversion unit007 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values unit008 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values, two-step conversion mstat035 Conversions involving measurements in feet and inches unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values unit003 Metric distance conversion with decimal values unit004 Metric conversion with decimal values, two-step conversion unit034 Conversion between metric and customary unit systems unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values 207 208 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS time006 Adding time time007 Subtracting time mstat004 Histograms for numerical data mstat005 Bar graphs for non-numerical data mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat044 Double bar graphs mstat037 Line plots mstat007 Interpreting line graphs mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean mstat029 How changing a value affects the mean and median stat802 Rejecting unreasonable claims based on average statistics mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat027 Using back-to-back stem-and-leaf plots to compare data sets mstat006 Box-and-whisker plots mstat025 Finding if a question can be answered by the data mstat030 Sketching the line of best fit mstat023 Scatterplots and correlation mstat043 Venn diagrams with three sets mstat041 Tree diagrams mstat040 Introduction to the counting principle mstat015 Counting Principle mstat008 Permutations mstat009 Combinations stat106 Outcomes and event probability mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event mstat010 Probability of an event mstat011 Area as probability mstat012 Probability of independent events mstat013 Probability of dependent events Algebra alge286 Plotting integers on a number line arith071 Absolute value of a number arith104 Operations with absolute value arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction arith231 Integer multiplication and division arith234 Signed decimal addition arith047 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 B.5. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 1 alge001 Integers and rational numbers arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line geom525 Computing distances on the number line arith657 Introduction to the distributive property alge606 Distributive property, simple alge607 Combining like terms, basic arith655 Introduction to properties of addition arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication alge187 Properties of addition alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge800 Additive property of equality with decimals alge801 Additive property of equality with fractions alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge266 Additive property of equality: Problem type 3 alge813 Solving simple equations with multiplication or division alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions alge803 Using two steps to solve an equation alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge810 Introduction to algebraic symbol manipulation alge015 Writing an inequality alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 alge282 Function tables with two-step rules fun001 Function tables alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane fun002 Graphing integer functions alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge263 Interpreting the graphs of two functions alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence arith233 Introduction to exponents arith683 Powers of 10: Positive exponent arith036 Scientific notation with positive exponent arith016 Square root of a perfect square arith602 Estimating a square root 209 210 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS Geometry geom349 geom358 geom151 geom152 geom303 geom039 geom304 geom305 geom159 geom158 geom154 geom150 geom157 geom306 geom307 geom801 geom001 geom908 geom044 geom310 geom532 geom078 geom300 geom339 geom019 geom350 geom351 geom217 geom340 geom022 geom023 geom344 geom347 geom016 geom218 geom802 geom301 geom036 geom302 geom214 geom838 geom354 Naming segments, rays, and lines Introduction to parallel and perpendicular lines Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Acute, obtuse, and right angles Supplementary and complementary angles Corresponding and alternate angles Supplementary and vertical angles Constructing congruent angles Constructing an angle bisector Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment Constructing a pair of perpendicular lines Constructing a pair of parallel lines Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Area of a triangle Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 Pythagorean Theorem Classifying quadrilaterals Classifying parallelograms Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Area of a square or a rectangle Distinguishing between area and perimeter Areas of rectangles with the same perimeter Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a parallelogram Area of a trapezoid Area involving rectangles and triangles Introduction to circle: diameter, radius, and chord Circumference of a circle Finding the radius or the diameter of a circle given its circumference Circumference and area of a circle Perimeter involving rectangles and circles Area between two concentric circles Area involving rectangles and circles Area involving inscribed figures Circumference ratios Volume of a solid made of unit cubes B.6. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 2 geom311 geom505 geom090 geom035 geom092 geom348 geom031 geom345 geom091 geom034 geom219 geom359 geom360 geom037 geom357 geom330 geom332 geom334 geom335 B.6 Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a piecewise rectangular prism Volume of a triangular prism Volume of a cylinder Rate of filling of a solid Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism Surface area of a solid made of unit cubes Surface area of a triangular prism Surface area of a cylinder Nets of solids Introduction to congruence Introduction to similarity Similar polygons Identifying transformations Translation of a polygon Reflection of a polygon over a vertical or horizontal line Drawing lines of symmetry Rotation of a figure about the origin Middle School Math 2 Whole Numbers and Integers arith066 arith028 arith060 arith630 arith012 arith006 arith637 arith613 arith004 arith615 arith014 arith005 arith023 arith614 arith077 arith078 arith061 arith101 Expanded form Numeral translation: Problem type 1 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 Addition with carry to the hundreds place Addition of large numbers Subtraction with borrowing Subtraction and regrouping with zeros Word problem using addition or subtraction Multiplication with carry Introduction to multiplication of large numbers Multiplication of large numbers Division with carry Word problem using division Basic word problem using multiplication or division Ordering large numbers Rounding: Problem type 1 Rounding: Problem type 2 Estimating a sum 211 212 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith102 Estimating a difference arith677 Estimating a product arith678 Estimating a quotient arith681 Introduction to order of operations arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith647 Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 arith648 Divisibility rules for 3 and 9 arith056 Factors arith034 Prime numbers arith035 Prime number factorization arith033 Greatest common factor arith070 Least common multiple arith240 Word problem with common multiples alge286 Plotting integers on a number line arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction arith231 Integer multiplication and division arith071 Absolute value of a number arith104 Operations with absolute value Fractions and Proportions arith623 arith665 arith663 arith212 arith067 arith667 arith044 arith091 arith092 arith618 arith230 arith100 arith088 arith079 arith009 arith086 arith053 arith095 arith022 Introduction to fractions Introduction to equivalent fractions Introduction to ratios Equivalent fractions Reduced fraction Plotting fractions on a number line Ordering fractions with same denominator Ordering fractions with same numerator Ordering fractions Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators Fractional part of a circle The reciprocal of a number Product of a unit fraction and a whole number Unit fraction multiplication Product of a fraction and a whole number Fraction multiplication Word problem with fractions Fraction division B.6. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 2 arith662 Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions arith015 Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number arith619 Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction arith215 Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator arith084 Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry arith216 Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing arith085 Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with different denominators arith020 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 1 arith076 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 2 arith068 Mixed number division arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line arith106 Signed fractions addition arith105 Signed fractions multiplication arith047 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 arith600 Exponents and order of operations arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge218 Word problem on rates alge272 Solving a proportion: Basic arith064 Simple word problem on proportions arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 Decimals and Percents arith220 Decimal place value arith221 Rounding decimals arith608 Ordering decimals arith609 Ordering fractions and decimals geom525 Computing distances on the number line arith087 Converting a decimal to a fraction arith222 Converting a fraction to a terminating decimal arith089 Converting a fraction to a repeating decimal arith223 Converting a mixed number to a decimal arith624 Addition of aligned decimals arith625 Subtraction of aligned decimals arith626 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 arith627 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 arith234 Signed decimal addition arith082 Multiplication of a decimal by a power of ten arith017 Multiplication of a decimal by a whole number arith055 Decimal multiplication: Problem type 1 arith045 Word problem with powers of ten arith628 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 1 arith083 Division of a decimal by a power of ten 213 214 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith081 Division of a decimal by a whole number arith019 Decimal division arith629 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 2 arith674 Introduction to percent arith226 Converting between percentages and decimals arith090 Converting a percentage to a fraction arith002 Converting a fraction to a percentage arith030 Percentage of a whole number arith069 Writing a ratio as a percentage arith074 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 arith031 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 2 arith225 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 3 arith232 Simple interest stat801 Computations from circle graphs stat804 Interpreting circle graphs or pie charts mstat014 Random samples and prediction Measurement, Graphs, and Probability mstat034 Measuring length to the nearest quarter or half inch unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit006 Customary unit conversion with whole number values, two-step conversion unit007 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values unit008 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values, two-step conversion mstat035 Conversions involving measurements in feet and inches unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values unit003 Metric distance conversion with decimal values unit004 Metric conversion with decimal values, two-step conversion unit034 Conversion between metric and customary unit systems unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values time006 Adding time time007 Subtracting time mstat004 Histograms for numerical data mstat005 Bar graphs for non-numerical data mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat044 Double bar graphs mstat037 Line plots mstat007 Interpreting line graphs mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean mstat029 How changing a value affects the mean and median B.6. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 2 stat802 Rejecting unreasonable claims based on average statistics mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat027 Using back-to-back stem-and-leaf plots to compare data sets mstat006 Box-and-whisker plots mstat025 Finding if a question can be answered by the data mstat030 Sketching the line of best fit mstat023 Scatterplots and correlation mstat043 Venn diagrams with three sets mstat041 Tree diagrams mstat040 Introduction to the counting principle mstat015 Counting Principle mstat008 Permutations mstat009 Combinations stat106 Outcomes and event probability mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event mstat010 Probability of an event mstat011 Area as probability mstat012 Probability of independent events mstat013 Probability of dependent events stat112 Die rolling Algebra alge001 Integers and rational numbers alge002 Integers, rational numbers, and irrational numbers arith657 Introduction to the distributive property alge606 Distributive property, simple alge607 Combining like terms, basic arith655 Introduction to properties of addition arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication alge187 Properties of addition alge188 Properties of real numbers alge285 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 3 alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge004 Evaluation of a polynomial in one variable alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge800 Additive property of equality with decimals alge801 Additive property of equality with fractions alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge266 Additive property of equality: Problem type 3 alge813 Solving simple equations with multiplication or division alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 215 216 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions alge012 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 2 alge803 Using two steps to solve an equation alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge208 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge810 Introduction to algebraic symbol manipulation alge015 Writing an inequality alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 alge282 Function tables with two-step rules fun001 Function tables fun006 Finding a function rule: Problem type 2 fun002 Graphing integer functions alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge216 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 2 alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge197 Graphing a line given the x- and y-intercepts alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge069 Y-intercept of a line alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge070 Writing an equation of a line given the slope and the y-intercept alge263 Interpreting the graphs of two functions alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 arith233 Introduction to exponents arith683 Powers of 10: Positive exponent arith684 Powers of 10: Negative exponent arith036 Scientific notation with positive exponent arith037 Scientific notation with negative exponent arith016 Square root of a perfect square arith602 Estimating a square root B.6. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 2 Geometry geom349 geom358 geom151 geom152 geom303 geom039 geom304 geom305 geom159 geom158 geom154 geom150 geom157 geom306 geom307 geom520 geom801 geom001 geom908 geom309 geom044 geom310 geom532 geom078 geom300 geom339 geom019 geom350 geom351 geom217 geom340 geom022 geom023 geom344 geom347 geom016 geom218 geom802 geom301 geom036 geom302 geom214 Naming segments, rays, and lines Introduction to parallel and perpendicular lines Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Acute, obtuse, and right angles Supplementary and complementary angles Corresponding and alternate angles Supplementary and vertical angles Constructing congruent angles Constructing an angle bisector Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment Constructing a pair of perpendicular lines Constructing a pair of parallel lines Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Identifying and naming congruent triangles Area of a triangle Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 Solving a triangle: Problem type 2 Pythagorean Theorem Classifying quadrilaterals Classifying parallelograms Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Area of a square or a rectangle Distinguishing between area and perimeter Areas of rectangles with the same perimeter Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a parallelogram Area of a trapezoid Area involving rectangles and triangles Introduction to circle: diameter, radius, and chord Circumference of a circle Finding the radius or the diameter of a circle given its circumference Circumference and area of a circle Perimeter involving rectangles and circles Area between two concentric circles Area involving rectangles and circles Area involving inscribed figures 217 218 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS geom838 geom354 geom311 geom505 geom090 geom035 geom092 geom348 geom031 geom345 geom091 geom034 geom338 geom219 geom359 geom360 geom037 geom038 geom337 geom357 geom330 geom331 geom332 geom333 geom334 geom335 geom336 B.7 Circumference ratios Volume of a solid made of unit cubes Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a piecewise rectangular prism Volume of a triangular prism Volume of a cylinder Rate of filling of a solid Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism Surface area of a solid made of unit cubes Surface area of a triangular prism Surface area of a cylinder Surface area involving prisms or cylinders Nets of solids Introduction to congruence Introduction to similarity Similar polygons Similar right triangles Indirect measurement Identifying transformations Translation of a polygon Coordinates of translated points Reflection of a polygon over a vertical or horizontal line Coordinates of points reflected over an axis Drawing lines of symmetry Rotation of a figure about the origin Dilation Middle School Math 3 / Foundations of High School Math Whole Numbers and Integers arith066 arith028 arith060 arith630 arith012 arith006 arith637 arith613 arith004 arith615 Expanded form Numeral translation: Problem type 1 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 Addition with carry to the hundreds place Addition of large numbers Subtraction with borrowing Subtraction and regrouping with zeros Word problem using addition or subtraction Multiplication with carry Introduction to multiplication of large numbers B.7. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 3 / FOUNDATIONS OF HIGH SCHOOL MATH arith014 Multiplication of large numbers arith005 Division with carry arith023 Word problem using division arith614 Basic word problem using multiplication or division arith077 Ordering large numbers arith078 Rounding: Problem type 1 arith061 Rounding: Problem type 2 arith101 Estimating a sum arith102 Estimating a difference arith677 Estimating a product arith678 Estimating a quotient arith681 Introduction to order of operations arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith647 Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 arith648 Divisibility rules for 3 and 9 arith056 Factors arith034 Prime numbers arith035 Prime number factorization arith033 Greatest common factor arith070 Least common multiple arith240 Word problem with common multiples alge286 Plotting integers on a number line arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line arith071 Absolute value of a number arith104 Operations with absolute value arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction arith231 Integer multiplication and division pcalc038 Addition and subtraction of matrices Rational Numbers arith623 arith663 arith665 arith212 arith067 arith667 arith044 arith091 arith092 Introduction to fractions Introduction to ratios Introduction to equivalent fractions Equivalent fractions Reduced fraction Plotting fractions on a number line Ordering fractions with same denominator Ordering fractions with same numerator Ordering fractions 219 220 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith220 arith221 arith608 arith609 arith618 arith230 arith100 arith088 arith079 arith009 arith086 arith053 arith095 arith022 arith662 arith015 arith619 arith215 arith084 arith216 arith085 arith020 arith076 arith068 arith087 arith222 arith089 arith223 arith624 arith625 arith626 arith627 arith082 arith017 arith055 arith045 arith628 arith083 arith081 arith019 arith629 arith106 arith105 arith234 Decimal place value Rounding decimals Ordering decimals Ordering fractions and decimals Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators Fractional part of a circle The reciprocal of a number Product of a unit fraction and a whole number Unit fraction multiplication Product of a fraction and a whole number Fraction multiplication Word problem with fractions Fraction division Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with different denominators Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 1 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 2 Mixed number division Converting a decimal to a fraction Converting a fraction to a terminating decimal Converting a fraction to a repeating decimal Converting a mixed number to a decimal Addition of aligned decimals Subtraction of aligned decimals Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 Multiplication of a decimal by a power of ten Multiplication of a decimal by a whole number Decimal multiplication: Problem type 1 Word problem with powers of ten Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 1 Division of a decimal by a power of ten Division of a decimal by a whole number Decimal division Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 2 Signed fractions addition Signed fractions multiplication Signed decimal addition B.7. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 3 / FOUNDATIONS OF HIGH SCHOOL MATH geom525 Computing distances on the number line Measurement, Proportion, Percents, and Probability mstat034 Measuring length to the nearest quarter or half inch unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit006 Customary unit conversion with whole number values, two-step conversion unit007 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values unit008 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values, two-step conversion mstat035 Conversions involving measurements in feet and inches unit009 Customary area unit conversion with whole number values unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values unit003 Metric distance conversion with decimal values unit004 Metric conversion with decimal values, two-step conversion unit010 Metric area unit conversion with decimal number values unit034 Conversion between metric and customary unit systems unit035 Conversion between compound units, basic problem unit036 Conversion between compound units, advanced problem unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values time006 Adding time time007 Subtracting time arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge218 Word problem on rates alge272 Solving a proportion: Basic arith064 Simple word problem on proportions arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 arith674 Introduction to percent arith226 Converting between percentages and decimals arith090 Converting a percentage to a fraction arith002 Converting a fraction to a percentage arith030 Percentage of a whole number arith069 Writing a ratio as a percentage arith074 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 arith031 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 2 arith225 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 3 arith232 Simple interest stat805 Making reasonable inferences based on proportion statistics stat801 Computations from circle graphs stat804 Interpreting circle graphs or pie charts mstat014 Random samples and prediction mstat041 Tree diagrams mstat040 Introduction to the counting principle 221 222 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS mstat015 Counting Principle mstat008 Permutations mstat009 Combinations stat106 Outcomes and event probability mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event mstat010 Probability of an event mstat011 Area as probability mstat012 Probability of independent events mstat013 Probability of dependent events stat112 Die rolling Variable Expressions and Equations alge001 Integers and rational numbers alge002 Integers, rational numbers, and irrational numbers arith655 Introduction to properties of addition arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication arith657 Introduction to the distributive property alge606 Distributive property, simple alge604 Distributive Property, advanced alge607 Combining like terms, basic alge663 Combining like terms, advanced alge187 Properties of addition alge188 Properties of real numbers alge285 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 3 alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge800 Additive property of equality with decimals alge801 Additive property of equality with fractions alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge266 Additive property of equality: Problem type 3 alge813 Solving simple equations with multiplication or division alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions alge012 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 2 alge803 Using two steps to solve an equation alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge208 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge011 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 1 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 B.7. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 3 / FOUNDATIONS OF HIGH SCHOOL MATH alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge271 Solving a proportion: Advanced alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge704 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 4 alge810 Introduction to algebraic symbol manipulation alge160 Algebraic symbol manipulation alge015 Writing an inequality alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line alge166 Graphing a compound linear inequality on the number line arith233 Introduction to exponents arith683 Powers of 10: Positive exponent arith684 Powers of 10: Negative exponent arith036 Scientific notation with positive exponent arith037 Scientific notation with negative exponent scinot002 Multiplying and dividing numbers written in scientific notation arith047 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 arith049 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 2 arith600 Exponents and order of operations arith042 Writing a positive number without a negative exponent arith043 Writing a negative number without a negative exponent arith016 Square root of a perfect square arith602 Estimating a square root alge024 Product rule of exponents arith029 Ordering numbers with positive exponents alge030 Multiplying monomials alge027 Power rule: Positive exponents alge025 Power rule: Negative exponents alge004 Evaluation of a polynomial in one variable alge029 Simplifying a polynomial expression alge033 Multiplying two binomials alge705 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient 1 Functions and Graphs mstat004 mstat005 mstat024 mstat044 mstat037 Histograms for numerical data Bar graphs for non-numerical data Interpreting bar graphs Double bar graphs Line plots 223 224 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS mstat007 Interpreting line graphs mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean mstat029 How changing a value affects the mean and median stat802 Rejecting unreasonable claims based on average statistics mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat027 Using back-to-back stem-and-leaf plots to compare data sets mstat006 Box-and-whisker plots mstat025 Finding if a question can be answered by the data mstat030 Sketching the line of best fit mstat023 Scatterplots and correlation mstat043 Venn diagrams with three sets fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 alge282 Function tables with two-step rules fun001 Function tables fun006 Finding a function rule: Problem type 2 alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane fun002 Graphing integer functions alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence pcalc085 Arithmetic sequence alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge216 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 2 alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge197 Graphing a line given the x- and y-intercepts alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge069 Y-intercept of a line alge210 X- and y-intercepts of a line given the equation in standard form alge070 Writing an equation of a line given the slope and the y-intercept alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points alge701 Writing equations and drawing graphs to fit a narrative alge263 Interpreting the graphs of two functions alge018 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 1 alge132 Distance between two points in the plane alge168 Graphing an equation involving absolute value in the plane alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 B.7. MIDDLE SCHOOL MATH 3 / FOUNDATIONS OF HIGH SCHOOL MATH Geometry geom349 geom358 geom151 geom152 geom303 geom039 geom304 geom305 geom530 geom531 geom159 geom158 geom154 geom150 geom157 geom306 geom307 geom520 geom801 geom001 geom502 geom908 geom309 geom044 pcalc600 pcalc601 geom310 geom532 geom078 geom300 geom339 geom019 geom350 geom351 geom217 geom340 geom022 geom023 geom142 geom344 geom143 geom522 Naming segments, rays, and lines Introduction to parallel and perpendicular lines Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Acute, obtuse, and right angles Supplementary and complementary angles Corresponding and alternate angles Supplementary and vertical angles Solving equations involving vertical angles Solving equations involving angles and parallel lines Constructing congruent angles Constructing an angle bisector Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment Constructing a pair of perpendicular lines Constructing a pair of parallel lines Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Identifying and naming congruent triangles Area of a triangle Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Solving triangles: Basic Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 Solving a triangle: Problem type 2 Pythagorean Theorem Sine, cosine, and tangent ratios Using a trigonometric ratio to find a side length in a right triangle Classifying quadrilaterals Classifying parallelograms Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Area of a square or a rectangle Distinguishing between area and perimeter Areas of rectangles with the same perimeter Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a parallelogram Area of a trapezoid Area between two rectangles Area involving rectangles and triangles Area and perimeter of a rectangle Interior angles of convex polygons 225 226 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS geom347 geom016 geom218 geom802 geom301 geom036 geom302 geom214 geom133 geom838 geom354 geom311 geom505 geom090 geom033 geom035 geom086 geom092 geom348 geom031 geom345 geom091 geom034 geom338 geom219 geom508 geom359 geom360 geom037 geom038 geom337 geom357 geom330 geom331 geom332 geom333 geom334 geom335 geom336 Introduction to circle: diameter, radius, and chord Circumference of a circle Finding the radius or the diameter of a circle given its circumference Circumference and area of a circle Perimeter involving rectangles and circles Area between two concentric circles Area involving rectangles and circles Area involving inscribed figures Ratio of volumes Circumference ratios Volume of a solid made of unit cubes Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a piecewise rectangular prism Volume of a triangular prism Volume of a pyramid Volume of a cylinder Volume of a cone Rate of filling of a solid Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism Surface area of a solid made of unit cubes Surface area of a triangular prism Surface area of a cylinder Surface area involving prisms or cylinders Nets of solids Length, area, and volume ratios of similar figures Introduction to congruence Introduction to similarity Similar polygons Similar right triangles Indirect measurement Identifying transformations Translation of a polygon Coordinates of translated points Reflection of a polygon over a vertical or horizontal line Coordinates of points reflected over an axis Drawing lines of symmetry Rotation of a figure about the origin Dilation B.8. MIDDLE SCHOOL GEOMETRY B.8 Middle School Geometry Angles and triangles geom303 geom039 geom304 geom305 geom306 geom307 geom021 geom020 geom001 geom308 geom309 geom044 geom068 Acute, obtuse, and right angles Supplementary and complementary angles Corresponding and alternate angles Supplementary and vertical angles Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Area of a triangle Area of an obtuse triangle Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 Solving a triangle: Problem type 2 Pythagorean Theorem Computing an area using the Pythagorean Theorem Polygons and quadrilaterals geom310 geom300 geom339 geom078 geom143 geom019 geom340 geom022 geom023 geom142 Classifying quadrilaterals Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Area and perimeter of a rectangle Area of a square or a rectangle Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a parallelogram Area of a trapezoid Area between two rectangles Circles geom016 geom301 geom138 geom026 geom126 geom036 geom302 Circumference of a circle Perimeter involving rectangles and circles Circumference ratios Area of a circle Area of a sector of a circle Area between two concentric circles Area involving rectangles and circles 227 228 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS Volumes and surface areas geom311 geom090 geom033 geom035 geom086 geom092 geom133 geom031 geom091 geom034 geom338 Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a triangular prism Volume of a pyramid Volume of a cylinder Volume of a cone Rate of filling of a solid Ratio of volumes Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism Surface area of a triangular prism Surface area of a cylinder Surface area involving prisms or cylinders Constructions geom151 geom152 geom159 geom158 geom154 geom150 geom157 Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Constructing congruent angles Constructing an angle bisector Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment Constructing a pair of perpendicular lines Constructing a pair of parallel lines Similitudes and transformations geom037 geom038 geom337 geom330 geom331 geom332 geom333 geom334 geom335 geom336 B.9 Similar polygons Similar right triangles Indirect measurement Translation of a polygon Coordinates of translated points Reflection of a polygon over a vertical or horizontal line Coordinates of points reflected over an axis Drawing lines of symmetry Rotation of a figure about the origin Dilation Pre-Algebra Whole Numbers and Integers B.9. PRE-ALGEBRA arith630 Addition with carry to the hundreds place arith012 Addition of large numbers arith006 Subtraction with borrowing arith637 Subtraction and regrouping with zeros arith613 Word problem using addition or subtraction arith004 Multiplication with carry arith615 Introduction to multiplication of large numbers arith014 Multiplication of large numbers arith005 Division with carry arith023 Word problem using division arith614 Basic word problem using multiplication or division arith066 Expanded form arith028 Numeral translation: Problem type 1 arith060 Numeral translation: Problem type 2 arith077 Ordering large numbers arith078 Rounding: Problem type 1 arith061 Rounding: Problem type 2 arith101 Estimating a sum arith102 Estimating a difference arith677 Estimating a product arith678 Estimating a quotient arith103 Average of two numbers arith681 Introduction to order of operations arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith056 Factors arith034 Prime numbers arith035 Prime number factorization arith033 Greatest common factor arith070 Least common multiple arith240 Word problem with common multiples arith647 Divisibility rules for 2, 5, and 10 arith648 Divisibility rules for 3 and 9 unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit006 Customary unit conversion with whole number values, two-step conversion unit009 Customary area unit conversion with whole number values unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values unit012 Time unit conversion with whole number values alge286 Plotting integers on a number line arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line arith071 Absolute value of a number arith104 Operations with absolute value arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 229 230 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction arith231 Integer multiplication and division Rational Numbers arith623 arith663 arith665 arith212 arith067 arith667 arith044 arith091 arith092 arith618 arith230 arith100 arith088 arith079 arith009 arith086 arith053 arith095 arith022 arith106 arith105 arith662 arith015 arith619 arith215 arith084 arith216 arith085 arith020 arith076 arith068 arith220 arith221 arith608 arith609 arith624 arith625 Introduction to fractions Introduction to ratios Introduction to equivalent fractions Equivalent fractions Reduced fraction Plotting fractions on a number line Ordering fractions with same denominator Ordering fractions with same numerator Ordering fractions Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators Fractional part of a circle The reciprocal of a number Product of a unit fraction and a whole number Unit fraction multiplication Product of a fraction and a whole number Fraction multiplication Word problem with fractions Fraction division Signed fractions addition Signed fractions multiplication Introduction to mixed numbers and improper fractions Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing Addition or subtraction of mixed numbers with different denominators Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 1 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 2 Mixed number division Decimal place value Rounding decimals Ordering decimals Ordering fractions and decimals Addition of aligned decimals Subtraction of aligned decimals B.9. PRE-ALGEBRA arith626 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 arith627 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 arith234 Signed decimal addition arith082 Multiplication of a decimal by a power of ten arith017 Multiplication of a decimal by a whole number arith055 Decimal multiplication: Problem type 1 arith045 Word problem with powers of ten arith628 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 1 arith083 Division of a decimal by a power of ten arith081 Division of a decimal by a whole number arith019 Decimal division arith629 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 2 arith087 Converting a decimal to a fraction arith222 Converting a fraction to a terminating decimal arith089 Converting a fraction to a repeating decimal arith223 Converting a mixed number to a decimal unit007 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values unit008 Customary unit conversion with mixed number values, two-step conversion unit003 Metric distance conversion with decimal values unit004 Metric conversion with decimal values, two-step conversion unit010 Metric area unit conversion with decimal number values Proportion, Percent, Data and Probability arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge218 Word problem on rates alge272 Solving a proportion: Basic alge271 Solving a proportion: Advanced arith064 Simple word problem on proportions arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 arith611 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 2 alge220 Word problem on inverse proportions unit034 Conversion between metric and customary unit systems unit035 Conversion between compound units, basic problem unit036 Conversion between compound units, advanced problem arith674 Introduction to percent arith226 Converting between percentages and decimals arith090 Converting a percentage to a fraction arith002 Converting a fraction to a percentage arith030 Percentage of a whole number arith069 Writing a ratio as a percentage arith074 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 arith031 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 2 231 232 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith225 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 3 arith232 Simple interest mstat014 Random samples and prediction mstat037 Line plots mstat004 Histograms for numerical data mstat005 Bar graphs for non-numerical data mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat044 Double bar graphs mstat007 Interpreting line graphs stat804 Interpreting circle graphs or pie charts mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean mstat029 How changing a value affects the mean and median stat802 Rejecting unreasonable claims based on average statistics mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat027 Using back-to-back stem-and-leaf plots to compare data sets mstat006 Box-and-whisker plots mstat023 Scatterplots and correlation mstat030 Sketching the line of best fit mstat043 Venn diagrams with three sets mstat041 Tree diagrams mstat040 Introduction to the counting principle mstat015 Counting Principle mstat008 Permutations mstat009 Combinations stat106 Outcomes and event probability mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event mstat010 Probability of an event mstat012 Probability of independent events mstat013 Probability of dependent events stat112 Die rolling Variable Expressions and Equations arith655 Introduction to properties of addition arith656 Introduction to properties of multiplication arith657 Introduction to the distributive property alge606 Distributive property, simple alge604 Distributive Property, advanced alge607 Combining like terms, basic alge663 Combining like terms, advanced alge001 Integers and rational numbers B.9. PRE-ALGEBRA alge002 Integers, rational numbers, and irrational numbers alge285 Evaluating a simple algebraic expression: Problem type 3 alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge004 Evaluation of a polynomial in one variable alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge800 Additive property of equality with decimals alge801 Additive property of equality with fractions alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge266 Additive property of equality: Problem type 3 alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions alge012 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 2 alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge208 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge200 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge011 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 1 alge061 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 2 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 alge209 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 4 alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge219 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge704 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 4 alge810 Introduction to algebraic symbol manipulation alge160 Algebraic symbol manipulation alge015 Writing an inequality alge186 Writing a compound inequality alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 alge207 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 4 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line alge166 Graphing a compound linear inequality on the number line Functions and Graphs alge282 Function tables with two-step rules 233 234 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS fun001 Function tables fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 fun006 Finding a function rule: Problem type 2 alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane fun002 Graphing integer functions fun010 Vertical line test alge263 Interpreting the graphs of two functions alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence pcalc085 Arithmetic sequence pcalc086 Geometric sequence alge197 Graphing a line given the x- and y-intercepts alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge191 Midpoint of a line segment in the plane alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge216 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 2 alge210 X- and y-intercepts of a line given the equation in standard form alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge070 Writing an equation of a line given the slope and the y-intercept alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points alge701 Writing equations and drawing graphs to fit a narrative alge018 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 1 alge225 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 2 alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 alge262 Graphing a simple cubic function alge132 Distance between two points in the plane Exponents and Polynomials arith233 arith047 arith049 arith600 arith042 arith043 arith029 arith024 arith036 Introduction to exponents Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 2 Exponents and order of operations Writing a positive number without a negative exponent Writing a negative number without a negative exponent Ordering numbers with positive exponents Ordering numbers with negative exponents Scientific notation with positive exponent B.9. PRE-ALGEBRA arith037 Scientific notation with negative exponent scinot002 Multiplying and dividing numbers written in scientific notation alge024 Product rule of exponents alge027 Power rule: Positive exponents alge025 Power rule: Negative exponents arith016 Square root of a perfect square arith601 Square root of a rational perfect square arith602 Estimating a square root arith093 Square root simplification alge264 Square root of a perfect square monomial alge080 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 1 arith094 Cube root of an integer alge029 Simplifying a polynomial expression alge030 Multiplying monomials alge033 Multiplying two binomials alge032 Squaring a binomial alge180 Multiplying polynomials alge037 Greatest common factor of two monomials alge055 Least common multiple of two monomials alge031 Degree of a multivariate polynomial Geometry geom349 geom151 geom152 geom303 geom039 geom304 geom305 geom530 geom531 geom159 geom158 geom154 geom150 geom157 geom306 geom307 geom801 geom001 geom908 geom044 Naming segments, rays, and lines Measuring an angle with the protractor Drawing an angle with the protractor Acute, obtuse, and right angles Supplementary and complementary angles Corresponding and alternate angles Supplementary and vertical angles Solving equations involving vertical angles Solving equations involving angles and parallel lines Constructing congruent angles Constructing an angle bisector Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment Constructing a pair of perpendicular lines Constructing a pair of parallel lines Acute, obtuse, and right triangles Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles Area of a triangle Sum of the angle measures of a triangle Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 Pythagorean Theorem 235 236 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS pcalc600 pcalc601 pcalc602 geom310 geom300 geom339 geom078 geom217 geom350 geom351 geom353 geom019 geom340 geom022 geom023 geom142 geom344 geom143 geom347 geom016 geom802 geom218 geom838 geom301 geom036 geom302 geom214 geom311 geom505 geom090 geom033 geom035 geom092 geom086 geom841 geom348 geom219 geom345 geom031 geom091 geom034 geom338 geom842 geom037 Sine, cosine, and tangent ratios Using a trigonometric ratio to find a side length in a right triangle Using a trigonometric ratio to find an angle measure in a right triangle Classifying quadrilaterals Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area Distinguishing between area and perimeter Areas of rectangles with the same perimeter Perimeter of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a square or a rectangle Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a parallelogram Area of a trapezoid Area between two rectangles Area involving rectangles and triangles Area and perimeter of a rectangle Introduction to circle: diameter, radius, and chord Circumference of a circle Circumference and area of a circle Finding the radius or the diameter of a circle given its circumference Circumference ratios Perimeter involving rectangles and circles Area between two concentric circles Area involving rectangles and circles Area involving inscribed figures Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a piecewise rectangular prism Volume of a triangular prism Volume of a pyramid Volume of a cylinder Rate of filling of a solid Volume of a cone Volume of a sphere Vertices, edges, and faces of a solid Nets of solids Surface area of a solid made of unit cubes Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism Surface area of a triangular prism Surface area of a cylinder Surface area involving prisms or cylinders Surface area of a sphere Similar polygons B.10. ALGEBRA 1 geom038 geom337 geom330 geom331 geom332 geom333 geom334 geom335 geom336 B.10 Similar right triangles Indirect measurement Translation of a polygon Coordinates of translated points Reflection of a polygon over a vertical or horizontal line Coordinates of points reflected over an axis Drawing lines of symmetry Rotation of a figure about the origin Dilation Algebra 1 Arithmetic readiness arith101 Estimating a sum arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith056 Factors arith034 Prime numbers arith035 Prime number factorization arith033 Greatest common factor arith070 Least common multiple arith064 Simple word problem on proportions unit005 Customary unit conversion with whole number values unit001 Metric distance conversion with whole number values unit002 Metric mass or capacity conversion with whole number values arith212 Equivalent fractions arith067 Reduced fraction arith092 Ordering fractions arith618 Addition or subtraction of fractions with the same denominator arith230 Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators arith088 The reciprocal of a number arith086 Product of a fraction and a whole number arith053 Fraction multiplication arith022 Fraction division arith015 Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number arith619 Writing a mixed number as an improper fraction arith084 Addition of mixed numbers with same denominator and carry arith216 Subtraction of mixed numbers with same denominator and borrowing arith020 Mixed number multiplication: Problem type 1 arith068 Mixed number division arith220 Decimal place value 237 238 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS arith221 arith608 arith609 arith087 arith222 arith082 arith083 arith017 arith081 arith055 arith626 arith627 arith628 arith629 arith226 arith090 arith002 arith030 arith069 arith074 arith031 arith225 arith232 Rounding decimals Ordering decimals Ordering fractions and decimals Converting a decimal to a fraction Converting a fraction to a terminating decimal Multiplication of a decimal by a power of ten Division of a decimal by a power of ten Multiplication of a decimal by a whole number Division of a decimal by a whole number Decimal multiplication: Problem type 1 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 1 Word problem with one decimal operation: Problem type 2 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 1 Word problem with multiple decimal operations: Problem type 2 Converting between percentages and decimals Converting a percentage to a fraction Converting a fraction to a percentage Percentage of a whole number Writing a ratio as a percentage Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 2 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 3 Simple interest Real numbers and linear equations arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction arith231 Integer multiplication and division arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line arith106 Signed fractions addition arith105 Signed fractions multiplication arith234 Signed decimal addition alge001 Integers and rational numbers alge002 Integers, rational numbers, and irrational numbers alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge004 Evaluation of a polynomial in one variable alge606 Distributive property, simple alge604 Distributive Property, advanced alge607 Combining like terms, basic alge187 Properties of addition alge188 Properties of real numbers B.10. ALGEBRA 1 pcalc709 Addition of matrices and multiplication of a matrix by a scalar alge009 Additive property of equality: Problem type 1 alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge266 Additive property of equality: Problem type 3 alge800 Additive property of equality with decimals alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge012 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 2 alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge208 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge200 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge011 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 1 alge061 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 2 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 alge209 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 4 alge179 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 5 alge015 Writing an inequality alge186 Writing a compound inequality alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 alge207 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 4 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line alge166 Graphing a compound linear inequality on the number line alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge219 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge704 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 4 alge022 Word problem with linear inequalities arith071 Absolute value of a number arith104 Operations with absolute value alge270 Simple absolute value equation alge103 Solving an equation involving absolute value: Basic alge170 Solving an inequality involving absolute value: Basic alge169 Solving an inequality involving absolute value 239 240 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS Functions and systems of equations fun001 Function tables fun002 Graphing integer functions fun005 Finding a function rule: Problem type 1 fun006 Finding a function rule: Problem type 2 fun016 Domain and range: Problem type 1 alge213 Domain of a square root function fun010 Vertical line test alge185 Vertical translation of the graph of a function fun020 Vertical and horizontal translations of the graph of a function alge807 Finding the next terms of a simple sequence pcalc085 Arithmetic sequence pcalc086 Geometric sequence pcalc713 Arithmetic and geometric sequences: Identifying and writing in standard form alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane alge197 Graphing a line given the x- and y-intercepts alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge018 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 1 alge225 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 2 alge701 Writing equations and drawing graphs to fit a narrative alge168 Graphing an equation involving absolute value in the plane alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge216 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 2 alge069 Y-intercept of a line alge210 X- and y-intercepts of a line given the equation in standard form alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge070 Writing an equation of a line given the slope and the y-intercept alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points alge073 Writing the equations of vertical and horizontal lines through a given point geom807 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 1 geom808 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 2 alge810 Introduction to algebraic symbol manipulation alge160 Algebraic symbol manipulation alge805 Application problem with a linear function: Problem type 1 alge806 Application problem with a linear function: Problem type 2 alge076 Solving a system of linear equations alge075 Classifying a system of linear equations B.10. ALGEBRA 1 alge078 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge184 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge224 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge192 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge172 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge079 Graphing a system of linear inequalities pcalc093 Solving a word problem using a system of linear inequalities 241 type type type type type 1 2 3 4 5 Polynomials and quadratic equations alge663 Combining like terms, advanced alge029 Simplifying a polynomial expression alge030 Multiplying monomials alge033 Multiplying two binomials alge032 Squaring a binomial alge180 Multiplying polynomials alge031 Degree of a multivariate polynomial alge708 Polynomial long division: Linear divisor alge039 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient 1 alge040 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge043 Factoring a perfect square alge265 Factoring a quadratic polynomial in two variables alge041 Factoring a product of a quadratic trinomial and a monomial alge624 Factoring a difference of squares alge042 Factoring with repeated use of the difference of squares formula alge037 Greatest common factor of two monomials alge038 Factoring a multivariate polynomial by grouping: Problem type 1 alge181 Factoring a multivariate polynomial by grouping: Problem type 2 alge681 Solving equations written in factored form alge045 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient 1 alge048 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge211 Solving a quadratic equation needing simplification alge703 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with rational roots alge094 Completing the square alge095 Solving a quadratic equation using the quadratic formula alge214 Discriminant of a quadratic equation alge524 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with irrational roots Finding the x-intercept(s) and the vertex of a parabola (alge277) Browse: Question, Explanation alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 alge253 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 2 alge254 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 3 242 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge255 Graphing a quadratic inequality Rational expressions and proportions alge053 Multiplying rational expressions: Problem type 1 alge620 Multiplying rational expressions: Problem type 2 alge054 Dividing rational expressions alge058 Complex fraction: Problem type 1 alge056 Adding rational expressions with common denominator alge057 Adding rational expressions alge055 Least common multiple of two monomials alge226 Adding rational expressions with different denominators alge622 Adding and subtracting rational expressions: Problem type 1 alge661 Adding and subtracting rational expressions: Problem type 2 alge710 Simplifying a ratio of polynomials: Problem type 1 alge682 Simplifying a ratio of polynomials: Problem type 2 alge034 Ratio of multivariate polynomials alge272 Solving a proportion: Basic alge271 Solving a proportion: Advanced alge049 Restriction on variable in a denominator alge060 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge205 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge206 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge212 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a quadratic equation: Problem type 1 alge062 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a quadratic equation: Problem type 2 alge047 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a quadratic equation: Problem type 3 arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge218 Word problem on rates arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 arith611 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 2 arith612 Word problem involving multiple rates alge220 Word problem on inverse proportions alge175 Word problem on direct variation alge176 Word problem on inverse variation unit034 Conversion between metric and customary unit systems unit035 Conversion between compound units, basic problem unit036 Conversion between compound units, advanced problem pcalc108 Sketching the graph of a rational function: Problem type 1 Exponents and square roots B.10. ALGEBRA 1 arith233 Introduction to exponents arith047 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 arith049 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 2 arith600 Exponents and order of operations alge024 Product rule of exponents alge027 Power rule: Positive exponents arith042 Writing a positive number without a negative exponent arith043 Writing a negative number without a negative exponent alge025 Power rule: Negative exponents alge028 Product rule of exponents in a multivariate monomial arith029 Ordering numbers with positive exponents arith024 Ordering numbers with negative exponents arith036 Scientific notation with positive exponent arith037 Scientific notation with negative exponent scinot002 Multiplying and dividing numbers written in scientific notation alge177 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 1 arith016 Square root of a perfect square arith601 Square root of a rational perfect square arith602 Estimating a square root arith093 Square root simplification alge264 Square root of a perfect square monomial alge080 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 1 alge275 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 2 arith032 Square root addition arith039 Square root multiplication alge276 Simplifying a product of radical expressions using the distributive property alge086 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression alge088 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression using conjugates alge089 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 1 alge090 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 2 alge091 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 3 Geometry and trigonometry alge191 Midpoint of a line segment in the plane alge132 Distance between two points in the plane geom500 Vertical angles and linear pairs geom001 Sum of the angle measures of a triangle geom044 Pythagorean Theorem pcalc600 Sine, cosine, and tangent ratios pcalc601 Using a trigonometric ratio to find a side length in a right triangle pcalc602 Using a trigonometric ratio to find an angle measure in a right triangle geom300 Perimeter of a square or a rectangle 243 244 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS geom339 geom019 geom801 geom217 geom143 geom340 geom142 geom802 geom036 geom311 geom035 geom092 geom031 geom034 geom037 geom337 Perimeter of a polygon Area of a square or a rectangle Area of a triangle Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area Area and perimeter of a rectangle Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area between two rectangles Circumference and area of a circle Area between two concentric circles Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism Volume of a cylinder Rate of filling of a solid Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism Surface area of a cylinder Similar polygons Indirect measurement Data analysis and probability mstat004 Histograms for numerical data mstat024 Interpreting bar graphs mstat007 Interpreting line graphs alge263 Interpreting the graphs of two functions stat801 Computations from circle graphs stat804 Interpreting circle graphs or pie charts mstat023 Scatterplots and correlation mstat030 Sketching the line of best fit mstat031 Interpreting a stem-and-leaf plot mstat027 Using back-to-back stem-and-leaf plots to compare data sets mstat006 Box-and-whisker plots mstat003 Mode of a data set mstat028 Mean and median of a data set mstat029 How changing a value affects the mean and median stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean mstat014 Random samples and prediction mstat025 Finding if a question can be answered by the data stat802 Rejecting unreasonable claims based on average statistics stat805 Making reasonable inferences based on proportion statistics mstat015 Counting Principle mstat008 Permutations mstat009 Combinations stat790 Permutations, combinations, and the multiplication principle for counting mstat026 Introduction to probability of an event B.11. HIGH SCHOOL GEOMETRY mstat010 Probability of an event stat106 Outcomes and event probability stat112 Die rolling mstat011 Area as probability mstat012 Probability of independent events mstat013 Probability of dependent events mstat032 Probability of the union of two events B.11 High School Geometry Arithmetic and algebra readiness arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith056 Factors arith070 Least common multiple arith212 Equivalent fractions arith067 Reduced fraction arith230 Addition or subtraction of fractions with different denominators arith086 Product of a fraction and a whole number arith053 Fraction multiplication arith022 Fraction division arith015 Writing an improper fraction as a mixed number arith220 Decimal place value arith221 Rounding decimals arith030 Percentage of a whole number arith071 Absolute value of a number arith200 Integer addition: Problem type 1 arith108 Integer addition: Problem type 2 arith107 Integer subtraction arith231 Integer multiplication and division alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge004 Evaluation of a polynomial in one variable alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge606 Distributive property, simple alge607 Combining like terms, basic alge007 Additive property of equality: Problem type 3 alge012 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 2 alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge208 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge011 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 1 245 246 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line alge166 Graphing a compound linear inequality on the number line alge060 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge205 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 2 arith047 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 arith016 Square root of a perfect square arith093 Square root simplification alge086 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression Plane geometry glogic001 Conditional statements and negations glogic005 The converse, inverse, and contrapositive of a conditional statement glogic008 Conditional statements and deductive reasoning geom151 Measuring an angle with the protractor geom152 Drawing an angle with the protractor geom303 Acute, obtuse, and right angles geom039 Supplementary and complementary angles geom304 Corresponding and alternate angles geom800 Identifying linear pairs and vertical angles geom500 Vertical angles and linear pairs geom503 Angles and parallel lines geom159 Constructing congruent angles geom158 Constructing an angle bisector geom516 Angle addition and angle bisectors geom154 Constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment geom150 Constructing a pair of perpendicular lines geom157 Constructing a pair of parallel lines geom616 Introduction to proofs: Justifying statements geom614 Proofs involving segment congruence geom611 Congruent angles geom610 Angles and parallel lines geom306 Acute, obtuse, and right triangles geom307 Scalene, isosceles, and equilateral triangles geom001 Sum of the angle measures of a triangle geom809 Relationship between angle measures and side lengths of a triangle geom504 Triangle inequality geom507 Right triangles and geometric mean geom520 Identifying and naming congruent triangles geom502 Solving triangles: Basic geom908 Solving a triangle: Problem type 1 geom309 Solving a triangle: Problem type 2 B.11. HIGH SCHOOL GEOMETRY geom044 Pythagorean Theorem geom068 Computing an area using the Pythagorean Theorem geom617 Congruent triangles: Problem type 1 geom612 Congruent triangles: Problem type 2 geom613 Congruent triangles: Problem type 3 proof by contradiction Indirect proof geom310 Classifying quadrilaterals geom523 Classifying quadrilaterals: Advanced problem geom524 Hierarchy of quadrilateral figures geom528 Properties of parallelograms: Problem type 1 geom527 Properties of parallelograms: Problem type 2 geom522 Interior angles of convex polygons geom343 Identifying central angles, inscribed angles, arcs, chords, and tangents of a circle geom514 Inscribed angles of a circle geom515 Tangents of a circle geom512 Central angles and inscribed angles of a circle geom511 Lengths of chords, secants, and tangents geom513 Angles of intersecting secants and tangents geom037 Similar polygons geom510 Triangles and parallel lines geom038 Similar right triangles geom337 Indirect measurement geom508 Length, area, and volume ratios of similar figures Lengths, areas, and volumes geom525 geom526 geom521 geom300 geom339 geom078 geom019 geom143 geom340 geom801 geom022 geom023 geom142 geom213 geom802 geom301 Computing distances on the number line Midpoint of a number line segment Segment addition and midpoints Perimeter of a square or a rectangle Perimeter of a polygon Sides of polygons having the same perimeter Area of a square or a rectangle Area and perimeter of a rectangle Area of a piecewise rectangular figure Area of a triangle Area of a parallelogram Area of a trapezoid Area between two rectangles Area of a regular polygon Circumference and area of a circle Perimeter involving rectangles and circles 247 248 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS geom838 Circumference ratios geom805 Arc length and area of a sector of a circle geom036 Area between two concentric circles geom302 Area involving rectangles and circles geom211 Area involving rectangles and circles: Advanced problem mstat011 Area as probability geom311 Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism geom505 Volume of a piecewise rectangular prism geom090 Volume of a triangular prism geom033 Volume of a pyramid geom035 Volume of a cylinder geom086 Volume of a cone geom092 Rate of filling of a solid geom133 Ratio of volumes geom841 Volume of a sphere geom031 Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism geom091 Surface area of a triangular prism geom034 Surface area of a cylinder geom338 Surface area involving prisms or cylinders geom842 Surface area of a sphere Analytic geometry alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane alge191 Midpoint of a line segment in the plane alge132 Distance between two points in the plane alge197 Graphing a line given the x- and y-intercepts alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge210 X- and y-intercepts of a line given the equation in standard form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation geom807 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 1 geom808 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 2 alge070 Writing an equation of a line given the slope and the y-intercept alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points pcalc605 Graphing a circle given its equation in standard form pcalc065 Writing an equation of a circle given its center and a point on the circle pcalc066 Writing an equation of a circle given the endpoints of a diameter Transformations, trigonometry, and vectors B.12. ALGEBRA 2 geom330 Translation of a polygon geom331 Coordinates of translated points geom332 Reflection of a polygon over a vertical or horizontal line geom333 Coordinates of points reflected over an axis geom334 Drawing lines of symmetry geom335 Rotation of a figure about the origin geom336 Dilation geom506 Special right triangles pcalc600 Sine, cosine, and tangent ratios pcalc601 Using a trigonometric ratio to find a side length in a right triangle pcalc602 Using a trigonometric ratio to find an angle measure in a right triangle geom212 Circles inscribed in and circumscribed around regular polygons pcalc739 Multiplication of a vector by a scalar pcalc725 Linear combination of vectors: Algebraic approach pcalc726 Linear combination of vectors: Geometric approach pcalc060 Magnitude of a vector vector002 Calculating the magnitude and direction of a vector vector005 Finding the components of a vector pcalc063 Translation of a vector B.12 Algebra 2 Real numbers and linear equations arith605 Plotting rational numbers on a number line arith071 Absolute value of a number arith104 Operations with absolute value arith106 Signed fractions addition arith105 Signed fractions multiplication arith234 Signed decimal addition arith047 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 1 arith049 Evaluating expressions with exponents: Problem type 2 alge005 Evaluation of a linear expression in two variables alge004 Evaluation of a polynomial in one variable arith600 Exponents and order of operations arith016 Square root of a perfect square alge001 Integers and rational numbers alge002 Integers, rational numbers, and irrational numbers alge602 Writing a mathematical expression alge016 Translating sentences into mathematical equations alge015 Writing an inequality alge186 Writing a compound inequality 249 250 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge606 Distributive property, simple alge604 Distributive Property, advanced alge607 Combining like terms, basic alge663 Combining like terms, advanced alge187 Properties of addition alge188 Properties of real numbers alge010 Additive property of equality: Problem type 2 alge266 Additive property of equality: Problem type 3 alge802 Multiplicative property of equality with fractions alge008 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 1 alge012 Multiplicative property of equality: Problem type 2 alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge208 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge200 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge011 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 1 alge061 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 2 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 alge209 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 4 alge179 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 5 alge810 Introduction to algebraic symbol manipulation alge160 Algebraic symbol manipulation alge019 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 1 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 alge207 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 4 alge017 Graphing a linear inequality on the number line alge166 Graphing a compound linear inequality on the number line alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge219 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge704 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 4 alge022 Word problem with linear inequalities mstat014 Random samples and prediction arith232 Simple interest stat801 Computations from circle graphs arith074 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 1 arith031 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 2 arith225 Word problem on percentage: Problem type 3 stat803 Finding the value for a new score that will yield a given mean B.12. ALGEBRA 2 geom300 Perimeter of a square or a rectangle geom078 Sides of polygons having the same perimeter geom019 Area of a square or a rectangle geom217 Finding the side length of a rectangle given its perimeter or area geom143 Area and perimeter of a rectangle geom311 Volume of a cube or a rectangular prism geom802 Circumference and area of a circle geom036 Area between two concentric circles geom031 Surface area of a cube or a rectangular prism geom034 Surface area of a cylinder geom035 Volume of a cylinder geom092 Rate of filling of a solid geom500 Vertical angles and linear pairs geom502 Solving triangles: Basic alge270 Simple absolute value equation alge103 Solving an equation involving absolute value: Basic alge167 Solving an equation involving absolute value: Advanced alge169 Solving an inequality involving absolute value alge170 Solving an inequality involving absolute value: Basic Graphs and linear functions alge064 Reading a point in the coordinate plane alge067 Plotting a point in the coordinate plane alge066 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 1 alge216 Solutions to a linear equation in two variables: Problem type 2 alge197 Graphing a line given the x- and y-intercepts alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge210 X- and y-intercepts of a line given the equation in standard form alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge070 Writing an equation of a line given the slope and the y-intercept alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points alge073 Writing the equations of vertical and horizontal lines through a given point alge701 Writing equations and drawing graphs to fit a narrative alge805 Application problem with a linear function: Problem type 1 alge806 Application problem with a linear function: Problem type 2 geom807 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 1 geom808 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 2 251 252 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge018 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 1 alge225 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 2 set001 Set builder notation set002 Union and intersection of finite sets set004 Set builder and interval notation set005 Union and intersection of intervals fun001 Function tables fun002 Graphing integer functions fun016 Domain and range: Problem type 1 fun004 Domain and range: Problem type 2 fun010 Vertical line test Systems of linear equations alge075 Classifying a system of linear equations alge076 Solving a system of linear equations alge077 Creating an inconsistent system of linear equations alge263 Interpreting the graphs of two functions alge079 Graphing a system of linear inequalities pcalc095 Linear programming pcalc094 Solving a word problem using linear programming alge078 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge184 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge224 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge192 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge172 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem pcalc093 Solving a word problem using a system of linear inequalities pcalc709 Addition of matrices and multiplication of a matrix by a scalar pcalc042 Finding the determinant of a 2x2 matrix pcalc043 Finding the determinant of a 3x3 matrix pcalc045 Cramer’s rule: Problem type 1 pcalc047 Cramer’s rule: Problem type 2 pcalc712 Gauss-Jordan elimination with a 2x2 matrix pcalc046 Augmented matrix and solution set of a system of linear equations Exponents and polynomials alge024 Product rule of exponents alge030 Multiplying monomials alge027 Power rule: Positive exponents arith042 Writing a positive number without a negative exponent arith043 Writing a negative number without a negative exponent type type type type type 1 2 3 4 5 B.12. ALGEBRA 2 alge025 Power rule: Negative exponents alge028 Product rule of exponents in a multivariate monomial arith029 Ordering numbers with positive exponents arith024 Ordering numbers with negative exponents arith036 Scientific notation with positive exponent arith037 Scientific notation with negative exponent scinot002 Multiplying and dividing numbers written in scientific notation alge031 Degree of a multivariate polynomial alge029 Simplifying a polynomial expression alge033 Multiplying two binomials alge032 Squaring a binomial alge180 Multiplying polynomials alge708 Polynomial long division: Linear divisor alge709 Polynomial long division: Quadratic divisor pcalc117 Synthetic division alge039 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient 1 alge040 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge265 Factoring a quadratic polynomial in two variables alge043 Factoring a perfect square alge041 Factoring a product of a quadratic trinomial and a monomial alge045 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient 1 alge048 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge211 Solving a quadratic equation needing simplification alge681 Solving equations written in factored form alge046 Roots of a product of polynomials alge703 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with rational roots alge163 Writing a quadratic equation given the roots and the leading coefficient alge624 Factoring a difference of squares alge042 Factoring with repeated use of the difference of squares formula alge044 Factoring a sum or difference of two cubes alge037 Greatest common factor of two monomials alge055 Least common multiple of two monomials alge038 Factoring a multivariate polynomial by grouping: Problem type 1 alge181 Factoring a multivariate polynomial by grouping: Problem type 2 Rational expressions and functions alge053 alge620 alge054 alge058 alge162 Multiplying rational expressions: Problem type 1 Multiplying rational expressions: Problem type 2 Dividing rational expressions Complex fraction: Problem type 1 Complex Fraction: Problem type 2 253 254 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge056 Adding rational expressions with common denominator alge057 Adding rational expressions alge226 Adding rational expressions with different denominators alge622 Adding and subtracting rational expressions: Problem type 1 alge661 Adding and subtracting rational expressions: Problem type 2 alge034 Ratio of multivariate polynomials alge710 Simplifying a ratio of polynomials: Problem type 1 alge682 Simplifying a ratio of polynomials: Problem type 2 alge049 Restriction on variable in a denominator alge060 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge205 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge206 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge212 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a quadratic equation: Problem type 1 alge062 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a quadratic equation: Problem type 2 alge047 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a quadratic equation: Problem type 3 pcalc108 Sketching the graph of a rational function: Problem type 1 alge218 Word problem on rates arith228 Basic word problem on rates alge271 Solving a proportion: Advanced arith610 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 1 arith611 Word problem on proportions: Problem type 2 arith612 Word problem involving multiple rates alge059 Ordering fractions with variables alge220 Word problem on inverse proportions geom037 Similar polygons alge175 Word problem on direct variation alge176 Word problem on inverse variation geom133 Ratio of volumes geom138 Circumference ratios Radicals and quadratic equations arith601 Square root of a rational perfect square arith093 Square root simplification alge264 Square root of a perfect square monomial alge080 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 1 alge275 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 2 arith032 Square root addition alge084 Simplifying a sum of radical expressions arith039 Square root multiplication B.12. ALGEBRA 2 alge640 Simplifying a product of radical expressions alge082 Simplifying a product of radical expressions: Problem type 3 alge276 Simplifying a product of radical expressions using the distributive property alge086 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression alge088 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression using conjugates geom044 Pythagorean Theorem alge089 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 1 alge090 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 2 alge091 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 3 alge182 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 4 arith094 Cube root of an integer alge273 Simplifying a higher radical: Problem type 1 alge811 Simplifying a higher radical: Problem type 2 alge092 Even root property alge093 Odd root property alge227 Solving an equation with exponent using the even-root property alge228 Solving an equation with exponent using the odd-root property alge250 Rational exponents: Basic alge251 Rational exponents: Negative exponents and fractional bases alge249 Rational exponents: Powers of powers alge812 Converting between radical form and exponent form alge230 Solving an equation with positive rational exponent alge231 Solving an equation with negative rational exponent pcalc048 Adding and subtracting complex numbers pcalc049 Multiplying complex numbers pcalc050 Dividing complex numbers pcalc053 Simplifying a power of i alge094 Completing the square alge095 Solving a quadratic equation using the quadratic formula pcalc051 Solving a quadratic equation with imaginary roots alge214 Discriminant of a quadratic equation alge193 Discriminant of a quadratic equation with parameter alge524 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with irrational roots alge771 Solving a quadratic inequality alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 alge253 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 2 alge254 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 3 Finding the x-intercept(s) and the vertex of a parabola (alge277) Browse: Question, Explanation alge255 Graphing a quadratic inequality Functions and logarithms 255 256 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS fun019 Sum, difference, and product of two functions alge213 Domain of a square root function alge185 Vertical translation of the graph of a function fun020 Vertical and horizontal translations of the graph of a function fun011 Horizontal line test fun012 Inverse functions: Basic alge130 Inverse functions: Advanced fun021 Composition of two functions: Domain and range fun022 Composition of two functions: Basic alge129 Composition of two functions: Advanced fun023 Piecewise-defined functions alge108 Exponential and logarithmic equations alge232 Evaluating a logarithmic expression pcalc708 Basic properties of logarithms alge107 Change of base for logarithms alge233 Solving a logarithmic equation: Problem type 1 alge113 Solving a logarithmic equation: Problem type 2 alge111 Solving an exponential equation: Problem type 1 alge112 Solving an exponential equation: Problem type 2 alge177 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 1 alge178 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 2 pcalc737 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 3 alge262 Graphing a simple cubic function alge168 Graphing an equation involving absolute value in the plane alge712 Sketching the graph of an exponential function: Basic pcalc103 Sketching the graph of an exponential function: Advanced pcalc104 Sketching the graph of a logarithmic function pcalc102 Translating the graph of a logarithmic or exponential function Conic sections and sequences alge191 Midpoint of a line segment in the plane alge132 Distance between two points in the plane pcalc067 Graphing a parabola with a horizontal or a vertical axis pcalc068 Writing an equation of a parabola given the vertex and the focus pcalc069 Finding the focus of a parabola pcalc605 Graphing a circle given its equation in standard form pcalc064 Graphing a circle given its equation in general form pcalc065 Writing an equation of a circle given its center and a point on the circle pcalc066 Writing an equation of a circle given the endpoints of a diameter pcalc070 Graph of an ellipse centered at the origin pcalc734 Graphing an ellipse given its equation in standard form pcalc071 Graphing an ellipse given its equation in general form B.13. TRIGONOMETRY pcalc075 pcalc735 pcalc076 pcalc098 pcalc096 pcalc097 pcalc736 pcalc080 pcalc715 pcalc717 pcalc718 pcalc719 pcalc720 pcalc082 pcalc087 B.13 Graph of a hyperbola centered at the origin Graphing a hyperbola given its equation in standard form Graphing a hyperbola given its equation in general form Solving a system of nonlinear equations Graphing a system of nonlinear inequalities: Problem type 1 Graphing a system of nonlinear inequalities: Problem type 2 Classifying conics given their equations Finding the first terms of a sequence Arithmetic sequences Geometric sequences Sum of the first n terms of an arithmetic sequence Sum of the first n terms of a geometric sequence Sum of a geometric series Factorial expressions Binomial formula Trigonometry Algebra review alge061 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 2 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 alge209 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 4 alge179 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 5 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 alge076 Solving a system of linear equations alge060 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge205 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge206 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge029 Simplifying a polynomial expression alge030 Multiplying monomials alge180 Multiplying polynomials alge705 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient 1 alge040 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge624 Factoring a difference of squares 257 258 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge024 Product rule of exponents alge027 Power rule: Positive exponents alge080 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 1 alge086 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression alge250 Rational exponents: Basic pcalc048 Adding and subtracting complex numbers pcalc049 Multiplying complex numbers set004 Set builder and interval notation set005 Union and intersection of intervals fun018 Introduction to functions: Notation and graphs fun016 Domain and range: Problem type 1 fun010 Vertical line test fun019 Sum, difference, and product of two functions alge185 Vertical translation of the graph of a function fun020 Vertical and horizontal translations of the graph of a function fun022 Composition of two functions: Basic fun012 Inverse functions: Basic alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points alge073 Writing the equations of vertical and horizontal lines through a given point alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line alge045 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient 1 alge048 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge094 Completing the square alge095 Solving a quadratic equation using the quadratic formula alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 alge253 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 2 alge710 Simplifying a ratio of polynomials: Problem type 1 alge681 Solving equations written in factored form pcalc053 Simplifying a power of i Right triangle trigonometry and trigonometric values pcalc001 pcalc002 pcalc003 pcalc005 Converting between a decimal degree and degrees-minutes-seconds Converting between degree and radian measure Coterminal angles Arc length and central angle measure B.13. TRIGONOMETRY pcalc006 Sketching an angle in standard position geom506 Special right triangles pcalc600 Sine, cosine, and tangent ratios pcalc601 Using a trigonometric ratio to find a side length in a right triangle pcalc602 Using a trigonometric ratio to find an angle measure in a right triangle pcalc007 Common angles and trigonometric functions pcalc008 Finding trigonometric ratios given a right triangle pcalc011 Finding values of trigonometric functions given information about an angle: Problem type 1 pcalc012 Finding values of trigonometric functions given information about an angle: Problem type 2 pcalc013 Finding values of trigonometric functions given information about an angle: Problem type 3 Trigonometric functions pcalc107 Sketching the graph of a sine or cosine function: Problem type 1 pcalc106 Sketching the graph of a sine or cosine function: Problem type 2 pcalc014 Sketching the graph of a sine or cosine function: Problem type 3 pcalc017 Sketching the graph of a secant or cosecant function pcalc105 Sketching the graph of a tangent or cotangent function: Problem type 1 pcalc015 Sketching the graph of a tangent or cotangent function: Problem type 2 pcalc016 Values of inverse trigonometric functions pcalc018 Composition of a trigonometric function and an inverse trigonometric function: Problem type 1 pcalc019 Composition of a trigonometric function and an inverse trigonometric function: Problem type 2 pcalc036 Composition of a trigonometric function and an inverse trigonometric function: Problem type 3 Trigonometric identities and equations pcalc126 pcalc029 pcalc124 pcalc030 pcalc110 pcalc034 pcalc435 pcalc400 pcalc401 pcalc020 Cofunction identities Sum and difference identities Product-to-sum and sum-to-product identities Double-angle identities Verifying a trigonometric identity Proving a trigonometric identity: Problem type 1 Proving trigonometric identities: Problem type 2 Proving trigonometric identities: Problem type 3 Proving trigonometric identities: Problem type 4 Solving a basic trigonometric equation involving sine or cosine 259 260 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS pcalc021 Solving a basic trigonometric equation involving tangent, cotangent, secant, or cosecant pcalc022 Solving a trigonometric equation involving a squared function pcalc024 Solving a trigonometric equation involving more than one function pcalc025 Solving a trigonometric equation involving an angle multiplied by a constant pcalc026 Solving a trigonometric equation using sum and difference identities pcalc027 Solving a trigonometric equation using double-angle identities pcalc028 Solving a trigonometric equation using half-angle identities pcalc127 Solving a trigonometric inequality Applications of trigonometry pcalc031 Solving a triangle with the law of sines: Problem type 1 pcalc032 Solving a triangle with the law of sines: Problem type 2 pcalc033 Solving a triangle with the law of cosines pcalc060 Magnitude of a vector pcalc729 Unit vectors pcalc739 Multiplication of a vector by a scalar pcalc063 Translation of a vector pcalc725 Linear combination of vectors: Algebraic approach pcalc726 Linear combination of vectors: Geometric approach vector002 Calculating the magnitude and direction of a vector vector005 Finding the components of a vector pcalc727 Solving a word problem using vectors pcalc728 Dot product pcalc730 Finding the angle between two vectors vector006 Finding the component of a vector along another vector pcalc055 Plotting a point in polar coordinates pcalc056 Converting rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates pcalc057 Converting polar coordinates to rectangular coordinates pcalc058 Converting an equation written in rectangular coordinates to one written in polar form pcalc059 Converting an equation written in polar form to one written in rectangular coordinates pcalc052 Writing a complex number in trigonometric form pcalc054 De Moivre’s theorem pcalc724 Finding the nth roots of a number B.14 PreCalculus without Trigonometry / College Algebra Algebra review B.14. PRECALCULUS WITHOUT TRIGONOMETRY / COLLEGE ALGEBRA alge061 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 2 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 alge209 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 4 alge179 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 5 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge219 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge704 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 4 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 alge207 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 4 alge103 Solving an equation involving absolute value: Basic alge167 Solving an equation involving absolute value: Advanced alge170 Solving an inequality involving absolute value: Basic alge169 Solving an inequality involving absolute value alge060 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge205 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge206 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge029 Simplifying a polynomial expression alge030 Multiplying monomials alge180 Multiplying polynomials alge705 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient 1 alge040 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge041 Factoring a product of a quadratic trinomial and a monomial alge624 Factoring a difference of squares alge042 Factoring with repeated use of the difference of squares formula alge044 Factoring a sum or difference of two cubes alge038 Factoring a multivariate polynomial by grouping: Problem type 1 alge024 Product rule of exponents alge027 Power rule: Positive exponents alge025 Power rule: Negative exponents alge028 Product rule of exponents in a multivariate monomial scinot001 Converting between decimal numbers and numbers written in scientific notation scinot002 Multiplying and dividing numbers written in scientific notation alge080 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 1 alge084 Simplifying a sum of radical expressions alge640 Simplifying a product of radical expressions alge086 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression alge088 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression using conjugates 261 262 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge089 alge091 alge182 alge250 alge251 alge249 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 1 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 3 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 4 Rational exponents: Basic Rational exponents: Negative exponents and fractional bases Rational exponents: Powers of powers Functions and graphs set004 Set builder and interval notation set005 Union and intersection of intervals fun018 Introduction to functions: Notation and graphs fun016 Domain and range: Problem type 1 fun004 Domain and range: Problem type 2 fun010 Vertical line test pcalc114 Even and odd functions fun019 Sum, difference, and product of two functions alge185 Vertical translation of the graph of a function fun020 Vertical and horizontal translations of the graph of a function fun023 Piecewise-defined functions alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points alge073 Writing the equations of vertical and horizontal lines through a given point alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line geom807 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 1 geom808 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 2 alge701 Writing equations and drawing graphs to fit a narrative alge018 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 1 alge225 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 2 alge168 Graphing an equation involving absolute value in the plane fun021 Composition of two functions: Domain and range fun022 Composition of two functions: Basic alge129 Composition of two functions: Advanced fun011 Horizontal line test fun012 Inverse functions: Basic alge130 Inverse functions: Advanced Polynomial and rational functions B.14. PRECALCULUS WITHOUT TRIGONOMETRY / COLLEGE ALGEBRA alge045 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient 1 alge048 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge094 Completing the square alge095 Solving a quadratic equation using the quadratic formula alge707 Finding the discriminant of a quadratic equation alge703 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with rational roots alge524 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with irrational roots alge771 Solving a quadratic inequality alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 alge253 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 2 alge254 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 3 alge255 Graphing a quadratic inequality alge708 Polynomial long division: Linear divisor alge709 Polynomial long division: Quadratic divisor pcalc117 Synthetic division pcalc118 Remainder theorem alge710 Simplifying a ratio of polynomials: Problem type 1 pcalc092 Partial fraction decomposition alge681 Solving equations written in factored form alge211 Solving a quadratic equation needing simplification pcalc700 Finding a polynomial of a given degree with given zeros pcalc123 Using a given zero to write a polynomial as a product of linear factors pcalc701 Finding all potential zeros of a polynomial given by the rational zeros theorem pcalc702 Using the rational zeros theorem to find zeros of a polynomial pcalc704 Solving a word problem involving a polynomial of degree 3 pcalc048 Adding and subtracting complex numbers pcalc049 Multiplying complex numbers pcalc050 Dividing complex numbers pcalc053 Simplifying a power of i pcalc051 Solving a quadratic equation with imaginary roots pcalc705 N zeros theorem and conjugate zeros theorem pcalc703 Using the conjugate zeros theorem to find all zeros of a polynomial pcalc115 Solving a word problem by finding a local extremum of a polynomial function pcalc738 Inferring properties of a polynomial function from its graph pcalc108 Sketching the graph of a rational function: Problem type 1 pcalc109 Sketching the graph of a rational function: Problem type 2 pcalc706 Choosing the form of a rational function given its graph Exponential and logarithmic functions alge108 Exponential and logarithmic equations alge232 Evaluating a logarithmic expression 263 264 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS pcalc708 Basic properties of logarithms alge107 Change of base for logarithms alge233 Solving a logarithmic equation: Problem type 1 alge113 Solving a logarithmic equation: Problem type 2 alge111 Solving an exponential equation: Problem type 1 alge112 Solving an exponential equation: Problem type 2 alge177 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 1 alge178 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 2 pcalc737 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 3 alge712 Sketching the graph of an exponential function: Basic pcalc103 Sketching the graph of an exponential function: Advanced pcalc104 Sketching the graph of a logarithmic function pcalc102 Translating the graph of a logarithmic or exponential function Systems of linear equations and matrices alge075 Classifying a system of linear equations alge076 Solving a system of linear equations alge077 Creating an inconsistent system of linear equations pcalc099 Consistency and independence of a system of linear equations alge078 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge184 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge224 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge192 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge172 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge079 Graphing a system of linear inequalities pcalc093 Solving a word problem using a system of linear inequalities pcalc095 Linear programming pcalc094 Solving a word problem using linear programming pcalc709 Addition of matrices and multiplication of a matrix by a scalar pcalc039 Multiplication of matrices: Basic pcalc710 Multiplication of matrices: Advanced pcalc042 Finding the determinant of a 2x2 matrix pcalc043 Finding the determinant of a 3x3 matrix pcalc040 Finding the inverse of a 2x2 matrix pcalc041 Finding the inverse of a 3x3 matrix pcalc045 Cramer’s rule: Problem type 1 pcalc047 Cramer’s rule: Problem type 2 pcalc711 Using the inverse of a matrix to solve a system of linear equations pcalc712 Gauss-Jordan elimination with a 2x2 matrix pcalc046 Augmented matrix and solution set of a system of linear equations Sequences, series, and probability type type type type type 1 2 3 4 5 B.14. PRECALCULUS WITHOUT TRIGONOMETRY / COLLEGE ALGEBRA pcalc080 Finding the first terms of a sequence pcalc713 Arithmetic and geometric sequences: Identifying and writing in standard form pcalc715 Arithmetic sequences pcalc717 Geometric sequences pcalc718 Sum of the first n terms of an arithmetic sequence pcalc719 Sum of the first n terms of a geometric sequence pcalc720 Sum of a geometric series pcalc082 Factorial expressions pcalc088 Permutations and combinations: Problem type 1 pcalc089 Permutations and combinations: Problem type 2 pcalc090 Permutations and combinations: Problem type 3 pcalc087 Binomial formula stat117 Probabilities of draws with replacement stat118 Probabilities of draws without replacement stat119 Venn diagrams: Two events stat101 Venn diagrams: Word problems stat106 Outcomes and event probability stat112 Die rolling stat114 Probability of intersection or union: Word problems stat115 Independent events: Basic stat120 Probability of union: Basic stat109 Intersection and conditional probability Conic sections pcalc067 Graphing a parabola with a horizontal or a vertical axis pcalc068 Writing an equation of a parabola given the vertex and the focus pcalc069 Finding the focus of a parabola pcalc605 Graphing a circle given its equation in standard form pcalc064 Graphing a circle given its equation in general form pcalc065 Writing an equation of a circle given its center and a point on the circle pcalc066 Writing an equation of a circle given the endpoints of a diameter pcalc734 Graphing an ellipse given its equation in standard form pcalc071 Graphing an ellipse given its equation in general form pcalc072 Finding the foci of an ellipse pcalc073 Writing an equation of an ellipse given the foci and the major axis length pcalc074 Writing an equation of an ellipse given the center, an endpoint of an axis, and the length of the other axis pcalc735 Graphing a hyperbola given its equation in standard form pcalc076 Graphing a hyperbola given its equation in general form pcalc077 Finding the foci of a hyperbola pcalc078 Writing an equation of a hyperbola given the foci and the vertices pcalc079 Writing an equation of a hyperbola given the foci and the asymptotes 265 266 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge191 Midpoint of a line segment in the plane alge132 Distance between two points in the plane pcalc736 Classifying conics given their equations pcalc098 Solving a system of nonlinear equations pcalc096 Graphing a system of nonlinear inequalities: Problem type 1 B.15 PreCalculus Algebra review alge061 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 2 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 alge209 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 4 alge179 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 5 alge173 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge014 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge219 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge704 Solving a word problem using a linear equation: Problem type 4 alge020 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 2 alge021 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 3 alge207 Solving a linear inequality: Problem type 4 alge103 Solving an equation involving absolute value: Basic alge167 Solving an equation involving absolute value: Advanced alge170 Solving an inequality involving absolute value: Basic alge169 Solving an inequality involving absolute value alge060 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge205 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 2 alge206 Solving a rational equation that simplifies to a linear equation: Problem type 3 alge029 Simplifying a polynomial expression alge030 Multiplying monomials alge180 Multiplying polynomials alge705 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient 1 alge040 Factoring a quadratic with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge041 Factoring a product of a quadratic trinomial and a monomial alge624 Factoring a difference of squares alge042 Factoring with repeated use of the difference of squares formula alge044 Factoring a sum or difference of two cubes alge038 Factoring a multivariate polynomial by grouping: Problem type 1 B.15. PRECALCULUS alge024 Product rule of exponents alge027 Power rule: Positive exponents alge025 Power rule: Negative exponents alge028 Product rule of exponents in a multivariate monomial scinot001 Converting between decimal numbers and numbers written in scientific notation scinot002 Multiplying and dividing numbers written in scientific notation alge080 Simplifying a radical expression: Problem type 1 alge084 Simplifying a sum of radical expressions alge640 Simplifying a product of radical expressions alge086 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression alge088 Rationalizing the denominator of a radical expression using conjugates alge089 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 1 alge091 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 3 alge182 Solving an equation with radicals: Problem type 4 alge250 Rational exponents: Basic alge251 Rational exponents: Negative exponents and fractional bases alge249 Rational exponents: Powers of powers Functions and graphs set004 Set builder and interval notation set005 Union and intersection of intervals fun018 Introduction to functions: Notation and graphs fun016 Domain and range: Problem type 1 fun004 Domain and range: Problem type 2 fun010 Vertical line test pcalc114 Even and odd functions fun019 Sum, difference, and product of two functions alge185 Vertical translation of the graph of a function fun020 Vertical and horizontal translations of the graph of a function fun023 Piecewise-defined functions alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge195 Graphing a line given its equation in standard form alge071 Writing the equation of a line given the slope and a point on the line alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope alge631 Finding the slope of a line given its equation alge637 Determining the slope of a line given its graph alge072 Writing the equation of the line through two given points alge073 Writing the equations of vertical and horizontal lines through a given point alge198 Graphing a vertical or horizontal line geom807 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 1 geom808 Slopes of parallel and perpendicular lines: Problem type 2 267 268 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS alge701 Writing equations and drawing graphs to fit a narrative alge018 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 1 alge225 Graphing a linear inequality in the plane: Problem type 2 alge168 Graphing an equation involving absolute value in the plane fun021 Composition of two functions: Domain and range fun022 Composition of two functions: Basic alge129 Composition of two functions: Advanced fun011 Horizontal line test fun012 Inverse functions: Basic alge130 Inverse functions: Advanced Polynomial and rational functions alge045 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient 1 alge048 Finding the roots of a quadratic equation with leading coefficient greater than 1 alge094 Completing the square alge095 Solving a quadratic equation using the quadratic formula alge707 Finding the discriminant of a quadratic equation alge703 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with rational roots alge524 Solving a word problem using a quadratic equation with irrational roots alge771 Solving a quadratic inequality alge252 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 1 alge253 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 2 alge254 Graphing a parabola: Problem type 3 alge255 Graphing a quadratic inequality alge708 Polynomial long division: Linear divisor alge709 Polynomial long division: Quadratic divisor pcalc117 Synthetic division pcalc118 Remainder theorem alge710 Simplifying a ratio of polynomials: Problem type 1 pcalc092 Partial fraction decomposition alge681 Solving equations written in factored form alge211 Solving a quadratic equation needing simplification pcalc700 Finding a polynomial of a given degree with given zeros pcalc123 Using a given zero to write a polynomial as a product of linear factors pcalc701 Finding all potential zeros of a polynomial given by the rational zeros theorem pcalc702 Using the rational zeros theorem to find zeros of a polynomial pcalc704 Solving a word problem involving a polynomial of degree 3 pcalc048 Adding and subtracting complex numbers pcalc049 Multiplying complex numbers pcalc050 Dividing complex numbers pcalc053 Simplifying a power of i B.15. PRECALCULUS pcalc051 pcalc705 pcalc703 pcalc115 pcalc738 pcalc108 pcalc109 pcalc706 Solving a quadratic equation with imaginary roots N zeros theorem and conjugate zeros theorem Using the conjugate zeros theorem to find all zeros of a polynomial Solving a word problem by finding a local extremum of a polynomial function Inferring properties of a polynomial function from its graph Sketching the graph of a rational function: Problem type 1 Sketching the graph of a rational function: Problem type 2 Choosing the form of a rational function given its graph Exponential and logarithmic functions alge108 Exponential and logarithmic equations alge232 Evaluating a logarithmic expression pcalc708 Basic properties of logarithms alge107 Change of base for logarithms alge233 Solving a logarithmic equation: Problem type 1 alge113 Solving a logarithmic equation: Problem type 2 alge111 Solving an exponential equation: Problem type 1 alge112 Solving an exponential equation: Problem type 2 alge177 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 1 alge178 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 2 pcalc737 Solving a word problem using an exponential equation: Problem type 3 alge712 Sketching the graph of an exponential function: Basic pcalc103 Sketching the graph of an exponential function: Advanced pcalc104 Sketching the graph of a logarithmic function pcalc102 Translating the graph of a logarithmic or exponential function Trigonometry pcalc001 Converting between a decimal degree and degrees-minutes-seconds pcalc002 Converting between degree and radian measure pcalc003 Coterminal angles pcalc005 Arc length and central angle measure pcalc006 Sketching an angle in standard position geom506 Special right triangles pcalc600 Sine, cosine, and tangent ratios pcalc601 Using a trigonometric ratio to find a side length in a right triangle pcalc602 Using a trigonometric ratio to find an angle measure in a right triangle pcalc007 Common angles and trigonometric functions pcalc008 Finding trigonometric ratios given a right triangle pcalc011 Finding values of trigonometric functions given information about an angle: Problem type 1 269 270 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS pcalc012 Finding values of trigonometric functions given information about an angle: Problem type 2 pcalc013 Finding values of trigonometric functions given information about an angle: Problem type 3 pcalc107 Sketching the graph of a sine or cosine function: Problem type 1 pcalc106 Sketching the graph of a sine or cosine function: Problem type 2 pcalc014 Sketching the graph of a sine or cosine function: Problem type 3 pcalc017 Sketching the graph of a secant or cosecant function pcalc105 Sketching the graph of a tangent or cotangent function: Problem type 1 pcalc015 Sketching the graph of a tangent or cotangent function: Problem type 2 pcalc016 Values of inverse trigonometric functions pcalc018 Composition of a trigonometric function and an inverse trigonometric function: Problem type 1 pcalc019 Composition of a trigonometric function and an inverse trigonometric function: Problem type 2 pcalc036 Composition of a trigonometric function and an inverse trigonometric function: Problem type 3 pcalc126 Cofunction identities pcalc029 Sum and difference identities pcalc124 Product-to-sum and sum-to-product identities pcalc030 Double-angle identities pcalc110 Verifying a trigonometric identity pcalc034 Proving a trigonometric identity: Problem type 1 pcalc435 Proving trigonometric identities: Problem type 2 pcalc400 Proving trigonometric identities: Problem type 3 pcalc401 Proving trigonometric identities: Problem type 4 pcalc020 Solving a basic trigonometric equation involving sine or cosine pcalc021 Solving a basic trigonometric equation involving tangent, cotangent, secant, or cosecant pcalc022 Solving a trigonometric equation involving a squared function pcalc024 Solving a trigonometric equation involving more than one function pcalc025 Solving a trigonometric equation involving an angle multiplied by a constant pcalc026 Solving a trigonometric equation using sum and difference identities pcalc027 Solving a trigonometric equation using double-angle identities pcalc028 Solving a trigonometric equation using half-angle identities pcalc127 Solving a trigonometric inequality pcalc031 Solving a triangle with the law of sines: Problem type 1 pcalc032 Solving a triangle with the law of sines: Problem type 2 pcalc033 Solving a triangle with the law of cosines pcalc060 Magnitude of a vector pcalc729 Unit vectors pcalc739 Multiplication of a vector by a scalar pcalc063 Translation of a vector pcalc725 Linear combination of vectors: Algebraic approach B.15. PRECALCULUS 271 pcalc726 Linear combination of vectors: Geometric approach vector002 Calculating the magnitude and direction of a vector vector005 Finding the components of a vector pcalc727 Solving a word problem using vectors pcalc728 Dot product pcalc730 Finding the angle between two vectors vector006 Finding the component of a vector along another vector pcalc055 Plotting a point in polar coordinates pcalc056 Converting rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates pcalc057 Converting polar coordinates to rectangular coordinates pcalc058 Converting an equation written in rectangular coordinates to one written in polar form pcalc059 Converting an equation written in polar form to one written in rectangular coordinates pcalc052 Writing a complex number in trigonometric form pcalc054 De Moivre’s theorem pcalc724 Finding the nth roots of a number Systems of linear equations and matrices alge075 Classifying a system of linear equations alge076 Solving a system of linear equations alge077 Creating an inconsistent system of linear equations pcalc099 Consistency and independence of a system of linear equations alge078 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge184 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge224 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge192 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge172 Solving a word problem using a system of linear equations: Problem alge079 Graphing a system of linear inequalities pcalc093 Solving a word problem using a system of linear inequalities pcalc095 Linear programming pcalc094 Solving a word problem using linear programming pcalc709 Addition of matrices and multiplication of a matrix by a scalar pcalc039 Multiplication of matrices: Basic pcalc710 Multiplication of matrices: Advanced pcalc042 Finding the determinant of a 2x2 matrix pcalc043 Finding the determinant of a 3x3 matrix pcalc040 Finding the inverse of a 2x2 matrix pcalc041 Finding the inverse of a 3x3 matrix pcalc045 Cramer’s rule: Problem type 1 pcalc047 Cramer’s rule: Problem type 2 pcalc711 Using the inverse of a matrix to solve a system of linear equations type type type type type 1 2 3 4 5 272 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS pcalc712 Gauss-Jordan elimination with a 2x2 matrix pcalc046 Augmented matrix and solution set of a system of linear equations Sequences, series, and probability pcalc080 Finding the first terms of a sequence pcalc713 Arithmetic and geometric sequences: Identifying and writing in standard form pcalc715 Arithmetic sequences pcalc717 Geometric sequences pcalc718 Sum of the first n terms of an arithmetic sequence pcalc719 Sum of the first n terms of a geometric sequence pcalc720 Sum of a geometric series pcalc082 Factorial expressions pcalc088 Permutations and combinations: Problem type 1 pcalc089 Permutations and combinations: Problem type 2 pcalc090 Permutations and combinations: Problem type 3 pcalc087 Binomial formula stat117 Probabilities of draws with replacement stat118 Probabilities of draws without replacement stat119 Venn diagrams: Two events stat101 Venn diagrams: Word problems stat106 Outcomes and event probability stat112 Die rolling stat114 Probability of intersection or union: Word problems stat115 Independent events: Basic stat120 Probability of union: Basic stat109 Intersection and conditional probability Conic sections pcalc067 pcalc068 pcalc069 pcalc605 pcalc064 pcalc065 pcalc066 pcalc734 pcalc071 pcalc072 pcalc073 pcalc074 Graphing a parabola with a horizontal or a vertical axis Writing an equation of a parabola given the vertex and the focus Finding the focus of a parabola Graphing a circle given its equation in standard form Graphing a circle given its equation in general form Writing an equation of a circle given its center and a point on the circle Writing an equation of a circle given the endpoints of a diameter Graphing an ellipse given its equation in standard form Graphing an ellipse given its equation in general form Finding the foci of an ellipse Writing an equation of an ellipse given the foci and the major axis length Writing an equation of an ellipse given the center, an endpoint of an axis, and B.16. AP STATISTICS (QUANTITATIVE) the length of the other axis pcalc735 Graphing a hyperbola given its equation in standard form pcalc076 Graphing a hyperbola given its equation in general form pcalc077 Finding the foci of a hyperbola pcalc078 Writing an equation of a hyperbola given the foci and the vertices pcalc079 Writing an equation of a hyperbola given the foci and the asymptotes alge191 Midpoint of a line segment in the plane alge132 Distance between two points in the plane pcalc736 Classifying conics given their equations pcalc098 Solving a system of nonlinear equations pcalc096 Graphing a system of nonlinear inequalities: Problem type 1 B.16 AP Statistics (Quantitative) Mathematical Readiness arith048 Order of operations: Problem type 1 arith051 Order of operations: Problem type 2 arith220 Decimal place value arith221 Rounding decimals arith226 Converting between percentages and decimals arith030 Percentage of a whole number arith069 Writing a ratio as a percentage arith090 Converting a percentage to a fraction arith002 Converting a fraction to a percentage stat022 Summation of indexed data alge006 Solving a linear equation: Problem type 1 alge011 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 1 alge013 Solving a linear equation with several occurrences of the variable: Problem type 3 alge256 Y-intercept of a line alge257 X- and y-intercepts of a line given the equation in standard form alge070 Writing an equation of a line given the slope and the y-intercept alge197 Graphing a line given the x- and y-intercepts alge194 Graphing a line given its equation in slope-intercept form alge196 Graphing a line through a given point with a given slope Descriptive Statistics stat904 Interpreting pie charts 273 274 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS stat901 stat844 stat702 stat703 stat717 stat718 stat164 stat165 stat023 stat831 stat827 stat706 stat902 stat007 stat719 stat009 stat021 stat011 stat729 stat730 stat798 stat025 stat905 Computations from pie charts Double bar charts Histograms for grouped data Frequency polygons for grouped data Interpreting relative frequency histograms Cumulative distributions and ogives Comparing means without calculation Comparing standard deviations without calculation Box-and-whisker plots Interpreting a stem-and-leaf display Using back-to-back stem-and-leaf displays to compare data sets Mean, median, and mode: Computations Rejecting unreasonable claims based on average statistics Weighted mean: Tabular data Estimating the mean of grouped data Percentiles Population standard deviation Sample standard deviation Estimating the standard deviation of grouped data Chebyshev’s theorem and the empirical rule Mean, median, and mode: Comparisons Transforming the mean and standard deviation of data sets Making reasonable inferences based on proportion statistics Probability stat782 stat788 stat789 stat790 stat117 stat118 stat119 stat100 stat101 stat106 stat226 stat114 stat115 stat120 stat104 stat102 stat850 Factorial expressions Combinations Permutations Permutations, combinations, and the multiplication principle for counting Probabilities of draws with replacement Probabilities of draws without replacement Venn diagrams: Two events Venn diagrams: Three events Venn diagrams: Word problems Outcomes and event probability Die rolling Probability of intersection or union: Word problems Independent events: Basic Probability of union: Basic Mutually exclusive events: Two events Mutually exclusive events: Three events Probability of independent events B.16. AP STATISTICS (QUANTITATIVE) stat105 stat103 stat113 stat020 stat116 stat851 stat109 stat107 stat108 stat756 stat110 stat111 Independent events: Two events Independent events: Three events The curious die Calculating relative frequencies in a contingency table Conditional probability: Basic Probability of dependent events Intersection and conditional probability Conditional probability: Mutually exclusive events Conditional probability: Independent events Tree diagrams for conditional probabilities Law of total probabilities Bayes’ theorem Random Variables stat777 stat142 stat151 stat143 stat149 stat150 stat153 stat145 stat146 stat147 stat148 Classification of variables and levels of measurement Discrete versus continuous variables Discrete probability distribution: Basic Discrete probability distribution: Word problems Cumulative distribution function Expectation and variance of a random variable Rules for expectation and variance of random variables Marginal distributions of two discrete random variables Joint distributions of dependent or independent random variables Probabilities of two random variables given their joint distribution Conditional probabilities of two random variables given their joint distribution Distributions stat156 stat174 stat155 stat157 stat760 stat160 stat159 stat161 stat162 stat163 stat173 stat170 stat187 Binomial problems: Mean and standard deviation Binomial problems: Basic Binomial problems: Advanced Standard normal probabilities Standard normal values: Basic Standard normal values: Advanced Normal versus standard normal density curves Normal distribution raw scores Mean and deviation of a normal distribution Normal distribution: Word problems t distribution Chi-square distribution Normal approximation to binomial 275 276 APPENDIX B. PROGRAMS IN ALEKS stat185 Central limit theorem: Sample mean stat186 Central limit theorem: Sample sum stat188 Central limit theorem: Sample proportion Inferential Statistics stat200 stat201 stat755 stat202 stat203 stat205 normal stat206 bution stat207 stat300 stat190 stat192 stat194 stat301 stat302 stat303 stat305 stat309 stat306 stat307 stat319 stat320 stat321 Selecting a distribution for inferences on the population mean Confidence interval for the population mean: Use of the standard normal Choosing an appropriate sample size Confidence interval for the population mean: Use of the t distribution Confidence interval for a population proportion Confidence interval for the difference of population means: Use of the standard Confidence interval for the difference of population means: Use of the t distriConfidence interval for the difference of population proportions Determining null and alternative hypotheses Type I and Type II errors Type I and Type II errors and power Effect size, sample size, and power Hypothesis test for the population mean: Z test Hypothesis test for the population mean: t test Hypothesis test for a population proportion Hypothesis test for the difference of population means: Z test Hypothesis test for the difference of population means: Paired comparisons Hypothesis test for the difference of population means: t test Hypothesis test for the difference of population proportions Contingency tables: Expected frequencies Chi-square goodness-of-fit test Chi-square test of independence Regression and Correlation stat339 Sketching the least-squares regression line stat333 Linear relationship and the sample correlation coefficient stat340 Predictions from the least-squares regression line stat930 Computing the sample correlation coefficient and the coefficients for the leastsquares regression line stat931 Explained and unexplained variation and the least-squares regression line stat325 Confidence intervals and prediction intervals from simple linear regression stat947 Hypothesis tests for the correlation coefficient and the slope of the least-squares regression line Index assessments, automatic (UG) 169 assessments, canceling 70, 89 assessments, changing of 70 assessments, completion 17 assessments, final 181 assessments, initial 16 assessments, initial, continued 13, 16 assessments, lengthy 181 assessments, login time 17 assessments, progress 17 assessments, purpose of 15 assessments, purpose of (UG) 169 assessments, requested 17 assessments, requested, on selected slices 17 assessments, requesting 67, 89 assessments, restricting 101 assessments, results of (UG) 169 assessments, rules for 16 assessments, rules for (UG) 173 assessments, scheduled 85 assessments, scheduling of 16, 67, 70, 89 assessments, when to order 136 assigning learning rates 86 asymptotes, graphing with 27 authorization of registration 9 authorizing a student account 107, 72 automatic assessments, blocking, Advanced Teacher Module 92 automatic assessments, blocking, Teacher Module 68 availability of quizzes, Teacher Module 71, 95 Average, Class Report 61, 88 Average Report, display options for 61 basic interface, Teacher Module 45 blocking automatic assessments, Advanced Teacher Module 92 (UG) = User’s Guide (Appendix A) —————————— absolute values, entering 24 Access Code 8 access, restricting 101 Advanced options, class account 102 Advanced options, Teacher account 100 Advanced Teacher Module 72 ALEKS account, extending (UG) 180 ALEKS account, renewing (UG) 180 ALEKS educational paradigm 127 ALEKS, what is 1 America Online requirements (UG) 166 Answer Editor, graphing 26 Answer Editor, help with (UG) 171 Answer Editor, histograms 28 Answer Editor, manipulators for mathematical expressions 19 Answer Editor, mathematical expressions in 20 Answer Editor, number line 25 Answer Editor, purpose of (UG) 168 Answer Editor, what is 18 arithmetic facts 119 Ask a Friend 101 Ask a Friend button 44 assessment, first 13 assessment, in Knowledge Space Theory 145 Assessment Mode 15 Assessment options, class account 102 Assessment Report, format 29 Assessment Report, interpreting 29 Assessment Report, progress bars in 31 Assessment Report, viewing (UG) 171 Assessment Report, what is 29 assessments, automatic 17 277 278 blocking automatic assessments, Teacher Module 68 bulletin board for teachers 78 buttons, Assessment Mode 18 buttons, Learning Mode 34 Calculator button 35 calculator, disabling 101 calculator, use of with ALEKS (UG) 173 Cancel Assessment button 89 class account, creating 101, 48 class account, editing 103, 49 class account, moving from one instructor to another 103 class account, moving from one teacher to another 52 Class Admin, in Teacher Module 48 class assessment, canceling, Advanced Teacher Module 89 class assessment, scheduling, Advanced Teacher Module 89 Class Code 8 Class Code, how to obtain 101, 103, 48, 49 Class Code (UG) 166 class, deleting 103, 50 Class Program button 103 class program, selecting 103 Class Progress 53 Class Progress, display options for, Advanced Teacher Module 82 Class Progress, display options for, recommended 83 Class Progress, Full progress over last 3 months 85 Class Progress, Full progress over last 6 months 58, 85 Class Progress, Full progress over last month 85 Class Progress, Most recent progress 84 Class Progress, Most recent progress only 84 Class Progress, Progress in learning mode 57, 83 Class Progress, Progress over last 3 months 84 Class Progress, Progress over last 6 months INDEX 84 Class Progress, Progress over last month 84 Class Progress, report style for, Advanced Teacher Module 82 Class Progress, sorting in 54, 86 Class Progress, statistical information in 54, 85 Class Progress, Total progress 59, 84 Class Progress, viewing, Advanced Teacher Module 82 Class Report, Average 61, 88 Class Report, display options for, Advanced Teacher Module 88 Class Report, Ready to learn 62, 88 Class Report, Scheduled assessment 60 Class Report, viewing, Advanced Teacher Module 87 Class Report, What students can do 62, 88 class results for quiz 63 classroom integration of ALEKS 134 classroom teaching with ALEKS 128 Cleanup Tools 100, 101 Clear button, Answer Editor 20 Clear Records 100 Clear Stats 100 Compose Message button 97 computer lab, checking 7 conic sections, graphing 27 Content Editor 110 Content options, class account 102 coordinates, non-integer, graphing with 27 course content, modifying 110 courses, planning and structuring 129 crashing, how to fix 181 Dictionary, access to 41 Dictionary button 35 Dictionary, searching (UG) 171 display options for Average Report 61 display options for Class Progress, Advanced Teacher Module 82 display options for Class Report, Advanced Teacher Module 88 distance learning with ALEKS 134, 136 domain address 102, 89, 92 INDEX domain, in Knowledge Space Theory 141 downloading in Excel format 80, 86, 95 downloading in spreadsheet format 80, 86, 95 Edit button 100, 103, 106 educational paradigm in ALEKS 127 English menu 34 Enroll in Class button 105 enrolling students in a class 105, 50 enrollment, restricting 101 eraser tool 27 Exit button 34 exiting ALEKS 34 expiration date of student account 106 explanation page in Learning Mode 39 exponents, entering 24 extending an ALEKS account (UG) 180 facts, arithmetic 119 facts, math 119 FAQ 153 FAQ (UG) 175 features in ALEKS (UG) 171 feedback in Learning Mode 42 focusing instruction with ALEKS 89 fractions, entering 22 freezing, how to fix 181 frequently asked questions 153 frequently asked questions (UG) 175 Full progress over last 3 months, Class Progress 85 Full progress over last 6 months, Class Progress 58, 85 Full progress over last month, Class Progress 85 grading with quizzes, Teacher Module 71, 95 grading with scheduled assessments, Advanced Teacher Module 91 grading with scheduled assessments, Teacher Module 69 graphing, Answer Editor for 26 graphing conic sections 27 graphing points with non-integer coordinates 27 graphing with asymptotes 27 graph P tool 27 279 graph x tool 27 graph y tool 27 grouping students 86, 89, 92, 97 guidelines for ALEKS use (UG) 173 Help button, Advanced Teacher Module 78 Help button 37 help, context-sensitive 37 help, in Advanced Teacher Module 78 help, online (UG) 171 histogram, adding and subtracting bars in 28 histograms, Answer Editor for 28 histogram, setting bars to any value in 28 How do I, in Teacher Module 46 independent study with ALEKS 136 individual results for quiz 67 inner fringes, in Knowledge Space Theory 144 installation of ALEKS plugin 6 installation of ALEKS plugin (UG) 172 instances, in Knowledge Space Theory 141 instruction, planning and focusing 131 integrating a textbook 103 Intermediate Objectives 107 Internet access 5 Internet access (UG) 166 introduction 1 item page in Learning Mode 38 items in Algebra 1 237 items in Algebra 2 249 items in AP Statistics (Quantitative) 273 items in High School Geometry 245 items, in Knowledge Space Theory 141 items in Mathematics - LV3 183 items in Mathematics - LV4 186 items in Mathematics - LV5 191 items in Mathematics - LV6 / Essential Mathematics 197 items in Middle School Geometry 227 items in Middle School Math 1 205 items in Middle School Math 2 211 items in Middle School Math 3 / Foundations of High School Math 218 items in Pre-Algebra 228 items in PreCalculus 266 items in PreCalculus without Trigonometry / 280 College Algebra 260 items in Trigonometry 257 items, programs, standards 113 items, what are 114 keyboard shortcuts, Answer Editor 19 Knowledge Spaces, bibliography 146 Knowledge Spaces, history 141 knowledge spaces, in Knowledge Space Theory 143 Knowledge Spaces, Theory 141 Knowledge Spaces, what are 141 knowledge states, in Knowledge Space Theory 142 knowledge structures, in Knowledge Space Theory 143 language menu 34 Learning log, viewing, Advanced Teacher Module 82 Learning log, viewing, Teacher Module 66 Learning Mode, access to (UG) 170 Learning Mode, beginning 13 Learning Mode, collaborative help in 44 Learning Mode, explanation page 39 Learning Mode, feedback in 42 Learning Mode, interface 38 Learning Mode, item page 38 Learning Mode, practice page 39 Learning Mode, progress in (UG) 170 Learning Mode, review in 42 Learning Mode, rules for (UG) 173 Learning Mode, what is 33 Learning Mode, wrong answer page 41 Learning options, class account 102 learning rates, assigning 111, 86 learning rates in ALEKS 138 limiting scheduled assessments, Advanced Teacher Module 92 limiting scheduled assessments, Teacher Module 68 lists, entering 23 logging on to ALEKS (UG) 171 Login Name (UG) 167 login, unsuccessful 180 Macintosh requirements 5 INDEX Macintosh requirements (UG) 166 mailing list for teachers 78 Mail options, Teacher account 100 makeup quizzes 96 manual, structure and use of 1 materials, supplementary (UG) 173 mathematical expressions, advanced 24 mathematical expressions, Answer Editor for 20 mathematical expressions, types of 22 mathematical expressions, using in Message Center 97 mathematical signs, in Answer Editor 21 math facts 119 math lab, in structured course 134 math lab, supervised 134 matrices, entering 24 Message button 36 Message button, Teacher Module 98 Message Center 97, 98 Message Center, use of mathematical expressions in 97 messages, checking, Teacher Module 98 message, sending to student or class 97 messages, how students receive (UG) 171 message with scheduled assessments, Advanced Teacher Module 91 mixed numbers, entering 23 mixed numbers, problems with 181 monitoring class progress 135 monitoring individual progress 135 monitoring student use of ALEKS 135 Most recent assessment only, Class Progress 84 Most recent progress, Class Progress 84 moving a student to a new class 136 moving students from one class to another 105, 50 MyPie button 37 MyPie (UG) 171 New Class button 101 New Teacher button 99 number line, Answer Editor for 25 objectives, intermediate 107 INDEX Options button 34 orientation for students 8 outer fringes, in Knowledge Space Theory 144 parentheses, in Answer Editor 21 Password, changing (UG) 171 Password, obtaining (UG) 167 PC requirements 5 PC requirements (UG) 166 pencil tool 26 percentages, entering 22 pie chart, interpretation of (UG) 169 pie chart, reduced 181 plugin, downloading and installing 6 plugin, downloading and installing (UG) 172 practice page in Learning Mode 39 preparation for teachers 5 Print button 35 printing, problems 182 printing, procedure for 35 Program Editor, buttons 118 Program Editor, fields 117 Program Editor, using 118 Program Editor, what is 116 programs in ALEKS 183 programs, modifying 138 programs, what are 114 Progress button 79, 82 Progress in learning mode, Class Progress 57, 83 Progress over last 3 months, Class Progress 84 Progress over last 6 months, Class Progress 84 Progress over last month, Class Progress 84 progress reporting in QuickTables 124 quick start 3 QuickTables, additional features 125 QuickTables, advanced options in 125 QuickTables 119 QuickTables, reporting in 124 QuickTables, setting up 119 QuickTables, student use 121 QuickTables (UG) 173 QuickTables, worksheets in 125 281 Quiz button, Advanced Teacher Module 93 Quiz button 36 quiz, class results 63 quiz, creating 70, 94 quiz, creating makeup 70, 94 quiz, deleting 71, 95 quiz, editing 71, 95 quiz, individual results 67 quiz (UG) 171 quizzes, availability of, Teacher Module 71, 95 quizzes, grading with, Teacher Module 71, 95 quizzes, makeup 96 quizzes, viewing 93 Ready to learn, Class Report 62, 88 ready to learn items, significance of 30 region tool 26 registration, authorization of 9 registration in ALEKS 8 registration in ALEKS (UG) 166 regularity of ALEKS use (UG) 173 renewing an ALEKS account (UG) 180 repeating decimals, entering 23 Report button, Advanced Teacher Module 81, 87 Report button 35 reporting in QuickTables 124 Reporting, in Teacher Module 53 report style for Class Progress, Advanced Teacher Module 82 Report Tutorial 13 Request Assessment button 89 Results & Progress, Advanced Teacher Module 75 review 42 Review button 36 review, extensive 42 reviewing past material (UG) 171 Schedule Assessment button 89 Scheduled assessment, Class Report 60 scheduled assessment menu 85 scheduled assessments, grading with, Advanced Teacher Module 91 scheduled assessments, grading with, Teacher 282 Module 69 scheduled assessments, limiting, Advanced Teacher Module 92 scheduled assessments, limiting, Teacher Module 68 scheduled assessments, message with, Advanced Teacher Module 91 School Admin, in Teacher Module 51 Selector (Advanced Teacher Module) 77 self-paced learning with ALEKS 134 Server Stats button 98 server usage 98 session control 34 set notation, entering 24 setting up QuickTables 119 setup guide for teachers 5 slowness, how to fix 181 small-group instruction with ALEKS 134 sorting in Class Progress 54, 86 Spanish translation 34 special keys, Answer Editor 20 square roots, entering 23 square roots with multiplier, entering 24 Standards & Programs, Advanced Teacher Module 113 standards, what are 114 State standards report for an individual student 64, 82 State standards report for class 55, 87 State standards report (student account) 30 statistical information in Class Progress 54, 85 Status options, class account 101 structure 137 student account, authorizing 107, 72 student account, editing 106, 49 student account, expiration date of 106 student assessment, canceling, Advanced Teacher Module 89 student assessment, canceling, Teacher Module 70 student assessment, changing, Teacher Module 70 student assessment, scheduling, Advanced Teacher INDEX Module 89 student assessment, scheduling, Teacher Module 67, 70 student password, changing 106, 49 student progress, viewing, Advanced Teacher Module 79 student progress, viewing, Teacher Module 65 student reports, dating of 81 student report, viewing, Advanced Teacher Module 81 student report, viewing, Teacher Module 66 students, grouping 86, 89, 92, 97 students, how to register 4 students, preparing for ALEKS 130 student, unenrolling 50 Student User Guide 165 support and consultation 163 system requirements 5 system requirements (UG) 166 Taking Actions, in Teacher Module 67 teacher account, creating 51, 99 teacher account, deleting 100, 52 teacher account, editing 100, 49, 52 Teacher Module, Advanced, access to 77 Teacher Module, Advanced 72 Teacher Module, Advanced, buttons in 115 Teacher Module, Advanced, editing programs 116 Teacher Module, Advanced, entering 73 Teacher Module, Advanced, levels of privilege 77 Teacher Module, Advanced, navigation and use of 115 Teacher Module, Advanced, online help 78 Teacher Module, Advanced, Results & Progress 75 Teacher Module, Advanced, Standards & Programs 113 Teacher Module, Advanced, tutorial for 73 Teacher Module, Advanced, what is 75 Teacher Module, basic interface 45 Teacher Module 7 Teacher Module, suggestions for use 127 teacher password, changing 51 INDEX teaching with ALEKS, suggestions for 127 technical requirements 5 technical requirements (UG) 166 technical support 163 textbook integration 103 time to completion, current objective 54, 85 topics mastered, complete list of 66, 82 Total progress, Class Progress 59, 84 troubleshooting 180 Tutorial, Advanced Teacher Module 73, 75 Tutorial, Advanced Teacher Module, return to 77 Tutorial, purpose of 12 Tutorial, purpose of (UG) 168 typing input, problems 181 Undo button, Answer Editor 20 unenrolling a student 50 unenrolling students from a class 105, 50 units, answers with 23 What students can do, Class Report 62, 88 worksheet 43 Worksheet button 36 worksheets, answers to 43 worksheets in QuickTables 125 worksheets, records of 43 worksheet (UG) 171 wrong answer page in Learning Mode 41 283

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement